UWE Estates and Facilities Design Guide and... · Provide sufficient space at PC terminals to enable students to work with ‘study-buddies’. This could benefit disabled students

UWE Estates and Facilities Design Guide

Issue 1.3

UWE Design Guide for Buildings

i

Table of Contents

Chapter 1: Introduction

Chapter 2: Design governance

Chapter 3: UWE Strategies

Chapter 4: Space planning

Chapter 5: Fabric and structural design

Chapter 6: Mechanical engineering design

Chapter 7: Electrical engineering design

Chapter 8: IT Infrastructure

Chapter 9: Landscaping, biodiversity and infrastructure

Chapter 10: Audio Visual (AV) Infrastructure

Appendices

Management of Appendices

Throughout the design guide, there are references to a range of external documents (such as

British Standards and BSRIA guidance) and UWE documents (such as UWE drawings standards or

strategy documents).

Designers are expected to have their own access to third party documents. Where these are freely

available, hyperlinks have been embedded in the design guide.

Internal, UWE documents will predominantly be made available through hyperlinks embedded in the

design guide.

The intention of using hyperlinks is to avoid the need for continually updating and issuing a suite of

generic appendices.

Where specific documents have been written to support this design guide, they will be provided as

a discrete appendix.


ii

Change Control

Please note that this change control log must be used for changes to any part of the design guide: The individual parts do not have their own change control records.

Version

Number1

Date of

Issue 2 Author(s) 3 Brief Description of Change(s) 4

1.0 30/05/17 N Bell, N Cooper,

S Brennan Complete rewrite of existing Design Guide.

1.1 03/10/17 N Bell

Minor alterations to security standards requested by

A. Hennessy. Minor alterations to gender neutral

and wellbeing spaces: Wording was unclear.

Incorporated minor change to IT standard (re: no

suspended ceiling in comms room). Approval by

Masterplan Executive.

1.2 06/11/17 N Bell

Following meeting with E&D, added clarification

about wellbeing rooms at 3.6.1 and about half-

height walls in engineering/robotic areas (in 5.8.2).

Clarification added to the need for glazing to protect

modesty (at 5.7.4). The option for laboratory/

workshop furniture to have an adjustable height and

to be available at different locations (at 1.2.3). The

need for at least one gender neutral toilet to be self-

contained in a row of cubicles (at 3.3.2.1).

1.3

11/12/17 N Bell Incorporation of AV design as Chapter 10. Approval

by the Campus 2020 board on 06/12/17. ‘Draft’

removed.

1 Add in a version number of the document. This will help you track your changes. Your first draft version of the Report

would be Version 1.0. Any minor changes after your first draft could be labelled 1.1., 1.2 and so on. When a significant

number of changes are being made or when your Report has reached a milestone (for example, it is ready for internal

review), you could then change your Version to 2.0 or 3.0. Remember to change the footer at the same time.

2 Indicate the date you are working on the Report. This, along with your version number, will help you keep track of the

most up-to-date version.

3 More than one person will contribute to the report and it is important to indicate who worked on the Report, on what

date and in what specific areas. If you have questions later, you can then easily refer back to the specific author.

4 Identify what section was changed and provide a brief description of why the changes took place.


Chapter 1: Introduction


C h a p t e r 1 | I n t r o d u c t i o n I s s u e 1 . 3 P a g e | 1

Table of Contents

1.1 Introducing the design guide ........................................................................................ 2

1.2 Designing an Experience .............................................................................................. 2

1.2.1 New Pedagogical Approaches ................................................................................ 2

1.2.2 Catering for different aesthetics ............................................................................. 5

1.2.3 Laboratory/workshop design .................................................................................. 6

1.2.4 Student Accommodation ........................................................................................ 6

1.3 Introduction to UWE .................................................................................................... 7

1.4 Introduction to the Design Guide .................................................................................. 8

1.4.1 What is design? .................................................................................................... 8

1.4.2 Scope of the Design Guide..................................................................................... 8

1.4.3 When does the Design Guide apply? ....................................................................... 8

1.4.4 Design Guide Ownership & Updating ...................................................................... 8

1.4.5 Structure of the Design Guide ................................................................................ 9

1.4.6 Designer Responsibilities ....................................................................................... 9

1.5 Strategy 2020 ........................................................................................................... 10

1.5.1 Core Values ........................................................................................................ 10

1.5.2 Priorities ............................................................................................................ 10

1.5.3 Key enablers ...................................................................................................... 11

1.6 General Design Principles ........................................................................................... 12

1.6.1 Considering ‘adjacencies’ ..................................................................................... 14

1.6.2 Physical, mental and spiritual wellbeing ................................................................ 14

1.7 Masterplan ................................................................................................................ 15

Selected Glossary ................................................................................................................ 16



1.1 Introducing the design guide

The design guide explains the overarching principles, functional requirements and technical

standards for our buildings and infrastructure which ultimately allow UWE to deliver it’s core

function: To educate and prepare students for life after their course. This chapter explains:

What the design guide is and when it is to be used

UWE’s overarching strategy, Strategy 2020, and how it influences design principles

First of all, it is important to establish what good educational design might look like and how it can

be achieved. It would be completely erroneous to assume a building that complies with building

regulations or British Standards will achieve this aim.

1.2 Designing an Experience

By altering our built environment we are ‘designing an experience’ for our students and staff.

The Higher Education sector has radically changed since these design guides were first issued in

2011. It is increasingly important that we offer attractive, inclusive, sustainable and functional

learning, teaching, social and living environments, or environments that blend these roles. Our

built environment must be flexible enough to cope with changing demands and teaching methods.

It is only through consultation that we will determine how the built environment will effectively

support and impact on the student experience, remembering that no two faculties are the same.

Chapter 2 of this design guide explains the different stakeholders at UWE.

1.2.1 New Pedagogical Approaches

The traditional model of education involved a tutor disseminating information to a fairly passive

group of students in a classroom setting. Students might complete work outside of the classroom.

As technology developed, these outside activities moved to a digital format (‘blended learning’).

There are now very different approaches to education with an increasing move towards active and

collaborative learning experiences. In a ‘flipped classroom’ approach, group work, discussions and

individual/self-directed learning occur within the premises, facilitated by the tutor, and traditional

teaching may occur at home with students watching online presentations. Lecture capture is

therefore now a standard UWE requirement in teaching rooms. This technology also gives some

disabled students or students with caring responsibilities etc. new options for accessing lectures.

Clearly, laboratory or workshop-based classes will have very specific requirements.

On average each student has 3 electronic devices and uses them as an integral part of their

learning experience (e.g. videoing lectures to review at their own pace or making notes on tablets).

This leads to vastly different power requirements than when the University was first built (and

challenges for bringing power to desks etc. within large floor areas).



The faculty is best placed to explain their pedagogical approach, how this needs to drive design and

their expectations of how this may change in coming years.

Seating areas in corridors allows students to

engage in directed discussions or participate in

informal mentoring. These facilities also offer

opportunities for people to rest as needed.

A collaborative work station, creating a pod connected

to but separate from adjoining corridors. It overcomes

the institutional (and potentially disorienting and

intimidating) appearance of long, featureless corridors.

A collaborative workstation, within a learning zone. It facilitates discussion. Cabling enables shared use of a

monitor. High backed sofas create a ‘booth’ while the lightweight chairs can be moved to enable a

wheelchair user to make use of the space (although it would have been preferable if one of these chairs had

arm rests to help people sit/stand). Technology is embedded into these workstations, with USB charging

points, video capture for skype calls etc. This enhances the flexibility of these spaces (taking away a need

for video conferencing suites) and mirrors how many students use technology in their day-to-day life.

Traditional teaching methods are still needed. While tiered seating is sometimes used, new styles

of layout are emerging (e.g. ‘Harvard style’). They all present practical challenges. For example,

access to fixtures or equipment, such as projectors, above tiered seating needs careful thought.

These rooms often have fixed seating and some rows may be inaccessible to someone with mobility

impairments. An entire row or section of moveable furniture at the front and back of the room (as

long as they are accessible) gives people choice about where to sit, so will not be stigmatized by

sitting in a ‘disabled area’, and offers space for assistive equipment and support.



A social/café space immediately outside traditional classrooms becomes a ‘break out’ areas for students. This creates a vibrant, multi-use space.

Multi-functional spaces can (obviously) be used for many

purposes and will be utilised much more effectively than

single-use spaces. UWE is then not left heating, cooling

and cleaning empty spaces.

Social spaces can become self-directed or collaborative

learning zones with appropriate choice of furniture and

provision of power (as demonstrated to the right).

A flexible learning space is often presented as a large

space with wheeled/reconfigurable tables and chairs

enabling a room to be set up in a variety of patterns1.

Other, more progressive ideas include:

Wheeled bookshelves/cabinets enabling the layout of

a large space to be reconfigured.

Use of acoustic blankets as room dividers.

Worktables with pull down power enabling them to be used in different locations and for

different purposes (down for laptop/tool use, up for discussions and model-making etc.).

Provide sufficient space at PC terminals to enable students to work with ‘study-buddies’. This

could benefit disabled students who are supported by assistants.

It should also be noted that flexible spaces are also a key component of our business continuity

strategy: We can quickly reconfigure areas to accommodate different functions in the aftermath of

an incident. Large spaces are also generally more accessible, presenting fewer doors to navigate.

The provision of building services (and IT infrastructure for AV equipment and video capture

technology etc.) needs careful consideration if large areas can be reconfigured to prevent creating

zones which are overheated/cooled and adjacent areas are inadequately serviced.

1 Furniture selection will influence how accessible a facility is. UWE expects designs to incorporate tables at

varying heights, with good space beneath to accommodate wheelchairs. Seats with arms will assist someone to stand if they need additional support. Lightweight furniture, with hand holds, can be easily moved.



Example from Northumbria University, showing collaborative learning spaces and learning ‘pods’. While

many students will enjoy the blend of social and learning spaces offered by a collaborative spaces, this will

not suit every student, assignment or subject matter and mixed provision is needed. Individuals with

cognitive or hearing impairments could struggle to hear or process information in loud, busy, open spaces.

There may also be scope for individuals to control the climate within pods, suiting their individual needs.

To reiterate, it is beyond the scope of the design guide to predict the exact requirements of

faculties or to predict changes in pedagogical approaches and technology. It is only through

effective consultation that a design team will appreciate what is needed.

1.2.2 Catering for different aesthetics

To meet the expectations of our students, it is important that UWE is ‘de-institutionalised’. This is

reflected in our branding but must be conveyed by our built environment.

Each faculty will also have it’s own aesthetics, depending on the subjects it teaches and the

demographics and expectations of students. Some strive for a corporate look, others aspire to be

relaxed or artistic, while others may want or need a clinical, scientific or industrial appearance.

While this design guide encourages standardisation (to help achieve best value), designers must

accept that each project will need to be judged on its own merits.

Regardless of these variations, any teaching walls (i.e. walls on which images are projected) must

be painted 00NN 16/000 – Grey. This accentuates the screen and benefits students with certain

cognitive or visual impairments who might struggle if faced with a large, white wall.

Room booking systems, connected to tablets,

enables the University to utilise space much

more effectively and hands control over to the

students. Students are able to quickly check

whether/when rooms are available and can

book the space. This creates a more flexible,

agile and empowering learning experience.



1.2.3 Laboratory/workshop design

Laboratories and workshops have requirements above and beyond traditional teaching spaces. In

some cases, this includes a need for safety features such as door interlocks and high levels of

containment to prevent inadvertent release of substances. UWE requirements are detailed in:

UWE Health and Safety Standards, available here (click ‘here’)

General, discipline-specific requirements are contained in later chapters of this design guide

Some equipment or processes have specific operational requirements (e.g. in relation to humidity,

temperature or dust control) which cannot be described here or in health and safety standards.

Achieving these standards requires a co-ordinated response from the entire design team. At RIBA

stage 1 (i.e. while discussing and developing the client brief), the UWE Project Manager will identify

specialist spaces within their project scope. Project management processes ensure that:

Appropriate stakeholders are consulted. Health and Safety standards name some of the

roles that should be involved in design and planning of work in laboratories and workshops

Capable, specialist designers are appointed

Appropriate Estates staff provide Technical Assurance (as discussed in Chapter 2)

A plan is put in place to ensure packages of design are co-ordinated

Principles of accessibility and inclusivity must be embedded in design e.g. providing some work

tables of different/adjustable heights and a mixture of seating, offering some with arm and back

rests. Offering these in different locations in a room prevents creating a ‘disabled area’.

1.2.4 Student Accommodation

Many students opt to live on campus and accommodation has a significant impact on student

experience. UWE has delivered various projects to construct blocks of student accommodation. A

typical model consists of a number of en-suite flats with shared kitchen facilities, although some

studio flats are available. As part of its commitment to inclusivity, UWE offers a range of options to

make on-site living an affordable proposition to students from different backgrounds.

There are no standard templates for accommodation. Student expectations change and it is

essential that design teams consult with accommodation services and review existing provision (in

and outside UWE) as they develop designs. It is crucial not to have pre-conceived notions.

Fire safety is, of course, a critical consideration. On top of the generic requirements for fire safety

in flats, UWE requires that hobs are only induction hobs.

Elsewhere, this design guide discusses the requirements for ensuring that appropriate numbers of

student flats are accessible and can be readily retrofitted with assistive devices. Regardless of

whether the flats are designed to be accessible it is important that communal areas are accessible

as students may receive disabled visitors (or there may be disabled reception staff etc.).

https://intranet.uwe.ac.uk/tasks-guides/Collection/health-and-safety-standards



1.3 Introduction to UWE

The University of the West of England (UWE) is a modern, growing University. It is one of Britain's

most popular universities with around 30,000 students and 3,000 staff and is the largest provider of

Higher Education in the South West of England. Students come to UWE from all parts of the UK, as

well as a significant number of international students. UWE consists of 4 main campuses:

Frenchay: UWE Bristol’s main campus, lies 4 miles north of Bristol city centre

City Campus: Home to the University’s creative and cultural subjects. It consists of

Bower Ashton, Arnolfini and other city centre properties including Spike Island and

Watershed.

Glenside campus: Home to UWE Bristol’s Faculty of Health and Applied Sciences

Gloucester: Based in Alexandra Warehouse, this is the Department of Nursing and

Midwifery's Gloucester campus.

Campus maps and information can be found here (please click ‘here’).

There are 4 Main Faculties, listed below, supported by Facilities and other professional services:

Business and Law (FBL)

Arts, Creative Industries and Education (ACE)

Environment and Technology (FET)

Health and Applied Sciences (HAS)

Further details can be found here: http://www1.uwe.ac.uk/aboutus/departmentsandservices

UWE recently rose 13 places in The Times and Sunday Times Good University Guide 2017 and is

currently ranked fifth amongst the 12 universities in the south west (September 2016).

The University is committed to providing high quality, stimulating spaces that attract and retain

students, staff and investors and reflects the University’s vision. To do this, it requires a flexible

and sustainable estate that is fit for purpose; a University that can meet changing needs of higher

education and assist the University in retaining its competitive edge within the HE sector.

In a survey of students carried out in July 2015 (source: www.aude.ac.uk) it was found that:

67% stated facilities were key in choosing a University

71% agreed the look of the University was important

As well as investing in building stock, the University is building its visual identity with new branding,

wayfinding and a presence project.

http://www1.uwe.ac.uk/about/visitus/campusmapsandinformation.aspx

http://www1.uwe.ac.uk/aboutus/departmentsandservices

http://www.aude.ac.uk/



1.4 Introduction to the Design Guide

1.4.1 What is design?

This design guide applies to all design relating to a structure (buildings, roads, landscaping etc. or

services fixed to or within them). It is useful to understand what we mean by design. UWE will

use the definition from the guidance to the Construction (Design and Management) Regulations:

The term ‘design’ includes drawings, design details, specifications, bills of quantity

and calculations prepared for the purpose of a design.

‘Design’ is very broad and applies to designers include architects, engineers and surveyors.

1.4.2 Scope of the Design Guide

This design guide has been developed to ensure that any future construction project for UWE,

whether new build or refurbishment, is designed utilising the same parameters and principles. It

will ensure that all new University property and refurbishments of older University properties are

developed to a consistently high standard. This design guide is relevant to any designer working

on the UWE built environment, including contractors with design responsibilities.

This design guide is supported by a range of appendices which will be referred to throughout.

1.4.3 When does the Design Guide apply?

Again, UWE will be guided by the Health and Safety Executive’s guidance to CDM.

The designer’s duties apply as soon as designs…are started. This includes concept

design, competitions, bids for grants, modification of existing designs and relevant

work carried out as part of feasibility studies. It does not matter whether planning

permission or funds have been secured.

In other words, the design guide should be applied from the very earliest phases of every

construction project, no matter how big or small it might be. The design guide applies to the

whole design process, including changes made during RIBA Stage 5 (the Construction Phase).

1.4.4 Design Guide Ownership & Updating

UWE Estates and Facilities will review and update this design guide on an annual basis to consider

changes in statute, industry best practice, University policy etc. In practice, this will happen

following the busy summer works period, to capture lessons learned. UWE will undertake ad hoc

reviews and amendments in light of significant changes between formal reviews.



1.4.5 Structure of the Design Guide

The Design Guide is divided into 9 Chapters, each dealing with a separate aspect of design.

1 Introduction (this current document)

2 Design governance

UWE’s expectations of how the design process will be managed, including drawing standards,

UWE’s approach to BIM, technical assurance, management of derogations etc.

3 General design

Core UWE strategies relating to equality and diversity, sustainability etc. and their impact on design.

4 Space planning design

An overview of space requirements for different functional areas within the University.

5 Fabric and structural design

Detailed requirements relating to the structure and fabric of buildings. There is also a section on

catering design.

6 Mechanical engineering design

Detailed requirements informing the selection and design of mechanical plant and installations.

7 Electrical engineering design

Detailed requirements informing the selection and design of electrical systems.

8 IT Infrastructure

Cabling design and requirements

9 Landscaping, biodiversity and infrastructure

This covers the external areas, including landscaping, roads, parking and other aspects civil

engineering, planting schemes etc.

1.4.6 Designer Responsibilities

This Design Guide is based on past UWE experiences and the University’s future goals and

ambitions. It does not absolve external design consultants of their legal or contractual

responsibilities under health and safety legislation, statutory requirements or design/professional

duties and liabilities.



1.5 Strategy 2020

Strategy 2020 maps out the journey UWE is taking as a University until 2020 to ensure our

graduates are well positioned for the future.

The outstanding learning experience we provide at UWE Bristol supports the development of

innovative, creative and courageous graduates who are passionate about their subjects and curious

to learn more. But equipping our students to play their part in a changing, fast-moving global

economy requires that we keep developing, keep enhancing and keep investing in what we do.

This document is available on the UWE website and outlines the vision and mission in more detail.

See: http://www1.uwe.ac.uk/aboutus/visionandmission/strategy.aspx

1.5.1 Core Values

It is crucial that project teams understand the core values of the University. It is perhaps useful to

think of these values as UWE’s statement of identity: They are the qualities that are most

important to UWE. The values will underpin the strategic decisions of the University.

Ambitious. We’re not afraid to shape, challenge and tackle the big issues, to take the initiative

and pave the way. To set our sights high for ourselves and our students.

Innovative. We create new opportunities for the people who work and study with us. We

embrace different ideas and pioneer new and better ways of doing things.

Connected. We have strong connections, both close to home and around the world. Networks

and communities feed into and enhance everything we do as a University.

Enabling. We instil a thirst for new knowledge, its creation and application, and help people

and organisations to be the best they can be.

Inclusive. We invest in making UWE Bristol a supportive and inspiring place to learn and work

– somewhere where diversity of experience and perspective is encouraged, and learning and

research is accessible to as many people as possible

1.5.2 Priorities

UWE has four priorities which might be thought of as strategic objectives. They are how the

values will manifest themselves. The priorities are:

1 Outstanding learning

2 Ready and able graduates

3 Research with impact

4 Strategic partnerships, connections and networks

The most important priorities for the University are therefore the learning experience and outcomes

in terms of student employability and meaningful research.

http://www1.uwe.ac.uk/aboutus/visionandmission/strategy.aspx



1.5.3 Key enablers

There are two key enablers which will support the achievement of UWE’s priorities, one of which is

highlighted below. This enabler leads naturally to the General Design principles which follow.

Key enabler 2 Place: Resources, estate and infrastructure

A strong and confident financial position, a robust approach to strategic management, and a

sustainable learning environment where our people can flourish.

We achieve this by:

taking a clear and transparent approach to strategic management that allows us to

prioritise, be accountable, take responsibility, and reward people for their contribution,

while encouraging the innovation and agility that is essential to achieving our ambition

operating in a sustainable way, and being respected and recognised for our management

standards across our strategic and financial planning, health and safety, equality and

diversity, and sustainability measures

creating a learning environment that is flexible, open and digitally connected, which

supports innovation and the shared generation of ideas and solutions across all our

campuses

encouraging sustainable and healthy behaviours that underpin all that we do.



1.6 General Design Principles

To meet the ambitions of Strategy 2020, our designs must meet a range of objectives. The

following considerations should be at the forefront of the project teams mind from the earliest

stages of a project. Many of these objectives are supported by specific strategies, as detailed in

Chapters 2 and 3 of this design guide.

Projects will be audited and benchmarked by UWE to ensure the work commissioned by us will

meet our expected standards and achieves these objectives. All construction projects will be

subject to a post completion review, with new builds and major refurbishments incorporating HEFCE

Guide to Post Occupancy Evaluation principles. Given the stated priorities of the University,

functionality and quality are likely to be assessed primarily by evaluating the extent to which a

design enhances the learning, living and research experience of students.

Design

objective

Designers will be challenged to explain/demonstrate…

Learning

Experience

How does this design enhance the learning experience, the quality of research,

and the capability of students to progress after their studies?

How does the project/design fit the business plan or strategy for the department

or faculty?

Partnerships Have we involved the right stakeholders within UWE?

To what extent does this design (or the way the project is managed) promote

partnerships with businesses and communities?

How does the project impact on our community and business partners?

Inclusive To what extent does this design create an accessible and inclusive environment?

Does it meet the different religious and faith needs of staff and students?

What barriers will it present to people who want to access or use this space?

Flexibility

and future-

proofing

To what extent can the space be altered to account for changes in technology,

educational practices, market changes, government policy and the environment?

To what extent can plant/technical spaces be reconfigured to allow for changing

patterns of energy use, availability and cost?

Value for

money

How does the design support the University in achieving a “strong and confident

financial position”?

To what extent does the design represent good value for money?

In practice, this will be achieved through a number of measures:

1 Ensuring that projects align with faculty/UWE strategies which will help to

prevent later changes to the project scope.



2 Do not confuse low cost with ‘value for money’ or expensive with good

quality. See the case study, below.

3 Achieving cost certainty and deliver projects within budget. This requires

effective governance and project management arrangements.

4 Rationalising stock or cleaning and maintenance regimes through greater

standardisation.

5 Paying close attention to the whole life cost of our assets. Our ambition is

to achieve an efficient and reliable estate, with high utilization and low

maintenance/downtime.

6 Designing for efficient maintenance and management of our Estate. This

includes providing sufficient access and information.

Student

recruitment

& retention

How does the design create an environment which encourages students to

select and remain at UWE? This helps us achieve a “strong and confident

financial position”.

Sustainable How has the design minimised our negative impacts and maximised the

sustainability benefits of the project?

Does the design promote positive wellbeing?

Healthy and

safe

What residual risks will the design leave for the people constructing, maintaining

and using the new structure?

Has the health and safety team been consulted regarding the fire strategy?

How will the design cope with the large number of person movements at core

times (at the start and end of the day, at the end of lectures?)

To what extent has the design accommodated the demands posed by the end-

users in a higher education establishment?

We recognise that there may be times when different design objectives may appear to be in

competition. The project team will need to openly discuss this as and when it arises, but always

using UWE’s values and priorities as touchstones to inform those conversations.

Case study: Cost vs Value for Money

A new building was constructed with a large area of new, external planting. An external tap was

removed from the design to reduce costs. Every time that plants need watering (which can be

several times a week) a bowser is brought across the campus and through student-occupied

areas.



1.6.1 Considering ‘adjacencies’

Designers already appreciate that their designs are located within and must be designed for a

specific context. Specifically we encourage design/project teams to think holistically and consider:

1. The impact on infrastructure beyond your site boundaries. For example, the entire wayfinding

strategy for a site may need to be revised in light of a new building and should be an integral

part of the design rather than an afterthought. More generally, how will the project influence

the flow of people through the rest of the campus? Do not just consider the immediate users.

2. Whether the project is aligned with the masterplan strategy (as discussed below). Will there be

a clash in the future (either visually or in terms of access to/from a future construction site or in

relation to services/utilities)? Would we need to adapt or even demolish your brand new or

newly refurbished structure to accommodate a future project?

3. Changing the maintenance strategy so that vehicles, such as mobile elevated work platforms or

cranes, will be required to travel over or operate on unsuitable surfaces.

4. Dealing with historical damage/defects within or immediately outside project boundaries which

would impact on the finished building if they are not dealt with (e.g. repairing damaged

flagstones along the main route to the new building).

5. The impact of the project while it is being built. University life will need to continue and it is

crucial that designers play their part. To give some examples:

a. Consider how the design or location of site hoarding/protection could be used to reduce

or enhance the visual or operational impact of a project.

b. The use of pre-fabricated elements may reduce the duration of the construction phase

c. The project can be a learning opportunity for relevant courses.

1.6.2 Physical, mental and spiritual wellbeing

The 2013-2020 sustainability plan states “UWE Bristol aims to provide a positive and enjoyable

student, staff and visitor experience. It aims to enhance everyone’s health and wellbeing by

creating and promoting healthier working, learning and social environments.” Design teams are

encouraged to think broadly about wellbeing. For example, they could consider providing:

Facilities that promote healthier forms of travel (please refer to the UWE transport strategy in

Chapter 3 of this guide)

Communal and social spaces/experiences to create a sense of community

Access to spaces that allow private reflection and solitude. Multi-function wellbeing spaces can

help to meet this ambition and are discussed in Chapter 3 of this guide

Space for artwork that can promote discussion and reflection

Facilities that promote inclusion, and do not create barriers to access (Chapter 3 of this guide

discusses inclusive design)

Access to fitness and sports facilities (see the UWE sports vision in Chapter 3 of this guide)

Facilities to meet religious beliefs (please refer to the section on faith and spirituality in Chapter

3 of this guide)

It is only through consultation that you will be able to determine what facilities are needed in a

particular building/space (which will be influenced by the proximity of facilities in adjacent areas).



1.7 Masterplan

UWE Board of Governors agreed a Paper “Towards a Master Plan Implementation Strategy” in

November 2010 which sets out the background for the development of the University over the next

25 years.

Recent projects include a new Bristol Business School (completed in 2017), new student

accommodation, investment in our City Campus and Glenside Campus and the redevelopment of

Robotics space on Frenchay Campus. Other projects and investments have included a new

Students’ Union and the acquisition and refurbishment of Bush House (Arnolfini) in the centre of

Bristol.

As discussed above, under “adjacencies”, it is crucial that design teams understand the overall

ambitions and designs for the area surrounding their project and how their own designs and

specifications impact on and must align with the masterplan.

Case study: District Heating

A district heating scheme was envisaged as part of the Frenchay masterplan (to help support

UWE’s sustainability ambitions). Individual structures were identified for connection to the

Central Heating Plant. The project teams for those structures installed necessary pipework as

part of their own projects. When the Central Heating Plant is finally installed it can be connected

with limited disruption.



Selected Glossary

B&CE: Building and Civil Engineering

BISRIA: Building Services Research and Information Association

BRE: Building Research Establishment

BREEAM: Building Research Establishment Environmental Assessment Method

BSI: British Standards Institute

CA: Contract Administrator

CDM: The Construction (Design and Management) Regulations 2015

CIBSE: Chartered Institution of Building Services Engineers

CETTS: (A University Department) Central Examination and Teaching Timetabling Services

E&D: Equality and Diversity

HEFCE: Higher Education Funding Council for England

SKA HE: The RICS environmental assessment tool to rate and compare environmental

performance of fit-out projects. Named after Skansen (an interior fit-out contractors which

initiated the project)

H&S: Health and Safety

HSE: The Health and Safety Executive

LCC: Life Cycle Cost

M&E: Mechanical and Engineering

O&M: Operations and Maintenance

RIBA: Royal Institute of British Architects

RICS: Royal Institute of Chartered Surveyors

UWE: University of the West of England

VE: Value Engineering

WLC: Whole Life Cost


Chapter 2: Design Governance


C h a p t e r 2 | D e s i g n G o v e r n a n c e I s s u e 1 . 3 P a g e | 1

Table of Contents

2.1 Introduction to Design Governance ............................................................................... 2

2.2 Consulting to create a usable design ............................................................................. 2

2.3 Aesthetic and visual impact .......................................................................................... 3

2.4 Project Governance ..................................................................................................... 4

Project Management ............................................................................................. 4

Standards governing design work ........................................................................... 4

Construction (Design & Management) Regulations 2015 (CDM) ................................ 5

Management of occupied buildings including sequential handover ............................. 6

Departures from Standards and Specifications ......................................................... 6

Technical Assurance .............................................................................................. 7

Named, Specialist Contractors ................................................................................ 7

2.5 Designing for Facilities Management & Maintenance ....................................................... 8

Design features to improve access for plant/technical areas ..................................... 8

Lessons Learned ................................................................................................... 9

Facilities for cleaning ........................................................................................... 10

2.6 Designing for Business Continuity ............................................................................... 11

2.7 Designing for Climate Resilience ................................................................................. 12

2.8 Overview of Asset Management at UWE ...................................................................... 14

2.9 Cost-in-use ............................................................................................................... 14

Cost-in-use evaluations on major capital projects .................................................. 14

Evaluations on minor capital projects (under £2.5m exc. VAT) ................................ 16

Standards .......................................................................................................... 16

References ......................................................................................................... 16

2.10 Soft Landings ............................................................................................................ 17

Information required at handover ........................................................................ 17

2.11 Post Occupancy Evaluation (POE) ............................................................................... 18

2.12 BIM, Asset Capture, Drawing Standards and the Common Data Environment ................. 18

2.13 Temporary Works Design ........................................................................................... 20

Temporary Road/Footpath/Car Parks (and managing Closures/Diversions) .............. 21

Disturbance of soft-landscaping ........................................................................... 21



2.1 Introduction to Design Governance

The purpose of this chapter of the design guide is to set out how UWE expects the design

process to be managed. Specifically, it explains:

The need to consult relevant stakeholders and identifies who they might be

How the Construction (Design and Management) Regulations need to be approached at UWE

The role of UWE staff responsible for Technical Assurance and management of derogations

UWE’s approach to BIM and drawing standards

UWE’s approach to life cycle costs, softlandings and post-occupancy evaluation

The need to design an estate which is resilient and easy to maintain and clean

The management of temporary work design

2.2 Consulting to create a usable design

Designers will need to engage a range of stakeholders in a timely manner to create a functional

design. On a project-by-project basis, the team must determine who needs to be consulted, how

and when (UWE project processes provide an aide memoire).

These stakeholders inform design and project planning by explaining requirements, sharing

expertise or consulting with their own stakeholders. Do not assume knowledge of how spaces will

be used or expect one stakeholder to have all the answers. Examples of how they can help are:

Faculties can establish student user groups to help develop briefs and assess proposed designs.

Cleaning services can test the ‘cleanability’ of proposed products where they deviate from UWE

standards and advise on the impact this will have on cleaning regimes and costs.

CETTS (Central Examination and Time Tabling Service) can report on current space utilisation

and model the space requirements or impacts of a proposed project.

The following is a list of the UWE internal stakeholders which project teams may need to liaise with.

End users. This may be:

o Academic & technical staff

o The library

o The Centre for Sport

o Accommodation services

o Student Union

o A professional service

CETTS

Sustainability team

Grounds team

Energy team

Business risk management

Cleaning Services

Catering

MTC service provider

Community Liaison Officer

Travel and access

UWE Marketing

Hospitality Services

IT Services

Insurance manager

Equality & Diversity

Faith & Spirituality

Printing and stationary

Security

Health & Safety team inc. fire and construction leads



2.3 Aesthetic and visual impact

Designers are encouraged to create buildings and spaces that produce visual impact and inspire

users. Iconic facades do not reflect the values and ethos of the University. The internal design

and fit out must maximize student experience.

Experience at UWE has confirmed that less conventional designs requires close attention to co-

ordination and quality assurance, particularly in relation to contractor-led packages.

Designers must obviously ensure that any project’s physical impact on the surrounding area, local

communities and environment is in keeping and must satisfy the Local Authorities requirements.

Designers must ensure that a relative scale to any proposed development is maintained through

well-proportioned routes and spaces. Hard and soft landscaping must be used to ensure that

buildings compliment their surroundings and a sense of scale through softening of the outline of the

building is achieved. At the edges of any development, the design team must ensure that a strong,

open, accessible and active interface is achieved with the surrounding areas on all elevations.

Effective co-ordination is required between all the design disciplines to achieve the overall, desired

standard of appearance.



2.4 Project Governance

Project Management

Effective project management ensures that project objectives can be met. Projects are to be

managed with regard to the principles set in Achieving Excellence in Construction suite of

Procurement Guides and managed in the spirit of Prince II.

Needless to say, it is crucial that designers refer to and help clarify the client’s brief to establish

what is in and out of scope. The client’s budget for the project may include the cost of certain

items required post-completion and during the project’s operational use.

Standards governing design work

Projects will be, as a minimum, designed and constructed in compliance with but not limited to:

All relevant Acts of Parliament, Statutory Instruments and associated codes of practice or

guidance

The requirements of the Building Regulations

All relevant EN Structural Eurocodes

British Standards, Specifications and Codes of Practice, including BS 8300 ‘Design of

buildings and their approaches to meet the needs of disabled people — Code of practice’

The requirements of the Local Authority and utility supply companies

Standard UWE Specifications

BRE Green Guide for Specification

The BREEAM rating which has been agreed or other, relevant standard. This may include

RICS SKA HE but this needs agreeing on a project-by-project basis as this standard may not

be appropriate for all projects.

The LPC Design Guide for the Fire Protection of Buildings.

CIBSE guidance.

BSRIA guides that are specifically referred to in the text of the design guide.

Loss Prevention Standards (also known as Red Book Live)

All as current at the time of appointment and further revisions prior to final design sign off.

UWE will require design teams to evidence – or may seek to verify for itself – that these standards

have been complied with. UWE project processes set out how this will be achieved.

In addition, standards such as ISO 14001:2015 environmental management system inform UWE’s

strategies and will therefore indirectly impact upon design.

A number of Chapters of the design guides are specifically written to explain how the above

standards are to be interpreted and applied in UWE and may introduce additional standards.



Construction (Design & Management) Regulations 2015 (CDM)

UWE has a suite of documents setting out how it will comply with it’s duties as a Construction Client

and where relevant, as a Principal Designer and Designer. As a general principle, UWE will seek to

appoint the designer with most control over the design team as Principal Designer.

Designers must identify and manage risks associated with their designs, to the people who are

constructing, adapting etc. their structures (now or in the future), the people who are maintaining

or cleaning the structure or the people who will ultimately be using their designs.

Design risk management

As a client, UWE has identified design features that create or mitigate risks for future maintenance

and for users of their buildings and infrastructure, or which may pose risks to staff or students in

the vicinity of construction projects. The UWE design guides may take the following actions:

Insist that certain design features must be included or excluded

Encourage or discourage certain design features

If a design feature is discouraged, yet there is a compelling case for including that feature, it must

be evaluated using a design risk register and discussed with the UWE project lead and principal

designer.

Designers must be aware of the HSE’s ‘Red, Amber and Green’ list of design features which appears

in the industry guidance for designers (found here, please click ‘here’). If a designer wants to

include any ‘red’ or ‘amber’ design details they must also record these on the risk register.

The principal designer will help to determine precisely how risks are recorded and tracked. As part

of this process it is critical that designers consider and record how the new structure, plant and

services will be maintained. As explained later, this information must be included in the health and

safety file.

Designers need to be mindful that the population in a higher education setting is not the same as in

a commercial, retail or other urban environment. One of the key differences is that there are

peaks of population movement which designs must accommodate.

Designer’s responsibilities for risks during the construction phase

Designers can influence the risks posed to staff, students, UWE operations and contractors during

the construction phase.

UWE has developed a Safety Pack that sets out requirements and expectations of contractors on

UWE sites, e.g. stipulating the minimum separation distance between buildings and skips, the

http://www.citb.co.uk/health-safety-and-other-topics/health-safety/construction-design-and-management-regulations/cdm-guidance-documents/



standards of site protection, loss prevention standards for sheeting. It also highlights site-specific

hazards that project teams need to be aware of, such as hazardous vents on certain roofs.

All designers and project managers must review the contractor’s safety pack and consider how

their own decisions will affect the contractor’s ability to comply. If the project team imposes

excessive constraints on a project (e.g. in terms of time and space) it may not be possible for

contractors to comply with the Pack. Alternatively, the project team could make decisions that

create subsequent delays or risks because hazards were not identified and mitigated early enough.

From the earliest stages of the project, the team must be considering:

What surveys etc. are required to identify hazards and agree how risks can be mitigated,

perhaps through changes of design or project scope.

The logistics for delivering a safe and efficient project. Consider site boundaries, compound

space, traffic routes for construction traffic and likely sequencing/timing of work (which

could be reduced by pre-fabrication). This information must be reflected in contract

documents and the package of pre-construction information. Enabling works packages may

be needed.

Services must be protected - When making connections to existing services, the project will

need to determine the condition and capacity of the existing services and upgrade where

necessary. Where services to occupied buildings will be disrupted, the scope of the project

must include provision of alternative supplies in advance of diversion or disconnections.

The project must consider and mitigate the impact on access routes to and around the site

(for pedestrians, construction traffic, UWE deliveries, maintenance operations, emergency

vehicles etc.). See the section on temporary footpaths, later.

Developing a site constraints plan to convey the ‘buildability’ constraints and challenges.

Management of occupied buildings including sequential handover

After balancing a range of competing risks, costs and constraints, a decision may be reached that

the building being altered will remain partially occupied throughout the course of the works, or

there will be staged handover. Public protection measures and/or the handover programme must

be established in as much detail as possible before tendering for the principal contractor (so that

they will allow for this in their costs and programme etc.). The softlanding process will help the

project team to establish a well-managed handover programme, including identifying what

certificates and warranties will need to be in place before any handover commences.

Departures from Standards and Specifications

While trying to set out minimum standards in these design guides, the University does not wish to

stifle innovation. Innovation is a core value of Strategy 2020 and design teams are encouraged to

be creative and forward thinking. UWE will accept departures from standards/specifications.



These departures may be allowed if there is a specific and direct advantage to the University.

Economic advantage will be evaluated using a whole life cost model to ensure that the university

obtains value for money through the life of the building. There may be factors other than

economic that may justify a departure from standard. UWE project processes describe how

departures from these standards will be managed (using derogation schedules). Design teams

must also be aware that UWE will ensure a technical assurance function is allocated to certain

projects who will review/comment on design proposals.

Technical Assurance

UWE contract and project management documents set out how technical assurance is to be

managed which will vary depending on the size and complexity of the project, the form of contract

etc. Designers will be informed what design information (including specifications) need to be

submitted, when and to whom and the process for discussing and resolving queries or reviewing

and approving derogations.

Projects must have a drawing release schedule which will ensure that the pre-construction phase is

being adequately managed and co-ordinated (including ensuring designers are being given

adequate time), designs are progressing in a timely manner and that individuals in technical

assurance or principal designer roles have sufficient time to discharge their own duties.

To support this process, UWE must be provided with co-ordinated designs details and drawings.

Co-ordinated drawings are essential: It is frankly pointless issuing a disembodied design for

comment as problems predominantly arise through the interface with other designs. Use of BIM

(as discussed later) will support more effective design co-ordination.

Named, Specialist Contractors

Design teams must be aware that UWE will sometimes require the use of named, specialist

contractors who have design responsibilities. It is the responsibility of the lead designer (supported

by the Principal Designer) to ensure these packages are co-ordinated with the overall design.



2.5 Designing for Facilities Management & Maintenance

The demands of maintaining and managing a new structure and plant/services is a fundamental

part of the design process. It requires a co-ordinated response from all disciplines.

Consultants must adopt the principles and process outlined in the current version of BS 8536-1 and

BS 8526-2 ‘Briefing for design and construction. Code of practice for facilities management’.

Access and maintenance and/or plant replacement strategies are needed on all projects (unless

agreed otherwise). In brief, an outline strategy must be produced during RIBA Stage 3 consisting of

descriptive text and supporting drawings to show the provision for safe and practical maintenance

and replacement. A detailed strategy must be developed during RIBA stage 4. Before the project

proceeds, the documents must be reviewed by the Principal Designer, UWE maintenance team and

staff responsible for Technical Assurance. The documents form part of the health and safety file.

The first year of maintenance of some items of large plant (e.g. lift, boiler, chiller) will be the

responsibility of the principal contractor. This will be clarified in contract documents. The

intention is to encourage project teams to carefully consider ‘maintainability’ at design stage and, in

the pre-tender stage, to identify maintenance responsibilities.

Design features to improve access for plant/technical areas

Designers must apply “Defence Works Functional Standard, Design & Maintenance Guide 08: Space

requirements for plant access, operation and maintenance” to determine access/maintenance space

requirements, particularly within plant rooms. As a result, adequate space for maintenance,

removal and replacement shall be provided around all plant (to a minimum of manufacture’s

requirements). Chapters 6 and 7 explain that UWE will adopt BSRIA BG6 on projects with a

construction value of £2.5m (exc. VAT) or more. This will help ensure adequate space is provided.

The table below sets out UWE’s preferred and least preferred options relating to some recurring

issues that have rendered designs difficult to maintain or clean. If a design team wishes to

introduce a least preferred option, the derogation and change management processes must be

followed and the proposal accompanied by a design risk evaluation. This evaluation may be an

entry in the design risk register but may potentially be a more detailed justification explaining the

constraints that led to this design. If approved, the proposed management of the issue must be

fully addressed in access and maintenance/plant replacement strategies starting in RIBA Stage 3.

Most Preferred Options Least Preferred Options

External plant in a ground level, secure

compound or in a dedicated ground floor

plantroom with external, vehicular access

Roof mounted plant. In this case, the plant replacement

strategy must explain how crane operations will be managed

Internal plant areas (requiring large items of plant and

equipment to be moved through the building)



Most Preferred Options Least Preferred Options

All plant and maintainable components

accessible from permanent walkways

Lights, sensors etc. that require specialist access equipment,

closure of access routes and/or extensive work at height to

maintain or a requirement to work above tiered lecture

seating

Light fittings/sensors etc. that can be

reached with minimal work at height (e.g.

low level lights with high level reflectors)

Technical areas accessed from circulation

routes (or a dedicated, external doorway)

Maintenance workers having to enter occupied rooms

(especially teaching room) to access technical areas

Plant within buildings can be

removed/replaced without dismantling the

surrounding envelope

The need to dismantle elements of the structure/ envelope

(e.g. sacrificial panels, bulkheads, casing) to remove/ replace

plant or to access flanges/valves

Access to technical areas (or roofs which

require maintenance access) via an

extension of the stair core

Access to roofs/technical areas by ladders

Plant areas with sufficient space to

reasonably accommodate changes in future

(e.g. to cope with a changing climate)

including space to erect lifting gear

Plant areas that are sized to the minimum acceptable

thresholds with no space for future changes

Walkways clear of floor mounted or low

level pipework/ducts which create the risk

of trips and damage, or require workers to

stoop.

Obstructive pipework/ducts (which must be suitably

protected from damage or causing harm)

Ducts/areas that operatives must crawl to enter or reach. If

accepted by UWE, the design must comply with BS 8313

Maintenance workers having to enter a confined space

Materials drawn from UWE’s standard

specifications and can be cleaned using

standard equipment

Bespoke materials, esp. if they need specialist/unique

equipment to clean

In addition, the following measures must also be observed:

Escape routes within plant rooms/areas must be well defined. Where determined by the fire

strategy, there shall be a second means of escape provided.

Where plant is roof mounted (other than on concrete plinths), a clearance of 450mm must be

maintained below any item of plant, pipework or ductwork running on or across roof finishes to

enable roof maintenance to be carried out without the need to remove or raise services.

UWE contains a number of areas where access is restricted due to hazardous processes e.g.

laboratories. Isolation valves etc. must be located outside of these areas so that, in an

emergency, supplies can be shut off without exposing workers to risk.

Lessons Learned

In addition to the items above, UWE have encountered other a range of other problems that must

be avoided in future. These include:


C h a p t e r 2 | D e s i g n G o v e r n a n c e I s s u e 1 . 3 P a g e | 1 0

1) Constructing upstands on roofs that require louvres and damper blades to be removed to give

access to motors and actuators. With the blades removed, a 5 storey, unguarded fall is

created. Hatches would have enabled the actuators to be accessed from a position of safety on

the roof.

2) Designers specifying end of line products as a cost saving exercise, meaning that spare parts

are no longer produced and the plant is obsolete on the day it is installed.

3) Risers which employees could or need to enter but which lack a load bearing floor

4) No or inadequate fire stopping details

5) Mechanical installations (or elements thereof such as pump heads) lacking details of weights,

lifting points etc. leading to delays and complications during replacement/removal

6) Handover documentation has historically not detailed the management strategy if

plant/equipment removal/replacement requires the use of cranes, lifting beams, sacrificial

panels etc. or other activity that pose operational difficulties or a significant risk to contractors

or UWE staff, students or assets.

7) Constructing canopies on the side of existing buildings, preventing access for window/gutter

cleaning and with no alternative strategy being considered.

8) Plantroom thresholds which render it difficult or impossible to use wheeled, mechanical lifting

aids to transport plant and equipment.

Facilities for cleaning

Buildings do not clean themselves! Designs

need to provide adequate facilities to

facilitate cleaning. The requirements for a

typical cleaning store is set out to the right.

During the design phase the housekeeping

team will determine the cleaning strategy

based on the proposed structure (including

surface finishes etc.) and activities within it.

The strategy may go through various

iterations and become progressively more

detailed as the design develops. Specific

items of equipment – and associated storage

etc. facilities – may be needed

A hard, impermeable floor surface

Plenty of storage space

Adequate ventilation & temperature control

(to aid drying and preserve correct chemical

temperatures)

Good lighting

A sluice sink

Hot and cold water supply

Racked shelving

Hanging racks for mops

Appropriate storage facilities for hazardous

substances (and to contain spills)

Potentially, washing machine plumbing (for

cleaning mop heads, depending on the size of

the building)

Potentially, charging points for cleaning

equipment.

External cleaning (glazing, guttering) or other challenging cleaning operations (e.g. high level

cleaning within an atrium) must be addressed in the access and maintenance strategy.



2.6 Designing for Business Continuity

In short, UWE does not want to face long down times of assets due to inappropriate product

selection or subsequent delays in repairing/replacing assets. As a simple example, to reduce costs

it may be tempting to purchase a cheaper, end-of-line item of plant. Spare components quickly

become increasingly expensive and difficult to source, leading to long periods of down time or

potentially a very expensive operation to replace a piece of plant that can no longer be maintained.

Life Cycle Cost analysis (discussed elsewhere) may highlight potential risks being presented by

design/asset selection. As also discussed elsewhere, UWE has a number of mechanisms for

approving derogations and the UWE Technical Authority (or other staff responsible for Technical

Assurance) may challenge designs/selections based on the risks that they present. Design and

project risk registers must be used to highlight risks to the resilience of the new structure. There

may be requests to hold one or more specific resiliency workshops to identify and resolve issues.

Specific actions to increase resiliency are:

Within later chapters and the detailed specifications you may see some features that must be

used. This may be because they offers certainty of supply or certainty about durability and

reliability.

The life expectancy/reliability of critical plant (i.e. plant and equipment that would render a

building unusable if it failed) must not be a victim of value engineering.

Build redundancy into critical systems (e.g. back up boilers).

Avoid if possible, single points of failure.

Manual override systems are generally more resilient than complex solutions.

Utilities, IT and communication cabling must enter a building at diverse points.

Avoid products/systems with a single source of supply or long lead times, especially when they

are critical assets. If this cannot be avoided then it may be necessary to hold spares.

If critical assets require highly specialist skills or equipment to maintain, consideration must be

given to:

o Ensuring there is more than one company who can reasonably maintain the asset (in

case one ceases trading)

o Ensuring there is satisfactory 24/7 365 response, including a suitable response time

o Choosing alternative equipment

o Upskilling the UWE term contractor to enable them to carry out the task themselves

As discussed elsewhere, designers must think beyond the immediate boundaries of their own

design. When recording risks or holding risk/resiliency workshops please consider: What else

could be effected if a building or asset fails? What critical services might be delivered from that

building that may need to be relocated? Risks may ultimately be escalated to UWE’s operational

risk registers.



2.7 Designing for Climate Resilience

For the University to continue to provide a high quality of service for the long term, the university

needs to design for business continuity within a changing climate. This section not only relates to

the long-term broad issues such as climate change, but also the immediate (0-5 year) impacts on

maintaining University operations.

Climate resilience/adaptation impacts on all aspects of the design and designers will need to

consider:

Fabric Performance and whole building design

M&E specification

Surface water drainage

Water and Energy security

Ecosystem services1

Plant replacement strategies

Whole life costing

Transport provision

o Designed to maintain reasonable operation during adverse weather events; and,

o Designed to minimise local air pollution on campus.

Not all these aspects may be relevant to a particular building or civil project, however they must be

reviewed with UWE staff responsible for Technical Assurance to scope-out and prioritise.

The University has introduced new targets addressing Climate Change Adaptation in the UWE

Sustainability Plan 2013-2020, which are largely based on the Adaptation section of the AUDE

Green Scorecard2. In brief, the relevant targets, are:

A3 - Flood risk - new projects: For any new buildings or major refurbishments (projects with

a construction value of £2.5m (exc. VAT) or more), at RIBA stage 2, to carry out an assessment

of flood risk with an inclusion for climate change, to ensure all major changes to the estate are

fully protected for 1 in 100 year events.

A5 - Overheating - new projects: For any new buildings or major refurbishments (projects

with a construction value of £2.5m (exc. VAT) or more), at RIBA stage 2, to use future weather

tapes, in assessing resilience of new buildings and refurbishments, and ensure buildings are

designed to cope with temperatures expected during their first refurbishment cycle (~25yrs).

The UWE Design Guide will be the mechanism to ensure this is adopted on all projects.

In all cases, the University are looking for a holistic approach to adapting to a changing climate and

expect designers to use the following principles:

1 Ecosystem services is a broad term representing the ways that the built environment, and building users, can benefit from ecosystems. For example, provision of blue and green landscaping to effect the microclimate

from local cooling via evapotranspiration; or the use of tree planting to provide summer solar shading. 2 AUDE Green scorecard: https://www.aude.ac.uk/Login?p=/resources/sustainability/green-scorecard/ (note that login details are needed and it is therefore necessary to register with the site).

https://www.aude.ac.uk/Login?p=/resources/sustainability/green-scorecard/



1. Long term - Passive designs: Designs that work with, and compliment the environment

rather than against it. For example, considering orientation of the building to minimise solar

gains, avoiding onerous adaptation to building facades or relying on cooling plant.

2. Robust designs: Designing details and finishes that will be robust in adverse weather

conditions (storms and gales, flooding, heavy snow etc.)

3. Flexible designs: Designs that allow room for additional plant, or adapting to alternative

fuels etc.

These principles are not intended to add excessive capital costs onto projects, but rather allow for

whole life designs to be considered.

Assessing flood risk

Designs for new builds must produce a flood risk assessment making an allowance for climate

change. Designers must use the Governments guidance “Flood risk assessments: climate change

allowances”3 to produce the risk assessment. The Upper, Higher and Central allowances must be

used for the time period ‘2050s’ (2040 to 2069) to provide sensitivity analysis. The Guidance also

provides parameters to help designers ascertain which scenario must be chosen for a particular type

of project. The University sites are in different Flood Zones and therefore the scenario assessment

must be considered on a project by project basis.

Assessing overheating

As noted in 6.6, passive measures should be exploited as far as possible to reduce or avoid the

need for mechanical cooling.

In addition to any requirements under building regulations, projects must demonstrate that they are

operable and comfortable under 2020 climatic conditions and, with the addition of defined practical

strategies if necessary, under 2050 conditions. CIBSE TM524 guidance: The Limits of Thermal

Comfort: Avoiding Overheating in European Buildings provides further information for designers.

Where dynamic thermal modelling is included in the scope of works, the following CIBSE Design

Summer Year (DSY) weather data must be used for assessing overheating risk, based on the

UKCIP09 climate change scenarios.

2020 conditions Cardiff 2020s High emissions scenario 90th percentile

2050 conditions Cardiff 2050s Medium emissions scenario 90th percentile

The results of the modelling must be presented to UWE staff responsible for Technical Assurance to

inform early design decisions related to orientation, fabric, and building servicing. The purpose is to

help the University to assess the risk of design decisions and consider level of future proofing and

flexibility in the design that may be required for the future to adapt to the changing climate.

3 https://www.gov.uk/guidance/flood-risk-assessments-climate-change-allowances 4 http://www.cibse.org/Knowledge/knowledge-items/detail?id=a0q20000008I7f5AAC



2.8 Overview of Asset Management at UWE

Buildings can be be conceptualised as a collection of assets (such as fabric, electrical and

mechanical systems and components thereof). Relevant UWE assets are logged, and where

necessary barcoded, for management within the University’s CAFM system (Archibus). This system

is used for many purposes, but not least to plan all proactive and reactive maintenance activities.

It is essential that projects to construct or refurbish buildings are accompanied by accurate

information about new or updated assets. Subsequent sections of this Chapter of the design guide

discuss the soft-landing and handover processes and UWE requirements for how and when asset

information is captured. These requirements apply regardless of the size of the project (but are

tailored to suit different sizes of project).

Of course, it is also important to select and design assets to be cost effective to use and maintain.

This is the role of cost-in-use evaluations, discussed next. As explained earlier, sensible design

also ensures that assets can be maintained (and eventually replaced) efficiently and safely.

2.9 Cost-in-use

Only a small percentage of overall costs are associated with capital/construction expenditure in

procuring or refurbishing a building or infrastructure. The remaining costs arise from running,

managing and maintaining assets. Therefore, great care needs to be taken to ensure that what is

provided at handover stage is suitable and fit-for-purpose for its’ ongoing life. UWE believes that

sustainable buildings and infrastructure will help to minimise operating costs as well as safeguarding

the environment and promoting the well-being of staff and students.

Cost-in-use evaluations on major capital projects

To deliver UWE’s commitment, all Major Capital Projects (projects with a construction value of

£2.5m (exc. VAT) or more) will fully follow the Life Cycle Cost process below.

During the investment planning stage (RIBA Stage 0/1)

Whole life costing is to be used to provide a high level economic prediction of the project’s out-turn

costs, to enable UWE to make informed investment decisions regarding whether the project is

viable, sustainable and represents best value (this will be part of a wider academic, sustainability

and environment assessment). The definition of Life Cycle Cost (LCC) verses Whole life Cost is best

described by quoting ISO 15686 – 5 ‘’Life Cycle Costing covers the initial construction and through-

life activities associated with a built asset, whereas Whole Life Costing also includes non-

construction activities and income generation such as receiving rent from tenants.’’



During conceptual planning (RIBA Stage 2)

Life cycle costing is to be used as part of a strategic option appraisal process, to inform the

selection of fundamental or cost significant elements, such as structure, envelope, services etc.

During the detailed Design Stage (RIBA Stage 3/4)

LCC is to be used to appraise and select the detailed design options from a life cycle cost and

performance perspective and to optimize the LCC plan.

In some circumstances system and equipment selection will be obvious and upon agreement with

UWE Estates, detailed and formal evaluation may not be necessary.

However, where two or more options are viable on technical, economic and other grounds LCC

evaluation will be required; this must be performed using industry standard models (which are

explained below). This must be issued, making recommendations to the PM/ responsible for

Technical Assurance, who will give ultimate direction of the best way forward.

During the tendering process

To compare a bid’s competitiveness and to test the project affordability.

During the construction and handover stages (RIBA Stage 5/6)

Set up the LCC in use budgets using a Operational Funding Plan, based on life cycle cost planning

using the construction and/or refurbishment costs.

During the lifetime use of the constructed asset (RIBA Stage 7)

Benchmarking of actual operational cost as part of HEFCE Soft Landings. Post contract evaluations

are to be undertaken (after a suitable time interval) to assess the actual building performance

against the design performance.

All LCC evaluations are to be shared amongst the design team and UWE in an electronic format to

enable all parties to conduct a thorough investigation of the structure of the model.

Value Engineering

Value Engineering (VE) is not a cost reduction exercise. The intention is to find alternative and

better value solutions to deliver the same or improved outcomes for the end user, rather than

undermining functional requirements or performance of a structure in the pursuit of cost savings.



VE must be based upon sound LCC evaluations. For example; if a plant purchase is likely to

save money throughout its life expectancy, but have a substantial impact upon the capital budget

then this must be taken into account in any capital decision.

Along with any cost model, an evaluation of the item’s performance must be included in order to

establish the consequences of any trade off in the purchasing decision.

Evaluations on minor capital projects (under £2.5m exc. VAT)

LCC is to be adopted proportional to the value and nature of the specific scheme, the parameters to

be agreed and recorded at RIBA Stage 1 by the Project Manager. For example, a project based

largely on selection and installation of replacement plant may undertake some measure of LCC.

Standards

LCC are to be carried out in accordance with BS ISO 15686-5, using best practice as defined by

BSRIA BG 67/2016 ‘A BSRIA Guide Life Cycle Costing’ and the BCIS/BSI publication PD156865

‘Standardized Method of Life Cycle Costing for Construction Procurement (SMLCC)’: A supplement to

BS ISO 15686-5 ‘Buildings & constructed assets - Service life planning’ - Part 5: ‘Life cycle costing’.

Selection of the discount rate and the study period will be set in agreement with the university,

based upon the bespoke nature of the particular project.

Life cycle lengths must be presented as options within any evaluations to enable UWE to make

informed decisions regarding likely future usage profiles. The project team must provide energy

performance certificates with the completed building information.

The design life expectancy of the building will be stated in the individual project particulars,

however, it must be recognised that University Buildings are often retained far in excess of this

notional figure, individual components therefore need to be robust in nature.

References

Reference and consideration must be given to the requirements of the following best practice:

ISO 15686-5 2011. Buildings and constructed assets - Service life planning

BSRIA BG 67/2016 ‘A BSRIA Guide Life Cycle Costing’

BCIS/BSI ‘Standardized Method of Life Cycle Costing for Construction Procurement - A

supplement to BS ISO 15686-5 ‘Buildings & constructed assets - Service life planning’ - Part 5:

‘Life cycle costing’

BREEAM (Building Research Establishment Environmental Assessment Method)

BS 8544 Guide for life cycle costing of maintenance during the ‘in-use’ phases of buildings



2.10 Soft Landings

The ultimate goal of a construction project is, obviously, to deliver a functional structure that meets

UWE’s requirements. To achieve this, UWE needs to work collaboratively with internal and external

stakeholders, designers and consultants to determine their functional and technical requirements,

objectives and targets (which may go beyond those stipulated in this design guide) and the

information, training, support and aftercare that are needed to use/operate the building.

‘UWE BSRIA Soft Landing Requirements for Design Team’ sets out what needs to be done and

when, to achieve these ambitions. The following text is adapted from that document, which is

available in full as an appendix to this Design Guide.

UWE are committed to adopting the BSRIA Soft Landings philosophy on all major new build and

refurbishment projects from concept to 18-months post-completion. For the post-occupancy

evaluation, UWE uses the guidance set out by HEFCE.

It is the University’s intention to incorporate BSRIA Soft Landings, as defined in BSRIA BG38,

BSRIA BG4 and associated documents as part of its post-completion requirements. The

successful tenderer will be required to include the appropriate resources and commitment to

fully achieve this ambition.

The BSRIA Soft Landings Framework sets out core principles for client, designers and

constructors for the design, handover and post-completion stages of a building project.

It includes pre-handover familiarisation and training.

Soft Landings emphasises an enhanced handover process and post completion after care.

However, UWE believe that the full benefits of the approach are realised by embedding it right

from the start of the project. The aim is to develop a collaborative framework where the client

and design teams focus on outcomes and work together to agree challenging but realistic

targets that are reviewed and refined throughout the design and procurement process.

The requirements and expectations within ‘UWE BSRIA Soft Landing Requirements for Design

Team’ have been taken from the BSRIA guide BG45 on how to procure soft landings.

Information required at handover

Later, this design guide discusses drawing standards and asset information requirements.

UWE project processes set out the information required at handover and also provides templates to

enable project teams to identify and track the required documentation. This includes Health and

Safety File information (including access and maintenance strategies), Fire Safety Information

(referred to later) and the information that is often called the ‘Operation and Maintenance’ (or

O&M) manual.

Information must be supplied in a particular electronic format, as explained in project processes.



2.11 Post Occupancy Evaluation (POE)

UWE has a POE strategy which has been incorporated into the UWE project processes. Full Post

Occupancy Evaluation (POE) is usually required on any UWE projects with a construction value of

£2.5m (exc. VAT) or more. This will require a more in-depth “investigative” and “diagnostic”

approach to the POE process.

Lower value projects will take a more focussed (“indicative”) approach to POE, usually involving a

site visit and performance scorecards to be completed to identify any key lessons to be learned.

The Project Manager will, at the outset of the project, determine the precise approach that POE will

take.

For example, the precise POE process for a project to install district heating plant would be very

different to a large, new building with numerous technical area and laboratories and this would be

different from the POE for a refurbishment of a ‘back office’ building.

In brief, the POE evaluates the process used to procure, design and build the project, the functional

performance of the building and the technical performance.

UWE will work with designers to ensure stakeholders requirements and expectations, are clearly

articulated and considered. By setting out project objectives, intended benefits and POE

requirements at the outset, designers and consultants can allocate sufficient resources to ensure

they can contribute meaningfully to a positive POE process.

2.12 BIM, Asset Capture, Drawing Standards and the Common Data Environment

UWE has set out its approach to BIM, and its specific information requirements, in “UWE Employer’s

Information Requirements (EIR)”. All new buildings, or future refurbishments of buildings that

have been modelled in BIM, must comply with this document.

UWE will not retrospectively apply BIM for buildings that were built prior to these standards coming

into force. Refurbishments of existing buildings will therefore not be subject to BIM, unless the

University has identified a clear advantage in doing so (which will be explained in the project brief).

The objectives of our information requirements are to:

Maximise production efficiency through adopting a coordinated and consistent approach to

working in BIM.

Define the standards, settings and best practices that ensure delivery of high quality data and

uniform drawing output across an entire project.



Ensure digital BIM files are structured correctly to enable efficient data sharing whilst working in

a collaborative environment across multi-disciplinary teams.

To facilitate data exchange and collaboration, UWE may require designers to share information in a

‘common data environment’. This is planned to be hosted in Newforma.

Even where projects fall outside BIM, the team must still comply with our asset capture procedures

“UWE Asset Information Requirements (AIR)”, which is included as an appendix. This ensures our

assets are appropriately recorded. This underpins our maintenance regime and is vitally important.

Without it, we could fail to comply with statutory obligations to maintain assets or assets could fail

leading to disruption and risks. Unless we know what we need to maintain we cannot adequately

resource our maintenance operations.

Finally, UWE has comprehensive guidance regarding general drawing standards.

http://www.uwe.ac.uk/facilities/estates/drawings/DrawingStandards/drawingstandards.shtml

The documents which apply to different types of projects are:

BIM Projects

Non-BIM Projects

http://www.uwe.ac.uk/facilities/estates/drawings/DrawingStandards/drawingstandards.shtml



2.13 Temporary Works Design

Temporary works are defined in BS 5975 as any solution that (to paraphrase) enables permanent

works to be accessed and/or built. It covers everything from excavations to scaffolding, piling

mats, propping and site hoarding.

The Health and Safety Executive has also produced their own guidance, SIM 02/2010/04, which

complements the British Standard.

For the avoidance of any doubt:

Temporary works are designed. The designers are therefore bound by this design guide.

UWE will sometimes provide constraints, specifications and considerations for temporary works

designers. A number of these requirements can be found in the UWE Contractor’s Safety Pack,

specifically:

o Hoarding and site protection

o Requirements for temporary footpaths

o Public protection measures to be incorporated into scaffold design.

Please note that designers are required to review and consider the UWE Contractor’s Safety

Pack. It is the responsibility of the designer to ensure the design is structurally sound,

depending on location, ground and environmental/weather conditions etc.

Contract documents, pre-construction information and Employer’s requirements may further

inform temporary works design

In line with BS 5975 and SIM 02/2010/04, the Principal Contractor (PC) must have a temporary

works co-ordinator who will oversee design and management of temporary works. On smaller

projects with simple temporary works, those responsibilities may be discharged by the site

manager or another member of the site team. Temporary works co-ordination will never be

the responsibility of UWE.

The PC must set out in their Construction Phase Plan (CPP) how they will manage temporary

works. UWE will review those arrangements as part of their duty as client to ensure a CPP is in

place and adequately manages significant risks.

Temporary works must be checked. UWE does not have the capacity to provide a technical

check of temporary works design.

A number of temporary works operations are designated by UWE as high risk activities and

requires a contractor to gain approval before commencing (under the approval to work system,

explained in the Safety Pack). UWE staff will, at that stage, be involved in reviewing temporary

works design. This is for the purposes of establishing that it has met UWE specifications (e.g.

whether site plans show that hoarding, signage and/or temporary footpaths will be positioned

where agreed). This is not the technical check required by BS 5975 and SIM 02/2010/04.



Temporary Road/Footpath/Car Parks (and managing Closures/Diversions)

Proposed closure/diversion of roads/footpaths must be identified during the pre-construction phase

(this is part of considering the ‘adjacencies’ of a project, as discussed in Chapter 1 of this guide).

Proposeds route and anticipated dates (if known) must be discussed with the UWE transport team.

The impact of diversions on emergency vehicles, maintenance operations etc. must be considered.

The proposed route of temporary footpaths must be inspected as early as reasonably practicable to

consider the following and agree actions (which may be included in the contractor’s scope of work):

The adequacy of existing surfaces that might be used and/or the standards required of

temporary surfaces that may need to be formed

The standard/adequacy of lighting

The numbers of pedestrians using the new footpath

The interface with vehicular traffic

Alterations to wayfinding/signage (including responsibility for providing additional signage)

Accessibility of alternative routes must be assessed (we have had examples of wheelchair users

diverted via an extremely steep footpath or across gravel that they were unable to navigate). For

example, if a temporary crossing point did not have a dropped kerb, a temporary ramp may need to

be formed or a dropped kerb may need to be constructed (with tactile paving etc.).

Inconvenience/increased travel distances caused by temporary routes must be minimised as far as

is reasonably practicable.

UWE expects Chapter 8 (Traffic Safety Measures & Signs for Road Works and Temporary Situations)

to be adhered to as far as reasonably practicable (click ‘Chapter 8’ to see the guidance). Designers

can support compliance by ensuring the considerate location of temporary crossing points etc.

The need for a diversion must be recorded and shown on a site constraints plan.

Diversion or disruption of the public right of way through Frenchay Campus will be subject to close

and early attention during the pre-construction phase, and will be the subject of consultation with

relevant stakeholders inside and outside UWE. The UWE Transport team will support this process.

Disturbance of soft-landscaping

It will sometimes be necessary to create a temporary footpath or road surface over soft

landscaping. This must be discussed with the grounds team at the earliest opportunity: They will

need to agree the temporary provision and how landscaping will be remediated afterwards. This is

discussed in more depth in the chapter addressing infrastructure, biodiversity and landscaping.

https://www.gov.uk/government/uploads/system/uploads/attachment_data/file/203669/traffic-signs-manual-chapter-08-part-01.pdf


Chapter 3: UWE Strategies


C h a p t e r 3 | U W E S t r a t e g i e s I s s u e 1 . 3 P a g e | 1

Table of Contents

3.1 Introduction to UWE Strategies .................................................................................... 3

3.2 Accessible and inclusive design ..................................................................................... 3

3.2.1 Inclusive Design Features ...................................................................................... 4

3.2.2 General advice for designers .................................................................................. 4

3.2.3 Applying the UWE Principles during the RIBA Plan of Work ....................................... 6

3.3 Strategy for Welfare Facilities ....................................................................................... 8

3.3.1 General design considerations ................................................................................ 8

3.3.2 Creating inclusive and accessible facilities ............................................................... 9

3.4 Security Systems Strategy .......................................................................................... 11

3.4.1 A balanced approach ........................................................................................... 11

3.4.2 Impact of Security on Fire evacuation ................................................................... 11

3.5 Designing a Sustainable University .............................................................................. 12

3.5.1 Sustainable Design Stages ................................................................................... 13

3.5.2 General principles ................................................... Error! Bookmark not defined.

3.5.3 Sustainability - Actions to be taken by the design team .......................................... 13

3.5.4 Other considerations informing product selection ................................................... 15

3.5.5 Funding Opportunities for Sustainability Measures ................................................. 15

3.6 Design for Wellbeing ................................................................................................. 16

3.6.1 Multi-function, wellbeing spaces ........................................................................... 16

3.7 Religion and Belief ..................................................................................................... 17

3.8 Fire Strategy ............................................................................................................. 18

3.8.1 Fire Safety Standards .......................................................................................... 18

3.8.2 Information requirements .................................................................................... 18

3.8.3 Consultation with UWE Health and Safety Team (HST) .......................................... 19

3.8.4 Design responsibilities for fire safety during construction ........................................ 19

3.8.5 Fire Stopping ...................................................................................................... 20

3.9 Printer Allocation Policy .............................................................................................. 21

3.9.1 Fire Risk Assessment ........................................................................................... 21

3.10 UWE Sport Vision ...................................................................................................... 22

3.10.1 How the Estate supports the UWE Sports Vision .................................................... 22

3.11 UWE Transport Strategy ............................................................................................ 23



3.12 Signage and Wayfinding Strategy ............................................................................... 23

3.12.1 Physical Signage ................................................................................................. 24

3.12.2 Electronic signage ............................................................................................... 24

3.12.3 Wayfinding Apps and mapping tools ..................................................................... 25

3.12.4 An inclusive and accessible Wayfinding Strategy .................................................... 25

3.13 Occupancy Hours ...................................................................................................... 25



3.1 Introduction to UWE Strategies

The purpose of this Chapter of the design guide is to examine specific UWE strategies and how

they impact on design. They influence all aspects of design. These strategies include:

Accessibility and Inclusivity

Welfare Facilities

Security

Sustainability

Wellbeing

Religion and belief

Sports

Fire

Signage and Wayfinding

Printer Allocation

3.2 Accessible and inclusive design

UWE is committed to providing an environment that is welcoming, accessible and inclusive for a

diverse population of students, staff and visitors.

Inclusive design is, quite simply, good design. It means helping everyone to have a good

experience by creating an environment that is welcoming and usable for all. UWE strives to

prevent any section of our community feeling frustrated, ignored, segregated or stigmatized. UWE

recognises that people “disabled” by the built environment include:-

People with impairments (including people who have temporary or fluctuating impairments)

Elderly people

Children

Parents with children

Women and men (or those who identify with neither or both genders)

People who feel excluded because of lifestyle, sexual orientation, culture, ethnicity, religion,

low income or other factors.

UWE is bound by the Public Sector Equality (PSED) duty both as an employer and service provider

under Section 149 of the Equality Act 2010. Design teams are expected to adopt best practice

inclusive design principles from the outset to support UWE in meeting these duties. The quality of

University experience must be equal for all users and delivered to a high standard.

Particular attention is needed during the refurbishment of existing building stock where reasonable

adjustments may be needed. UWE buildings have been built at different times to different

standards and some are listed. There may be limits on what adjustments can reasonably be made

to the built environment and end-users may need to look at the planning and organisation of their

activities to accommodate the needs of staff and students. However, refurbishment projects in

these buildings can often be used to improve accessibility or introduce features that make the

building more inclusive.



To achieve these aims, and create an environment that supports equity, equality and dignity in use,

UWE is working to the following principles:

Providing the same means of use for all users, identical when possible, equivalent when not

Avoiding stigmatizing or segregating any users

Respecting the dignity of the individual

Integrating inclusive principles into the design process

Mainstreaming inclusive design: It is not an add-on extra or “special needs” interest

The Equality Challenge Unit has produced useful, additional guidance for design teams in “Managing

Inclusive Design for Higher Education (2009)”, available here (click ‘here’).

Inclusive Design Features

The purpose of this design guide is not to duplicate the requirements set out in Part M of the

Building Regulations and BS 8300. Those documents represent minimum standards and only

address issues of physical access. Inclusive principles and design features, which go beyond Part

M and BS 8300, have been embedded throughout this design guide. They have been derived from

consultation with stakeholder groups, lessons learned on past projects and contributions from the

Centre for Accessible Environments.

It is not UWE’s intention to have a stand-alone section on accessible and inclusive design features.

Instead, these features will be integrated into the relevant Chapters of the design guide. This will

hopefully help ensure that inclusive design is not treated as a ‘bolt on’ to the design process.

By embedding inclusive design principles into the design guide, project teams on smaller projects

(less than £2.5m (exc. VAT) construction value) will be equipped to develop inclusive and accessible

designs without the need for external access consultants. Projects of this scale will typically be

refurbishments and opportunities will be sought to enhance the accessibility and inclusivity of

existing buildings. To achieve that, extant access audits will be used to inform project scopes.

On larger projects (projects with a construction value of £2.5m (exc. VAT) or more) the intention

will be to include as many of these design features as possible into the major refurbishment or new

building. As explained later, an access consultant must be appointed on projects of this value.

General advice for designers

The design and layout of UWE buildings, interior and exterior fixtures, fittings and furniture

and external spaces must be flexible enough to reasonably accommodate future changes.

Designs will allow sufficient space, or flexibility to create the space, for assistive equipment,

assistance dogs, personal assistants and communication support workers etc.

Staff and student will have the capacity to adjust lighting, acoustics and internal climate

wherever reasonable and when compatible with other commitments, such as sustainability.

http://www.ecu.ac.uk/publications/managing-inclusive-building-design-for-higher-education/



Where possible, designers will take a consistent approach to the specification of access

equipment across the campus. This can benefit users who require familiarity with equipment

and who may not be able to cope with change. This also simplifies repair and replacement.

Where the design guide or specifications are not adequate to meet a specific need, review

access features that have worked well on previous projects and specify good quality

products that are consistent or compatible with those existing. These features must be

incorporated into this design guide or associated specifications.

Where the guide states that features are ‘to be considered’, design teams need to consult

more widely (as explained below) to understand what features are reasonable. Where

compromises are required due to space, budget or other constraints, or there is no current

demand, allow for future retrofitting where reasonable. Examples include pre-fitting

pipework to accommodate a future accessible WC or level access shower and pre-wiring

above doors to anticipate future power assisted door operators or hold-open détentes.

We recommend designers spend 10 minutes watching UWE Bristol’s wheelchair challenge

(click the underlined text). This highlights some of the challenges that designs can present.

Sufficient provision must be made for powered wheelchair charging.

Provide fixtures and fittings that require minimal physical effort to operate (e.g. powered

access doors with buttons that can be used with minimal force) and ensure they are in a

practical location (e.g. a door open device must be adjacent to the door that it operates).

Consider the wider implications of accessible features. For example a new ramp along a

front elevation, could impact on window cleaning and maintenance for upper floors. During

those works, the ramp may be inaccessible and temporary access arrangements needed.

A selected example of design features mentioned elsewhere in the design guide (which will

therefore not be discussed in detail here) include:

Multi-function wellbeing spaces (which can be used for a variety of functions such as space

for religious observance, quiet reflection or for new mothers to express and store milk).

Welfare facilities, including accessible and gender neutral provision.

Facilities for faith and religion.

The need to provide a choice of open plan and enclosed spaces (to cater for different

acoustic and cognitive impairments) or to provide privacy where needed.

Consideration of the impact of temporary routes.

The electrical chapter requires:

o The provision of evacuation lifts

o Visual and audible fire alarms in selected locations

o Hearing assistance systems in teaching spaces

The chapter on landscaping, biodiversity and infrastructure contains:

o Requirements for spaces to be provided for three wheeler motorcycles, tricycles,

recumbents an adapted bicycles

o Requirements for making pedestrian routes accessible

o Requirements for accessible car parking

o Mixed selection of external seating including some with seat backs and arms

http://www1.uwe.ac.uk/whatson/disabilityawarenessmonth.aspx



The chapter on fabric and structural design addresses:

o Principles governing selection of furniture and furnishings

o Visual contrast

o Acoustic considerations

o Principles of horizontal and vertical circulation

o Use of powered doors and hold open devices

o Accessibility of student accommodation

The UWE Bristol Fire Standards discusses personal emergency evacuation plans (PEEP) as well as

discussing some elements of design (e.g. in relation to disabled refuge provision).

Applying the UWE Principles during the RIBA Plan of Work

On projects with a construction value of £2.5m (exc. VAT) or more, a National Register of Access

Consultants (NRAC) accredited Access Consultant must be involved from RIBA stage 2. They must

have expertise relating to wider diversity issues e.g. be aware of cultural factors – not just physical.

RIBA Plan of

Work

Core Inclusive Design Activities

0 Strategic

Definition

The project requester undertakes an equality analysis when requesting a project.

This is issued to the UWE Equality and Diversity team for review and comment.

1 Preparation

and Brief

Estates meet with the project requestor and review the equality impact analysis

(and any feedback received from the Equality and Diversity team) to understand the

impact for the design brief, budget etc.

Estates review existing access audits to identify opportunities (and funding sources)

for the project to address outstanding actions.

During the development of the brief, consider ‘adjacencies’ (as explained in Chapter

1 of this guide): Identify opportunities to introduce elements into the current

project that improve inclusion and access for adjacent buildings. E.g. a new ramp

to a building might offer shared access to an adjacent building which lacks a ramp.

Undertake a desktop review of any feasibility proposals. This may involve one or

more focus groups which may be recommended by the Impact Analysis.

2

to

4

Design

Stages

For projects with a construction value of £2.5m (exc. VAT) or more Estates will:

o Undertake a formal Access Audit of the existing and proposed site to identify

issues to be considered in the design process.

o Consult with the UWE equality and diversity team and with one or more target

user focus groups (starting at RIBA stage 2) and agree appropriate

communication process and dates for ongoing consultation. The E&D team will

arrange an accessible venue, transport and communication support (but costs

are to be funded by the project).

The design team develops design to comply with the design guide, including

accessibility/inclusivity features. Where features are ‘to be considered’, they will be



RIBA Plan of

Work

Core Inclusive Design Activities

discussed with the requester/focus groups to determine which features are

reasonable to include in the brief.

The access consultant will review designs as they develop, contribute to consultation

events and stage gate reviews and provide a commentary in end of stage reports.

Derogations are considered and managed by Estates.

Develop and regularly review ongoing Design and Access Statement and Building

Regulations Approved Document M access tracking schedule as required for

statutory authorities, listed building or other 3rd party consents

Ensure that all access and inclusion elements in design proposals are

comprehensively specified, approved and signed off prior to issuing tender

documentation to contractors.

5 Construction Regularly review accessibility of temporary signage, access routes, surfaces,

hoardings, obstructions and control of dust and noise to ensure that safe inclusive

access is maintained during the construction phase.

Arrange for Access Consultant to attend site meetings, review material samples and

provide ongoing access/inclusion advice during the construction phase as necessary

(for projects with a construction value of £2.5m (exc. VAT) or more).

6 Handover Undertake Access Audit (for projects with a construction value of £2.5m (exc. VAT)

or more) and Snagging Schedule of completed works and undertake remedial action

as required.

The UWE softlanding approach may require training/briefing of relevant staff and

students in the use of accessible features.

Handover documentation to include details of/instruction for use of accessible

features.

Provide new or revised access management plan for the building.

Update emergency evacuation plans to reflect changes to the building(s).

7 Use Monitor accessibility feedback from users over 18 month post-occupancy period and

collate findings.

Undertake 18 month post-occupancy evaluation.

Complete remedial actions and update access management plan as needed.

Document findings and lessons learned in the overarching campus access strategy.

This could lead to a change of project management processes and will lead to a

review of the design guide and associated specifications.



3.3 Strategy for Welfare Facilities

The effective design of welfare facilities requires close co-ordination between the different design

disciplines. Problems can arise if these facilities are seen as the sole province of the ‘public health’

engineer. Welfare facilities can be the most challenging (and emotive) issues facing design teams.

Adequate welfare facilities support a number of other UWE strategies such as equality and diversity

(E&D), sports and sustainability (e.g. showers close to bike shelters to promote cycling and support

our strategies on wellbeing and reducing car usage). As a result, UWE’s approach to welfare

facilities is discussed in this Chapter, amongst other overarching strategies.

Compliance with Building Regulations, the Workplace (Health, Safety and Welfare) Regulations and

relevant British Standards (e.g. BS 8300) are not sufficient to provide a workable solution for UWE.

A ‘like-for-like’ approach to refurbishment of welfare facilities is not acceptable: Standards have

changed and the configuration of existing welfare facilities may need significant alterations.

General design considerations

UWE has had to deal with a legacy of poorly considered design:

Accessible toilets that cannot be accessed by a wheelchair user.

Sometimes dimensions do not comply with BS8300. In other cases a

‘compliant’ facility has been positioned in an inaccessible location, for

example where a structural column prevents a wheelchair from

manoeuvring into the facility (the photo to the right, taken in a newly

refurbished hotel in 2017, illustrates this general principle).

Toilets that are too small. The minimum width is 800mm. The Metric

handbook and other documents illustrate how these toilets should be

set out, including making provision for sanitary bins.

Floors lacking appropriate falls to enable use of floor drainage.

Inappropriate finishes to walls, e.g. bare paint work which is stained by cast off water. As

explained in the Chapter on Fabric and Structural Design, ceramic wall/floor tiles are to be

avoided: Vinyl wall and floor finishes are preferred.

Hand driers above other fixtures or features that are damaged by cast off water.

Floor drains not being positioned appropriately to help deal with issues such as cast off water.

The use of vanity units in accessible facilities preventing wheelchairs moving close to the sink.

Integrated panel systems (IPS) should be used to conceal toilet cisterns (urinal traps must be

exposed to facilitate cleaning). Vanity units are to be used if there is a row of sinks. Cubicles

require coat/clothes hooks.



Shower facilities and associated changing rooms are to be included wherever practicable.

Depending on the anticipated demand on welfare facilities, clothes storage and drying facilities may

be required and/or ventilation may require close attention. UWE shower facilities used by high

numbers of cyclists have suffered from damp, odour etc. especially if clothes dry naturally.

Any sports facilities on campus are to have accessible WC, shower and change provision.

As ever, designers must consider adjacencies: E.g. If there are no shower facilities within

reasonable walking distance of a new building then there is much more impetus to install them.

UWE is keen to use effective design of welfare facilities to support our sustainability ambitions. As

discussed elsewhere, UWE wishes to explore the use of boreholes or greywater, and this could

potentially be used for toilet flushing. UWE’s requirement for sensor taps and hand driers, and

various other design features detailed elsewhere in this guide and the associated specifications,

minimises both direct and indirect water usage (e.g. water associated with laundry operations).

Creating inclusive and accessible facilities

On all projects, design teams must ensure:

All WCs that are accessible to ambulant users with lever or easy press taps and locks easily

operable with a single, closed fist. Jeflock Accessible toilet locks fully meets this requirement.

The provision of fully accessible toilets (i.e. unisex, accessible WC) to comply with Part M of the

Building Regulations in terms of travel distances (which helps dictate numbers required) and BS

8300 in terms of design.

As per Part M, in any separate-sex toilet, at least one cubicle must be fully designed for

ambulant, disabled people in line with BS 8300. Any row with four or more cubicles must also

have one enlarged cubicle for people who need extra space (including travelling with luggage).

The doors of accessible toilets should be power-assisted wherever possible.

Ensure that all Accessible WCs can be accessed directly without passing through a Male or

Female WC area, as a disabled user may be assisted by a member of the opposite sex.

Where there is more than one Accessible WC in a building, provide a choice of left and right

hand transfer. These can alternate between floors, with lift access.

Facilities for disabled users must have an alarm, complying with BS 8300, linked to an external

flashing and audible beacon with the following poster displayed under the beacon: “When Light

Flashes and Alarm Sounds, Contact East Reception on 0117 3289999 for assistance.”

Fire alarms are visual as well as audible in all accessible WCs and standard WCs, particularly in

cubicles where partitions are taken up to the ceiling with no gap above the door.

Designers must ensure that on all new builds and major refurbishments:

The equality and diversity teams are consulted to have a meaningful input on the design of

welfare facilities. Meetings may be facilitated by the E&D team.

They liaise with Faith and Spirituality as to the provision of a Wudu/Ritual Washing facility or

any other requirements to support specific faiths.


C h a p t e r 3 | U W E S t r a t e g i e s I s s u e 1 . 3 P a g e | 1 0

Establish if a larger Hygiene Room/Changing Places WC with dual transfer, variable height

changing bench, level access shower and tracked ceiling hoist is needed. These benefit users

who need personal assistance with using the WC, showering and changing. Location on campus

will depend on where demand is likely to be greatest and where it can be most easily reached.

Wheelchair accessible ensuites to campus residential accommodation to have fused spur power

points pre-fitted to accommodate future tracked ceiling hoists and automatic wash and dry

shower toilets.

Part M of the Building Regulations show hand driers positioned 800-1000mm above floor level.

UWE prefers them to be the centre of this range to suit people of different heights.

Gender neutral toilets

As a general principle, UWE aspires for each building to have at least one gender neutral toilet. On

large buildings (nominally anything more than 50 m in length), facilities will be provided as a

minimum on alternate floors. Major refurbishments must be used to consider retrofitting gender

neutral provision. However, as discussed elsewhere, these aspirations may not always be

achievable as UWE must work within the physical constraints of existing structures, drainage etc.

UWE prefers gender neutral toilets with self-contained provision

(i.e. bowl, hand washing/drying facilities, female sanitary bin).

Self-contained cubicles occupy considerably more room than

cubicles with shared handwashing facilities and requires

considerably more servicing. Space or other constraints may lead

to solutions with shared hand-washing etc. provision. This should

be dealt with as a derogation. Ideally at least one cubicle will be

self-contained to maintain the sense of safety of someone who

does not feel secure washing hands etc. in a communal sink.

The photo to the right shows gender neutral welfare facilities at

Bower Ashton. The furthest cubicle is a combined gender neutral/

accessible facility. A standalone, accessible WC would need to be available to both genders, but it

is as an accessible, unisex WC, and would not count as a gender neutral facility. Please note that

this particular sign is no longer acceptable, and is too high for someone in a wheelchair to read.

The preferred choice of signage is a toilet pictogram with no representation of people

(example shown to the right). If this will not work in a particular circumstance, the

image used for gender neutral toilets at Bower Ashton (shown above) may be

proposed as a derogation. Accompanying text must read “Gender Neutral Toilet”.

Labelling gender neutral toilets as “for everyone”, “available for all” etc. is only to be used if they

are genuinely accessible for all. Signs must be replaceable with relative ease in response to

growing awareness and new thinking around issues of gender identity.



3.4 Security Systems Strategy

Any new buildings or refurbishments which extend, amend or could impair security systems must be

discussed with the Security Manager (Head of Operations and Security). They will assess the

scheme (in consultation with Estates and the occupying clients) and ensure the design provides the

correct level of access control and security for that space. They may advise on specific measures

required during the construction phase while security arrangements may be compromised.

Security must be considered holistically from the earliest stages of design. Concerns about, for

example, positioning of doors and windows or the creation of ‘blind spots’ can be addressed early.

Security is only one design consideration. The security strategy aims to ensure a balance is

achieved between securing and safeguarding the campuses and the people using them, whilst

maintaining open campuses which can be used flexibly and can meet differing user needs.

UWE is not signed up to any specific security standards (e.g. Secured by Design) but this may be

required on specific projects.

Where security systems are deployed they must be fit for purpose. Dysfunctional systems lead to a

false sense of security and upset in the event of an incident. Security systems used at UWE are:

Programmable Access Control and

Door Monitoring

CCTV (with legally-required signage)

Intruder Detection Systems (IDS)

Physical Locks

24/7 manned guarding presence on each campus.

Further guidance on the infrastructure requirements are set out in a later chapter. Designers must

ensure containment for security systems is included and co-ordinated with the rest of the works.

A balanced approach

The security strategy is a proportionate response, balancing the risks (including of acts of terrorism)

against our ambition to have open, accessible and inclusive campuses. Under the Counterterrorism

and Security Act 2015, UWE is a Specified Authority and has an explicit legal duty to prevent people

being drawn into terrorism. Our approach to inclusivity, including providing faith spaces, is an

important mechanism for fulfilling this duty.

The design guide reflects our assessment of foreseeable security risks and scenarios. We are not

over-specifying our structures, glazing etc. to withstand purely hypothetical incidents. However,

the risks are reviewed routinely and may lead to changes in future.

Impact of Security on Fire evacuation

Doors on escape routes and final exits that are fitted with security devices must satisfy the

requirements of fire safety: It must be possible for any person to easily and immediately open

them in an emergency.



3.5 Designing a Sustainable University

UWE’s vision is to embed sustainability throughout everything we do, from the courses we teach to

the back-of-house services that keep the university running. Our Estate is no exception to this rule,

and sustainability must be a strong theme throughout any new development.

UWE has a sustainability plan covering from 2013-2020 found here (click ‘here’). The Plan sets out

a series of objectives and targets. Designers must familiarise themselves with these aspirations and

consider how their achievement can be supported through the design of new spaces.

The University demonstrates its commitment to environmental sustainability through its certification

to the international standard BS:EN ISO14001:2015. The certification requires continuous

improvement in environmental performance through the whole institution: Our estates, services

and educational provision. The standard requires the university to consider the lifecycle impact of its

products and services.

Figure 1: Ventilation strategy for R Block Phase 2, a BREEAM Excellent building

http://www1.uwe.ac.uk/about/corporateinformation/sustainability/policiesplansandtargets.aspx



Sustainable Design Stages

Throughout the design stages, the University expects consideration of the following criteria:

Develop Brief Use sustainability performance as one criteria in the selection of team members.

Sustainable design features and requirements are embedded throughout the Design Guide and designers should be familiar with all relevant chapters.

Establish stakeholders sustainability expectations/requirements.

Establish and utilise benchmarks, targets or measurements for the project. These could include BREEAM, BRE Green Guide to Specification, BRE

Sustainability Check List, RICS SKA HE assessment tool, EPC targets and other relevant standards/methods of assessment (incl. Building Regulations Part L).

Begin implementing BSRIA soft landings (which are explained in UWE project management processes).

Concept design Designers must consider the lifecycle implications of their designs and product

selections. Specifically, from concept design onwards projects should seek to minimise resource depletion and environmental degradation, and be resilient to

a changing environment, by considering the following criteria:

Maintenance

Water (incl. future availability and cost)

Energy (incl. future availability and cost)

Climate change (as explained elsewhere)

Materials

Transport

Ecology

Waste

Evaluate and incorporate new technologies and concepts.

Scheme Design Prepare prediction checklist of chosen assessment tool.

Use post occupancy evaluations/lesson learned from their past projects to make informed decisions e.g. refer to monitoring of energy performance from past

projects to provide guidance on how Part L building regulations can be

exceeded or achieved in a cost effective manner.

Detailed Design Incorporate UWE Design Guide requirements and recognised best practice.

Consider clashes through use of BIM to eliminate basic design errors such as:

Tall cupboards blocking vents

Partitions being erected without consideration of existing vents and/or radiators (creating one very hot room and one very cold one)

TRV positioned behind desks

Less-efficient plant selected to suit available space, rather than the

design providing sufficient space at the outset.

Construction Procurement of contractors, suppliers and materials based on their ability to meet sustainable KPI’s.

Assessment Feedback Benchmarking against energy use targets

Post Occupancy Assessment

Sustainability - Actions to be taken by the design team

UWE’s Sustainability Plan contain specific measures that impact on the design of new structures.

Specific actions that the design team must make towards meeting these are set out below.



Subject Specific actions to be taken or considered by the design team

Campus

Development

Projects with a construction value of £2.5m (exc. VAT) or more: Project briefs may

augment the requirements of this design guide by defining specific sustainability/

energy standards to be met under certification schemes such as BREEAM or SKA. Pre-

assessments must be carried out by accredited assessors at key stages of the design

process together with a corresponding reconciliation of cost and value.

Target CO2 emissions rate must exceed those set out in approved document L2A by a

minimum of 5%. At the design stage the designers must model the in-use energy

consumption including unregulated emissions.

All designs to comply with detailed stipulations in this design guide.

Carbon

Management

New buildings must have an Energy Performance Certificate (EPC) in line with the

Directive1, to be provided by the person carrying out the construction project.

Seek locally sourced materials and services to minimise transport impact.

Select products with low whole life carbon emissions.

Avoid over-specifying of materials, and consider embedded carbon.

Agree a target Energy Performance rating for new buildings. The minimum is B.

CIBSE guide TM39 (Building energy metering) must be followed for new buildings and

major refurbishments. See the Mechanical Engineering Chapter for further details.

Refurbishment projects with a construction value of £2.5m (exc. VAT) or more must

consider energy efficiency improvements to existing building fabric and systems (as

detailed in the relevant chapters within this design guide).

The University’s Carbon Management Plan (click here to see it) may initiate specific

projects to reduce emissions.

Orienting and designing buildings to maximise natural light but minimise solar gain

High heat gain activities (PC labs, data centres etc) are located:

o Away from excessive solar gains (e.g. north facing façade)

o To maximise free cooling opportunities (e.g. with an external wall)

Renewable

energy

The following renewable energy sources must be investigated at all opportunities (and

could potentially drive fundamental decisions such as building orientation):

Solar thermal

Solar PV

CHP

Wind

Air source/ground source heat pumps

Biomass/Biofuel (under particular circumstances)

Waste &

reuse of

materials in

construction

UWE has a 95% recovery target for waste. Projects with a construction value over

£300,000 exc. VAT must have a site waste management plan (SWMP) to predict waste

streams and plan to prevent, reuse and recycle. UWE project management processes

explain what is required.

1 The directive is Energy Performance of Buildings Directive 2002/91/EC. An EPC is also required for

refurbishments if a building is modified to have more or fewer parts than it originally had and the modification

includes the provision or extension of fixed services for heating, air conditioning or mechanical ventilation.

Referenced from ‘A Guide to energy performance certificates for the construction, sale and let of non-

dwellings’ 2nd edition July 2008, Communities and Local Government.

http://www1.uwe.ac.uk/about/corporateinformation/sustainability/policiesplansandtargets.aspx



Subject Specific actions to be taken or considered by the design team

Note that SWMP are essential for the effective planning/costing of the work (e.g.

making sufficient space allowance for storage or plans for traffic movements).

Given the scale of work at UWE, we expect project teams to consider ‘adjacencies’ and

co-ordinate their approach to waste management: Waste from one project could

potentially be reused on another (e.g. inert demolition waste could be used as hard

core for another project).

Designs should be based on the principles of the “circular economy” which is:

“restorative and regenerative by design, and which aims to keep products, components

and materials at their highest utility and value at all times”.

Consider recyclability of materials and recycling pathways of high maintenance/short-

life products (e.g. flooring).

Designers to avoid specifying, as far as reasonably practicable, toxic substances (which

could contribute to an incident, or become hazardous waste in future).

Water UWE has a standard specification for fittings for WC refurbishments to aid water

efficiency including WCs, taps, urinals and associated controls.

Include water conservation measures within the design.

Use of rainwater and grey-water harvesting must be investigated for new builds and

major refurbishments. Where possible a gravity fed system must be specified. For

refurbishments, if retrofitting an internal system is not viable, the collection of

rainwater must be considered for grounds watering purposes.

Potential use of boreholes is being investigated at Frenchay.

Biodiversity Grounds design to comply with Chapter 9 of this design guide to seek the best

ecological options/opportunities.

Climate

Change

adaptation

Develop designs for operating under 2020 climatic conditions together with defined

practical strategies for operating under 2050 conditions as set out in section 2.7 of this

Guide. Particular attention should be paid to avoiding overheating.

Other considerations informing product selection

Designers must consider the impact on the environment when selecting materials (e.g. avoid over-

specifying the use of cement). UWE encourages all designers to use A rated materials/products

from the BRE Green Guide to Specification wherever reasonably practicable, and in addition to use

materials in accordance with the RICS SKA HE assessment tool. Other requirements are set out in

the Chapter addressing Fabric and Structural design.

Funding Opportunities for Sustainability Measures

If certain projects require additional funding to enable more sustainable travel or the most energy

efficient option to be installed, then the Energy and Travel Teams within Facilities must be

consulted to discuss possible opportunities to access external funding.



3.6 Design for Wellbeing

It is believed we spend around 90% of our lives in buildings and these environments significantly

impact our health and wellbeing, and ultimately our productivity and performance. Staff costs

represent 90% of operating costs of an organisation (compared to 1% for energy costs). Even

modest increases in performance and productivity (or reduced turnover, absenteeism etc.) brought

about by thoughtful, “human-centred design” can lead to significant benefits for individuals and the

organisation. The importance of user experience to our students and staff, and the value of

human-centred design, must be considered alongside more traditional measures of whole life cost

and capital costs during the design and delivery of campus development.

Measurable aspects of wellbeing such as light, air quality and temperature are no less important

than connection to nature and a sense of ownership. Later chapters of the design guide set out

UWE’s approach to creating a comfortable environment. Often, thoughtfully placed design features

can support positive wellbeing, as well as other UWE strategies. For example, trees can reduce

solar gains and create a pleasant environment.

Buildings and external landscapes shall be designed with consideration of the university’s smoking

policy, found here (click ‘here’ to see it). In brief, building design and signage should discourage

people from smoking outside buildings, particularly where smoke can enter doors/windows.

Multi-function, wellbeing spaces

Designers and project team must consider providing at least one multi-function space within new

buildings or major refurbishments (projects with a construction value of £2.5m (exc. VAT) or more).

These spaces can be used for:

Space for quiet reflection or prayer

Wellbeing activities (e.g. physiotherapy exercises)

First aid provision

New and expectant mothers (including where breastfeeding mothers can express/store milk)

Diabetics can self-inject etc.

They must be colour neutral and image free and the equivalent size of a one person office. Where

reasonable, especially in larger buildings, consideration should be given to two spaces: One to

cater for physical wellbeing (first aid etc.), the other for mental/spiritual wellbeing.

Spaces catering for physical wellbeing should be equipped with refrigerators and storage (including

a ‘sharps bin’). Doors will need to be equipped with locks so that people will not be disturbed.

The justification and requirements of these spaces would need to be made on a project by project

basis after consultation with the stakeholders. Sufficient measures must be put in place by the end

users to ensure the space does not become a store room or overflow work space.

http://www1.uwe.ac.uk/students/healthandwellbeing/stayinghealthy/smokefreecampus.aspx



3.7 Religion and Belief

UWE is committed to provide an inclusive learning and working environment where students and

staff of all religions or beliefs, or those who have no belief, can thrive.

Designers need to be aware that UWE is facing a growing set of challenges to meet the religious

and spiritual needs of our community. In no particular order these are:

Almost one third of our student population (approximately 10,000 students) identify themselves

as having a religion and as such, they may wish to use existing faith facilities

We are actively recruiting from communities and regions with strong faith traditions and the

numbers of students who actively and routinely use faith facilities is increasing

The existing facilities are struggling to cope with twice the demand it was built to acommodate.

However, numerous ‘pockets’ of provision are not desirable unless there is consideration of how,

in practice, they will be supported.

Historically faith provision has been considered in a piecemeal and reactive manner.

With the completion of new student residences in Frenchay, we have more students living on

site leading to increased demands but also different patterns of demand.

The existing Community Hub is celebrating it’s 40th Anniversary in 2019, but (given the

comments above) UWE is considering the need for alternative facilities.

The legal landscape is developing and the Counterterrorism and Security Act 2015 places an

explicit legal duty on UWE as a Specified Authority, to prevent people being drawn into

terrorism. Our approach to religion and belief is a key element of how we meet that duty.

Faith provision must be ‘front of house’ and readily accessible.

Faith facilities may be used as safe spaces in the event of a major incident.

Designers must consult the University’s Coordinating Chaplain in the Faith and Spirituality Team

ahead of any major refurbishment or new build (projects with a construction value of £2.5m (exc.

VAT) or more). The Chaplain will organise further consultation as required. For example, the

Community Hub is overseen by a board of trustees which must be consulted on changes and faith

groups would be consulted on their own specific requirements.

The design team will be assisted in determining what provision may be needed, or how we can

improve access to existing facilities. Where specific features are needed (e.g. a faith room or ritual

washing facilities), the design team will be advised on what is required.

Generally, faith spaces must be designed to cater for a multitude of faiths (creating a multi-faith

space). As explained above, the UWE chaplain must be consulted to help the project team

evaluate the likely demand and peak times of use (which will influence the size of the space),

design etc.

A later chapter of this guide discusses memorial plaques. In brief, they are not encouraged.



3.8 Fire Strategy

Fire Safety Standards

Buildings must be designed using BS 9999:2008 (Code of practice for fire safety in the design,

management and use of buildings) unless fire safety engineering using BS 7974 is needed.

The UWE Health and Safety Team (HST) must be consulted regarding the proposed fire strategy.

The HST have produced a comprehensive suite of documents, known as Fire Safety Standards

(FSS), that outline the functional requirements of fire precautions on the UWE estate, including

provision for people with disabilities, fire doors etc. The documents can be found here (click ‘here’).

The Electrical engineering and IT infrastructure chapters of this design guide provides more

technical details regarding fire detection and alarm, emergency lighting etc.

Information requirements

Project teams for both refurbishments and new builds must consult the UWE Health and Safety

team and provide fire strategy information.

Regulation 38 of the Building Regulations & Fire Safety Information

Designers must provide Fire Safety Information if they are erecting, extending or changing the use

of a building. Fire Safety Information relates to the design and construction of the building or

extension, and the services, fittings and equipment provided in or in connection with the building or

extension which will assist the responsible person to operate and maintain the building or extension

with reasonable safety. This must be provided not later than the date of completion of the work, or

the date of occupation of the building or extension, whichever is the earlier.

UWE undertakes numerous projects which alter existing fire protection systems but which do not

represent an extension or change of use.

UWE Requires designers and project teams to comply with Regulation 38 of the Building

Regulations regardless of the scope of the project.

UWE’s specific requirements are set out in project processes. In short, design and project teams

must comply with Appendix G of Part B of the Building Regulations and Appendix H of BS 9999.

That chapter of the design guide also address commissioning fire protection systems, such as

detection/alarm, smoke control etc.

A building cannot be accepted if fire protection systems are not operational and if required fire

safety information is missing.

http://imp.uwe.ac.uk/imp_public/displayentry.asp?URN=3970&rp=listEntry.asp



Consultation with UWE Health and Safety Team (HST)

The UWE HST is a key stakeholder. UWE has a range of mechanisms to ensure the HST are

notified of projects at RIBA stage 1 to ensure that obligations under CDM 2015 are met.

UWE is also the ‘Responsible Person’ under the Regulatory Reform (Fire Safety Order) 2005 and

must have an active role in assessing the impact that the project will have on existing fire safety

arrangements during construction and after handover.

Consultation with the HST Fire Advisor must commence at the equivalent of RIBA stage 2 (Concept

Design). Critical decisions will be reached during this stage about architectural, building services

and structural engineering and Fire Safety must be an integral consideration. Further, construction

strategies will have developed to the point that the team will understand the wider impact of the

project on UWE operations, staff and students.

Design responsibilities for fire safety during construction

Designers have a role to play in reducing fire risks during the construction phase. The Joint Code

on Fire Prevention in Construction Sites provides guidance to designers and places a number of

requirements on them. The code generally applies on projects over £2.5m but it can also apply to

lower value but high-risk contracts. The code states that “the design should be assessed to ensure

that fire risk and potential for damage have been fully considered to keep to a minimum during

construction and use.” The lead designer must ensure this is done.

On all projects, regardless of value, UWE requires that designers consider the following items which

are copied verbatim from the joint code:

The use of non-combustible and non-flammable materials to reduce fire loads

Materials and methods that avoid the need for hot work on site

Design details that prevent the passage of smoke and flames up through a building during

the construction phase

Design of access routes to enable the contractors to construct buildings in such a manner as

to retain safe evacuation routes during the construction phase

Design for fire fighting/alarm systems to allow early use – possibly on a partial use basis.

HSE guidance HSG168 (Fire Safety in Construction), highlights the need for effective communication

between dutyholders. This ensures, for example, fire compartment walls are identified and

designs/programmes allow for temporary fire-stopping. The Principal Designer plays a key role in

collating and distributing this information and reviewing design risk information. The HST reviews

the Principal Contractor’s plan for managing fire risks, which is part of the Construction Phase Plan.



Fire Stopping

Any specifications or other designs for fire stopping around linear joint seals, service penetrations

and small cavities must confirm to the current edition of the Association for Specialist Fire

Protection’s Red Book Fire Stopping And Penetration Seals For The Construction Industry). The

following table is taken from that Book and shows the permitted applications of fire stopping

products. Fire stopping should be an integral design consideration, rather than an afterthought, to

ensure that it is aesthetically in keeping/co-ordinated with the fabric and mechanical designs.

Table: Permitted application of generic fire stopping products



3.9 Printer Allocation Policy

Designers need to make adequate provision for printing. To do that in a consistent and planned

manner they need to aware of the UWE Printer Allocation Policy.

In the past, printers have been purchased without regard to the lifetime cost of the device. Savings

can be delivered to the University if the proliferation of printers is halted, more people share devices

and personal printers become the exception rather than the rule.

The aim of the “Allocation Policy” is to provide guidelines for future printer deployment. Printing and

Stationery (PSS) is a key stakeholder for any project and must be consulted as soon as it is clear

that printers may need to be moved/removed/replaced or added.

They will help assess current and future printing demands, advise on printer specifications and

locations, including the space needed for printing supplies, and help the project team to apply the

basic principles of the Printer Strategy. Some general points to note are:

A space approximately 1.5m x 1.5m is required for each printer which will be floor-standing.

Smaller machines are available where usage will be low but may need to sit on a worktop or

desk.

Devices will need 1 x TSSO (1 outlet for the machine and 1 for a servicing technician’s use).

Each will require 1 x wired data outlet. Direct connection to a PC will only be permitted in

highly exceptional circumstances as this seriously restricts sharing. Connection of printers to

the network via WiFi is not currently supported.

Power and data sockets must not be located in floor boxes where there is any likelihood, now or

in the future, of the printer covering the floor box.

Storage space for paper and other consumables will be required. For larger machines in high-

use areas storage for up to 30 boxes of paper may be required.

Space will be required to maintain and repair the machine. The machine will need to be moved

out of position and rotated to access some parts and this has to be conducted in a safe space

for the technician and other personnel.

Consideration must be given to providing sound-deadening screens in areas that will be quiet to

avoid disturbing occupiers of the room.

Please note that printers being introduced as part of a project must be purchased out of project

funds. There is no central budget for new provision.

Fire Risk Assessment

The increased use of shared printers and copiers has led to electrical equipment moving from a

room, fitted with a door, into escape routes, which people will need to use in an emergency. This

creates a fire hazard in what is expected to be a relatively sterile area, free from combustible

materials, ignition sources and obstructions.



Under no circumstances must a printer workstation be located:

• In residential accommodation

• In a protected staircase

• Where there is an escape route in a single direction only.

• Where the workstation would reduce the available escape width below 1000mm.

The following standards must be referred to when making decisions about printer locations:

FSS05: Maintaining the Means of Escape HSS11: Circulation Space

3.10 UWE Sport Vision

Providing facilities for health, physical activity and sport will support UWE in meeting the ambitions

set out in the UWE Bristol Strategy 2020. Sports facilities are used for a range of purposes beyond

physical activity and sports, such as occupational health assessments. There is a strong

association between physical activity and physical and mental wellbeing.

Therefore, the UWE Sports Vision is to provide every student with the opportunity to play sport or

take part in healthy activity at a time and level appropriate to them.

How the Estate supports the UWE Sports Vision

Designers must engage with the Centre for Sport to notify them of forthcoming projects affecting or

expanding sports facilities and determine their requirements from the masterplan or specific

buildings. They will, in consultation with users, advise on the facilities that are needed and specific

design features (e.g. floor finishes) required to make those facilities functional and attractive.

The Centre for Sports can suggest creative uses of relatively small internal or external spaces to

help delivers the Sports Vision, and ultimately support Strategy 2020. Therefore, they must be

consulted ahead of major refurbishments or new builds.





3.11 UWE Transport Strategy

The University promotes the following general principles in regard to design of new and refurbished

transport infrastructure on campus. Many of the issues mentioned here are discussed further in

the Chapter addressing hard- and soft-landscaping:

Provision for transport users needs in a hierarchy, with pedestrians, cyclists and disabled users

at the top, followed by public transport users and then private motorcycles and cars.

Application of the UK Governments ‘Manual for Streets’ guidance (click this link to see it),

including especially shared space principles.

Spatial separation of transport infrastructure on campus, with the central areas of campuses

primarily designed for pedestrians, with parking peripheral to the site.

Consideration of all transport needs, including safe and efficient servicing access and

consideration of access for all modes including motorcycle, taxi, emergency vehicles etc.

Access and maintenance/plant replacement strategies may also require MEWP/Crane access.

Promoting use of electric vehicles by introducing charging points.

Legible pedestrian routes for key routes within campus to be strengthened through the design

process (see the signage and wayfinding strategy next).

Cycle facilities in new builds shall have adequate sheltered and secure cycle parking, lockers and

showers, including facilities for disabled persons who may use a hand-powered cycle and

require wheelchair storage. New cycle parking to follow Bristol City Council guidance (click this

link to see it).

The design team must work closely with the Local Authority to ensure that all requirements for the

site specific transport strategy, traffic assessment and environmental impact assessment are met.

UWE has a risk assessment addressing the interface of vehicles and pedestrians. Any designs that

change or introduce new interfaces must be discussed with the UWE Travel and Access Team.

3.12 Signage and Wayfinding Strategy

Effective wayfinding can have a significant impact on the life of the University: It enables staff,

students and visitors to navigate and move smoothly through our buildings and estate, helps to

reduce confusion or anxiety and creates an inclusive environment. Wayfinding also reinforces the

UWE brand, by creating a consistent theme that reflects UWE’s values and aspirations, and provides

critical information that supports a range of other strategies (e.g. fire and wellbeing). In contrast,

ineffective wayfinding (e.g. lack of information about accessible routes or facilities) can create

unnecessary barriers and stress. UWE has therefore created a standard specification which sets

out in detail the design and application of signage to support efficient wayfinding.

Different user groups have varying demands in terms of information required and preferred

methods of communication, so UWE has identified a multi-strand strategy to enable improved

wayfinding around and between its campuses. This strategy consists of:

https://www.gov.uk/government/publications/manual-for-streets

http://www.bristol.gov.uk/ccm/content/Environment-Planning/Planning/planning-guidance---cycle-parking.en

http://www.bristol.gov.uk/ccm/content/Environment-Planning/Planning/planning-guidance---cycle-parking.en



Physical signage and wayfinding totems (both internal and external)

Electronic signage

Wayfinding apps and online mapping tools

Physical Signage

UWE has engaged a specialist signage and wayfinding consultant (ABG Design) to work with the

University on a new physical signage strategy consisting of a new signage family. This will be

applied to future capital projects and a phased replacement/update programme to existing signage

will be undertaken. In brief, project teams need to be aware that:

Different types of signs exist for different functions, providing ever increasing levels of detail to

allow individuals to find their destination. This represented in the image, below. If changes

are being made to the layout of a building (e.g. adding/removing rooms or facilities such as

showers or cycle parks), the wayfinding signs must be traced back to determine what signs

need to be updated. The project budget and programme must allow for these amendments.

Certain signs require power and/or data or controls (e.g. for lighting and remote change of the

display). Projects which install or change signage will need to allow for these supplies.

Please contact Estates for the current specification for signage.

Electronic signage

The dynamic, ever-changing nature of University activity and space allocations means that physical

signage can quickly become out-dated and is costly to update. Electronic site display screens and

signs are therefore used at key locations around campuses – particularly at entry points and near

receptions/information points. The displayed content can be controlled remotely and highlights



current events or important information. On all Estates projects, electronic signage must be

considered alongside physical static signage. This can be particularly useful for teaching spaces or

meeting rooms, where wall-mounted tablets can display live timetables of room bookings or

scheduled teaching. Project teams must allow for the addition of power and data in these cases.

Wayfinding Apps and mapping tools

Along with physical signage on site (whether fixed or electronic) there is an emerging requirement

for mapping tools which can be used on mobile devices. UWE has engaged with a company called

MapsPeople to create a web-based mapping tool, which sits on top of the Google Maps platform.

This allows users to navigate across complex sites using step-by-step directions and to select

preferences or certain criteria such as accessible routes only. Another feature of the wayfinding

app is that users can search for specific facilities which may not otherwise be signpost on physical

signage (e.g. specific room numbers). As this is further developed, it is envisaged that this

becomes a more prominent wayfinding tool which can be embedded in various communications

such as emails, open day or event information etc. This technology will be developed in

consultation with users, including targeted focus groups to ensure it is accessible and inclusive.

An inclusive and accessible Wayfinding Strategy

In addition to the various, inclusive features mentioned above, the strategy will ensure:

Accessible routes are shown on signage diagrams.

Location of accessible and gender neutral WCs, faith or wellbeing spaces are indicated on ‘Type

4’ floor plans.

Symbols to WC doors and to other main spaces to be raised and tactile.

Signage to be of a matte finish.

All physical maps to be marked with a ‘you are here’ identifier.

3.13 Occupancy Hours

Our occupancy hours can drive various aspects of the design, such as heating, lighting, security etc.

The precise details will need to be established on a project-by-project basis. The Mechanical

Engineering Chapter has further information on core hours. In brief, core hours are:

Space Hours

Office space 08:00 – 18:00pm

Teaching 08:30 – 18:00pm

Sports 07:00 – 22:30pm

Library/IT areas Up to 24 hours (potentially also throughout vacation periods which must be carefully considered when planning the security strategy)

Student accommodation 24 hr


Chapter 4: Space Standards


C h a p t e r 4 | S p a c e S t a n d a r d s I s s u e 1 . 3 P a g e | 1

Table of Contents 4.1 Introduction to Space Management 2

4.1.1 The role of the space management team in design 2

4.2 Functional Requirements in all Buildings 2

4.3 Space Types 3

4.4 Space Standards 5

4.4.1 Space Allocation 5

4.4.2 Notes on calculating space requirements 6

4.5 Room numbering 6



4.1 Introduction to Space Management

It is imperative that the University’s estate be both efficient and effective. The Space

Management team, in conjunction with the Central Timetabling Unit, Estates and Facilities

and the Faculties are tasked with achieving this through maximising utilisation rates and

creating space that is as flexible, functional and future-proofed as possible.

This Chapter of the design guide sets out:

The different functional requirements in buildings, which impact on space allocation

General design requirements of different space types

The specific space allowances for certain types of spaces

UWE’s approach to room numbering

Designers should be familiar with Chapters 1, 2 and 3 before commencing design work.

4.1.1 The role of the space management team in design

It is useful to understand the role of the Space Management team and some of the ways in

which they can directly influence or contribute to design. The team assists UWE and project

teams to better utilise space by:

Liaising with faculties and departments regarding their current and future space needs

and providing advice regarding room layouts and best use of space;

Recommending the remodelling and reconfiguring of existing space where there is

evidence that it is inadequately used or ill-equipped;

Setting space standards, as detailed below.

4.2 Functional Requirements in all Buildings

For the efficient future management of the completed building, a number of building

management facilities (e.g. plant rooms) will be required. In addition to these a number of

other facilities are a prerequisite in all buildings:-

At least one cleaner’s room on each floor (see Chapter 2 of the design guide);

The number of toilets will be calculated by the possible numbers of persons within the

building at a change in timetabled periods. Design considerations influencing welfare

facilities are addressed in Chapter 3 of the design guide;

Shower rooms, changing rooms and drying rooms will be provided dependant on usage;

Lobbies and reception areas need to be bright and welcoming and clearly delineated, in

order that visitors know where to report and gain information;

Hub rooms/switch rooms and/or communications cabinets;

Waste storage will be required according to the waste strategy for the building and

surrounding campus, available from the Waste and Sustainability team.



First aid facilities (this is potentially one use for multi-function wellbeing rooms, as

discussed in Chapter 3 of this design guide);

The Design Team will be required to develop and incorporate furniture layout orientation

with UWE appointed framework furniture suppliers;

All furniture to adhere to UWE’s approved furniture standards.

Signage (internal and external) to comply with UWE’s signage specification;

4.3 Space Types

Below are some guidelines on space planning within buildings. The guidelines are not

exhaustive. Consultants and contractors are encouraged to engage with the Space

Management and Design Team early in any project. This team will be able to give a more

comprehensive understanding of room types and sizes.

The University has a vast assortment of spaces, which can be largely classified in the

following list. The classifications used by the Space Team are based on data sets that form

part of statutory and in-house returns such as Estates Management Record (EMR) reports to

HESA, TRAC and RAM data for financial returns.

Space Type Description and Space Considerations

Lecture

Theatres

Large teaching rooms with fixed tiered seating used for traditional didactic delivery

of taught modules to larger groups. These are all centrally scheduled spaces which

are used by all Faculties and Services. Recently the University has commissioned a

number of Harvard style lecture theatres to meet the demand in changes to

teaching in some areas. Lecture Theatres are planned to meet overall institutional

needs and, where possible, link to other spaces to ease traffic flow. IT and AV

requirements should be discussed with the University’s IT service.

Large

Teaching

Rooms /

Event spaces

Large rooms with mobile furniture which are generally used for delivering taught

modules to larger groups. Centrally scheduled spaces used by all Faculties and

Services. Generally, rooms should accommodate classes of 50 (this is subject to

change as teaching methods evolve therefore please liaise with the University’s

Space Manager on current demands). IT and AV requirements should be discussed

with the University’s IT service. Please bear in mind these rooms may be used for

exam purposes and this should be considered when specifying furniture. Such

large spaces can pose challenges for delivering effective natural lighting and

discussions about the implications will need to start during RIBA stage 2.

General

Purpose

Teaching

Space

Agile rooms with movable furniture to suit different teaching styles. Centrally

scheduled spaces used by all Faculties and Services. Generally, rooms should

accommodate classes of 25 (this may change as teaching methods evolve

therefore please liaise with the University’s Space Manager on current demands).

IT requirements should be discussed with the University’s IT service. These rooms

may be used for exams and this should be considered when ordering furniture etc.




Meeting

Spaces

Rooms designated for formal/informal meetings. Centrally and locally scheduled

space, available to all. Power and data points should be provided. Liaise with the

UWE Space Manager on current needs/sizes of meeting rooms.

Interview

Rooms

Private spaces where confidential matters can be discussed by between two to six

people. Power and data points are required. Interview rooms will require higher

standards of acoustic insulation and may also need panic alarms. The use of

blinds, frosting etc. should be considered if visual privacy is also needed.

Receptions

Reception desks should be designed to a consistent corporate image, provide

sufficient working space, be accessible and have hidden cabling. Receptions

should be light and welcoming with soft seating provided.

Office Space

Office space to support business activities. These may be individual, shared or

open plan and include storage provision and ancillary spaces. Office space is non-

scheduled space apart from hot desks which may be locally scheduled. No-one

should have more than one desk unless there is a justifiable reason. The norm is

open plan arrangement for Professional Services and most academic staff to be in

offices of up to four. Refer to the space standards below as a guide. Contact the

University’s Space Manager for advice on layout and furniture requirements.

Storage An allowance should be made for storage dependant on occupiers and use of

building. Please refer to Space Manager on requirements.

Specialist/

Research/

Teaching

Laboratories

Special purpose space which does not typically lend itself to other uses (although

some laboratories may allow for dual/multi-purpose use). Targeted use which may

be centrally or locally scheduled space. Please note these spaces need determining

early as they may have structural, mechanical, electrical, drainage and ventilation

implications above “normal” space usage. Please refer to the Space Manager

regarding the additional allocation of specialist space per academic subject.

General

Laboratories

Laboratories should be fit for purpose, flexible and adaptable for use by other

faculties, where possible. Please note these spaces need determining early as they

have structural, mechanical and electrical implications above “normal” space usage.

PC

Laboratories

General PC laboratories, with non-specialist software or hardware. Centrally

scheduled space, used by all Faculties. IT requirements should be discussed with

the University’s IT service. Power, data & ventilation requirements to be specified.

Open Access

Learning or

Group Work

Space

Flexible, ad-hoc and locally bookable spaces used to facilitate individual and group

learning. Mainly non-scheduled space, with some bookable spaces. For use by all

students. Wi-fi, power and data requirements to be specified.

Library

Spaces

Library space will include a mixture of library and individual student and group

work study. Please liaise with the Head of Library Services and Space Manager on

current space needs and trends.

Staff Social

Areas,

Kitchens and

Tea Points

Tea points, staff kitchen areas and staff common rooms should be informal areas

which may or may not be in the immediate vicinity of offices and could be shared

between one or more faculties or service. Specification to be agreed at space

management level, with input from Faculty or Service.




Catering

Facilities

The design and need for central catering areas within buildings should involve

discussions with the Catering Manager and Space Manager to fully understand the

University’s requirements. Cafes and catering are addressed in the fabric and

structural chapter of this guide. Furniture to be specified in conjunction with Space

Management and Design Team to suit type of catering space being commissioned.

Sports

Facilities

Sporting facilities (as discussed elsewhere) support a number of UWE strategies.

Any future design proposal that relates to sporting facilities will require the design

team to adopt the University’s excellent standards and incorporate readily accepted

industry standards. Equipment to be sourced in conjunction with Head of Sport.

Toilets/

Showers

Toilets and shower areas will be designed to be sufficient for building occupancy

levels and be compliant with the current legislation, best practice, etc.

Quiet Rooms Multi-use spaces for rest and recovery, quiet contemplation should be considered.

These should be non-bookable with vacant/in-use sign on door. The décor should

be conducive to relaxation and should be designed with multiple use in mind.

4.4 Space Standards

UWE has a Space Standards Guide that is used as a guideline when calculating space needs.

Space standards recognise differing space needs according to use and subject area. These

standards are not prescriptive but are a baseline for high level modelling. The standards are

rarely used in isolation and other issues (e.g. the building structure/layout building) and

specific operational requirements will be considered. Consult the space management team

who will assist the project team to apply these standards, especially for teaching areas.

4.4.1 Space Allocation

Office Space Space min m2 / person Notes

Single Office with Meeting Space 12 - 15 Designated Senior Staff or other specific requirement

Single Office 9 As above

Shared / Open Plan Office 6.5 Staff

Meeting Area in Open Plan 2.5 Where group-working is a necessity

Meeting Room 2.5

Additional Administrative

Space

Space min m2 up to

3,000 students

Notes

Student facing administrative

space

50 (+10 m2/extra 1,000

students)

Includes reception and hand in areas

Social Spaces m2 per person

Restaurants / Cafés – dining areas 0.2

Restaurants / Cafés – kitchens 0.17

Communal areas – students 0.7

Communal areas – staff 0.9



4.4.2 Notes on calculating space requirements

Office Space: An allocation based on the types of staff, the actual staff numbers except

for job share, hourly paid lecturers and other ‘hot deskers’.

Teaching and Specialist Space: Allocations based on teaching delivery requirement and

open access learning space / laboratory or other specialist requirement. Please refer to

UWE’s Space Manager on the latest standard for specialist spaces.

Please note that the sizes specified for office space are not necessarily an entitlement but an

overall measurement for different categories of staff per organisational unit.

Storage should initially be considered as part of the allocation for office space. Additional

space and storage requirements may be considered on an individual basis. For example, to

give room for carers or space for a small personal fridge for medication etc. Offices must be

designed with some spare capacity to cater for future, reasonable adjustments.

4.4.2.1 Ensuring space allowances support accessibility

UWE recognises that some staff and students need assistive equipment or support (e.g. a

personal assistant or guide dog). Space standards are the minimum space/person.

Additional space will be made available where required and the design guide requires that

spaces are flexible enough to accommodate future changes.

4.5 Room numbering

Room numbering within a building must be correct, consistent and clearly identifiable.

Room numbers assist people in finding their way around a building and link to systems

and data relating to fire alarms, asset management, maintenance works requests and

asbestos. Room numbering confusion could cause problems in managing these issues.

The Space Management Team will allocate room numbers and has produced a Room

Numbering Policy (SPP3, click ‘SPP3’ to see it) which must be strictly adhered to.

The topography of the Frenchay campus poses challenges for room numbering (and at

first glance can appear counter-intuitive). However, a slice through the campus would

find all floors at the same elevation given the same number.

Under no circumstances can any staff (internal or external) assign their own numbers.


Chapter 5: Fabric & Structural Design


C h a p t e r 5 | F a b r i c & S t r u c t u r a l D e s i g n I s s u e 1 . 3 P a g e | 1

Table of Contents

5.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................ 3

5.1.1 Designing for flexible use ...................................................................................... 3

5.2 Furniture and furnishings ............................................................................................. 4

5.3 Accessibility of Student Accommodation ........................................................................ 4

5.4 Structural details ......................................................................................................... 5

5.4.1 Structural engineering ........................................................................................... 5

5.4.2 Imposed Loads and Performance ........................................................................... 5

5.4.3 Foundations ......................................................................................................... 6

5.4.4 Structural Form .................................................................................................... 6

5.4.5 Timber Frame ....................................................................................................... 6

5.5 Circulation Principles .................................................................................................... 7

5.5.1 Building Entrances ................................................................................................ 7

5.5.2 Reception ............................................................................................................. 7

5.5.3 Steps and stairs .................................................................................................... 7

5.5.4 Horizontal circulation ............................................................................................. 8

5.5.5 Vertical circulation ................................................................................................ 8

5.6 Sustainable Material Selection ...................................................................................... 9

5.7 Building fabric and envelope ...................................................................................... 10

5.7.1 External Envelope ............................................................................................... 10

5.7.2 Roof (including rooflights) ................................................................................... 10

5.7.3 Roof lights ......................................................................................................... 11

5.7.4 Windows ............................................................................................................ 11

5.7.5 External Doors .................................................................................................... 12

5.7.6 External Finishes................................................................................................. 13

5.7.7 Rainwater Goods ................................................................................................ 14

5.8 Internal Finishes ....................................................................................................... 15

5.8.1 General Provision ................................................................................................ 15

5.8.2 Internal Walls & Doors ........................................................................................ 15

5.8.3 Plasterboard ....................................................................................................... 17

5.8.4 Tiles .................................................................................................................. 17

5.8.5 Suspended Ceilings ............................................................................................. 17



5.8.6 Flooring ............................................................................................................. 18

5.8.7 Painting ............................................................................................................. 20

5.8.8 Vision Access/visual contrasts .............................................................................. 20

5.8.9 Acoustics ........................................................................................................... 20

5.8.10 Fixtures and Fittings ............................................................................................ 20

5.9 Provision for storage, deliveries and movement of materials ......................................... 21

5.10 Catering design ......................................................................................................... 21

5.10.1 Lessons learned .................................................................................................. 22

5.10.2 Production Kitchens ............................................................................................ 22

5.10.3 Deli/Café/Bar Style Operation .............................................................................. 23

5.10.4 Vending Operation .............................................................................................. 27

5.10.5 Tea Points .......................................................................................................... 28



5.1 Introduction

Chapters 1, 2 and 3 of this Design Guide set out the overarching principles and functional

requirements for this design guide. All designers should familiarise themselves with these sections.

Each project will have specific requirements, limitations, challenges, and opportunities that affect a

project’s cultural, environmental, technological, and aesthetic contexts.

The client faculty or service will have their own vision of the end result. While wanting to satisfy

those expectations, practical issues and design or construction constraints may require those initial

concepts to be reviewed and revised. To provide confidence and mitigate surprises, the Designer will

arrange regular meetings with the stakeholders to communicate progress and explain and discuss

design development.

This guide must be read in conjunction with the UWE’s Standard Specification. UWE will consider

alternative products if the change is considered to be for the better and provides acceptable life cycle

costs and resiliency, including ease of maintenance and availability of replacement components. The

derogation process (explained in Chapter 2.0) shall be used to help manage the process.

The UWE is a progressive University and welcomes the use of new technology after the balance of

risks and benefits have been established and evaluated.

5.1.1 Designing for flexible use

To provide flexible space, Designers should assume future changes in use and internal layout but not

at the expense of appearance, acoustics, thermal capacity or stability. The requirement for flexible

spaces will obviously influence the structural form, and lead to the use of non-load bearing internal

walls where practicable.

There will need to be ample accessible service routes to accommodate future alterations or expansion

of services as technology and teaching techniques evolve. Raised floors and/or generous supply of

floor ducts is to be included with all projects to avoid trailing leads and to assist with future alterations

and flexibility of room layout.



5.2 Furniture and furnishings

The Faculty/Client will lead in the selection of furniture and furnishings. The package may be removed

in all or part from the building contract in order for the client to manage. The Designer will liaise with

the client accordingly and provide advice and practical guidance as necessary.

As alluded to in Chapter 1 of this Design Guide, the choice of furniture and furnishings impacts on

the student experience, influences how flexible and accessible a space is and alters perception of

the space. There will be variation in furniture/furnishings in social and learning spaces.

Designers must ensure internal spaces have flexibility to accommodate a choice of furniture

arrangements to suit a range of users. There should be a choice of seat, bench and desk/workstation

heights (including sinks and fittings), with and without arms/backrests and visually contrasted from

room finishes. Sink fittings are to be operable by someone with reduced manual dexterity. Experience

has shown that the colour of furniture needs to be considered alongside the colour/quality of lighting:

The light can radically alter perception of furniture colour.

Tables, desks and seating to be movable and designed to enable disabled users to sit with colleagues,

particularly in canteen/refectory areas and common rooms. Some seating should be more enclosed,

providing more privacy or a quieter area.

Furniture in offices should strive for more conformity, and the UWE preference is for 1600mmx800mm

straight desks with under-desk pedestals. The inclusion of sit/stand workstations helps make the

environment more widely accessible.

5.3 Accessibility of Student Accommodation

All the principles set out here, and in the rest of the Design Guide, are equally applicable to student

accommodation. Specific requirements are needed to ensure that accommodation is accessible:

A suitable number of rooms should be accessible or can be readily remodelled as accessible

accommodation. Generally, this should represent 5% of the bedrooms, but will be influenced

by the Equality Impact Analysis. For ease of access these will normally only be provided at

ground floor level.

These rooms will need to be large enough to accommodate assistive equipment and personal

assistants and have level access ensuite shower rooms.

Shared use wheelchair accessible kitchens will be required in these flats.

Residents will be able to manage the temperature of their own rooms.

Accessible bedrooms and ensuite ceilings are to be capable of supporting a tracked hoist, with

pre-fitted fused spur power point at high level. These may be retrofitted at a future date.

The consequential structural requirements are discussed later.



Vibrating pillow/mattress and visual/audible fire alarms may be required in bedrooms. This

will be determined by the Personal Emergency Evacuation Plan (PEEP). Please see the

electrical engineering chapter for more details.

5.4 Structural details

5.4.1 Structural engineering

It is imperative that during the feasibility stage for alterations to an existing building consideration is

given to how potential structural changes may affect the stability of a building. The level of complexity

must be taken into account when assessing the level of professional competency required to

undertake the structural survey and subsequent design. Engaging appropriate professionals at the

earliest opportunity is paramount. The entire feasibility of a project could be decided on the outcome

of their investigation.

5.4.2 Imposed Loads and Performance

In general, loading will be in accordance with the appropriate current standards. Flexibility in use is

a key requirement. Open plan areas should be designed with the capacity to accommodate additional

partition walls which may be required in the future and that office space may change to meeting

rooms etc. UWE therefore encourages a large grid and as large as possible finished floor to finished

ceiling height commensurate with a reasonable cost.

With office accommodation, floors should be designed so that filing cabinets can be positioned mid

span, away from external walls.

If permitted within Town and Country Planning rules, and where structurally/economically feasible,

additional capacity should be included so that it is possible to increase the height of the building by

subsequently adding additional storeys.

Student accommodation designated for current or future disabled students and disabled toilet facilities

are to be appropriately designed (in terms of ceiling height and structure) for the fitting of personal

hoists (or retro-fitting if there is no current demand). Ceiling fixing for hoists is preferred to the use

of a steel gantry.

The structural capacity of roofs should allow for the opportunity to add additional plant without having

to undertake subsequent structural work.

Structural information must be incorporated within the handover documents. Typically this is in the

form of the ‘key structural principles’ section of the health and safety file with cross-referencing to

relevant drawings.



Ground floor circulation spaces should be capable of supporting and storing mobile plant with the

safe loading details clearly identified within the handover documents (e.g. a floor loading diagram

within the access and maintenance strategy).

5.4.3 Foundations

A ground investigation report is a prerequisite to any detailed foundation design. Sustainability and

holistic thinking should come to the fore; for example, passive design options such as ground source

heat pumps could be incorporated.

Consideration must also be given to temporary measures to stabilise ground when excavating around

existing buildings, and bridging details around services.

As mentioned earlier, where practicable foundations are to be designed to accommodate additional

storeys which can be added in the future.

Lift pits are to be suitably designed to prevent any ingress of ground water entering the pit or

adversely affecting the lift shaft components. Suitable detailing during foundation design is preferred

to subsequent tanking remedies.

5.4.4 Structural Form

The design team will produce a report on the options for the superstructure which will be based on

the recommended foundation design solution. A further report will be required once the option has

been decided, detailing load paths and mechanisms. The report will form part of the building design

documentation required.

The University is not adverse to the use of prefabricated elements such as bathroom pods, for

example. However, evidence will be required to demonstrate how quality will be assured in the off-

site manufacturing process. Furthermore, future maintenance/replacement of these pods would need

to be carefully considered and explained in access and maintenance strategies.

Use of pre- and post- tensioned and cantilevered elements should be the subject of a risk evaluation

(within a design risk register) to ensure that future adaptations/demolitions can be undertaken safely.

5.4.5 Timber Frame

Due to the risk of fire, a risk evaluation (typically within a design risk register) is required for any

proposed timber framed structures on UWE sites.



5.5 Circulation Principles

5.5.1 Building Entrances

See comments on external doors, later.

Ensure that entry control communication units are visual as well as audible and can be accessed

from both a standing and seated position.

Avoid separate entrances for disabled users. In practice, this may mean we would not have

revolving doors and a separate disabled entrance. Instead, designers could create a small lobby

with 2 automatic doors which everyone can use.

Doors must not have ‘lips’: They create a barrier to wheelchairs and can be a trip hazard.

5.5.2 Reception

Ensure Reception desks are accessible to all users, including operation by disabled members of

staff. This is often and simply achieved by providing a seated working position for reception staff

and level access to desks.

Where possible, avoid providing a separate lowered section at one end for wheelchair users and

make the main part of the counter accessible to all.

Provide enhanced lighting, acoustic treatment and hearing enhancement system to counter area.

5.5.3 Steps and stairs

Lips shall be used on the side edges of steps where there are gaps between the step and the wall

– to prevent sticks and crutches from slipping off the step or materials falling.

If possible steps shall be removed from the design (except for protected stairs between floors).

Steps with associated ramps are acceptable (please note that steps may aid the mobility of those

using leg prostheses for whom ramps can be problematic).

All steps need handrails on both sides.

The contrast strip shall be on the nosing of the step (not before it).

Stair risers shall be solid (no floating stairs).

Glass must not be used for the tread or riser of stairs. Great care shall be used when considering

the use of glass for the sides of stairways.

Consideration shall be given to recessed lighting of steps (lighting is discussed elsewhere)

Although students at UWE are adults, the facilities are open to the general public who may be

accompanied by young children. The design of the stair guarding should reflect this. Approved

Document Part K section 1.1.19 refers.



5.5.4 Horizontal circulation

Where feasible, width of corridors should permit wheelchair users passing in two directions.

Consider chamfering or angling corners to facilitate wheelchair user turning and to enable deaf or

hard of hearing users to see others approaching.

Corridor doors will be fitted with hold open détentes and power assisted opening devices.

Doors should not have ‘lips’: They create a barrier to wheelchairs and can be a trip hazard.

Avoid use of digital keypads: UWE normally requires swipe card access (see the security strategy

in Chapter 3).

5.5.5 Vertical circulation

For short rises and ease of maintenance, ramps are preferable to lifts, if gradients are shallow

and lengths are not excessive or circuitous.

Install passenger lifts larger than the minimum 1100mm x 1400mm in Part M wherever possible,

to facilitate wheelchair turning within the lift.

Fold-down stairclimber platform lifts are not recommended as they can obstruct the clear width

of stairs and compromise means of escape.

Freestanding enclosed vertical platform lifts to be not less than Part M 1100mm x 1400mm

minimum size, with power assisted doors. The lift must be able to take the load imposed by

motorised mobility aids.

Enclosed platform lift controls to have single press button operation, so that users are not required

to keep continuous pressure on the button for the full extent of travel.

All lifts should be operable independently without requiring staff assistance. These should be

evacuation lifts where possible: See the electrical engineering chapter for more details.

As explained elsewhere, it is important that push button devices are positioned in close and

sensible proximity to the door they operate: Individuals cannot be expected to dash from the

button and the door. Unfortunately, this item has to be included in light of lessons learned.



5.6 Sustainable Material Selection

In addition to selecting materials to fit the brief and, as are outlined elsewhere in this document,

designers shall also take account of the sustainability impact of the materials selected. This entails

taking a life cycle perspective regarding the choice of material, i.e. from cradle to end-of-life or

preferably cradle-to-cradle (which means considering the reuse of the material).

To support our sustainability commitments, UWE requires designers to follow the principles below:

Consider the source of materials – locally sourced generally being preferable

Consider the reputational risks associated with extraction activities

Consider the embodied carbon of materials selected

Minimise waste on and off site

Plan for the reuse of materials produced as part of the construction phase

Make use of reused or recycled content in construction materials.

Use materials with ease of repair, maintenance and end-of-life dismantling in mind

Minimise the use of toxic and/or polluting materials in the design

Be able to report environmental impact, recycled content and embodied carbon of materials

Materials supply to comply with all applicable legislation throughout its supply chain

Materials should be sourced/produced under internationally acceptable environmental, social and

ethical guidelines and standards (for example, FSC for timber).

UWE encourages all designers to use A rated materials/products from the BRE Green Guide to

Specification wherever reasonably practicable, and in addition to use materials in accordance with the

RICS SKA HE assessment tool.

UWE advocates the use of high density polyethylene (HDPE) over PVC, apart from in the case of

underground ducts. The designer will need to consider an array of factors to select/specify the

appropriate material for underground pipework.

The supply chain will ideally evidence conformance to ISO14001, EMAS or equivalent.

To support our sustainability commitments, UWE requires designers to specify materials that are

robust to the wear and tear of an institutional facility. Frenchay is an exposed site and masonry must

have good resistance to moisture, frost and not susceptible to staining.

The cost and risks of maintenance and cleaning must be considered. Pre-finished materials are

preferred to materials which require painting or other ongoing cyclic maintenance activities.

Apart from aesthetic reasons, materials selected for the external fabric should not be prone to fading

when continually exposed to the elements (timber and copper are obvious exceptions). Materials

should be resistant to degrading as a result of exposure. Likewise, all exposed elements should be

easily cleanable.


C h a p t e r 5 | F a b r i c & S t r u c t u r a l D e s i g n I s s u e 1 . 3 P a g e | 1 0

5.7 Building fabric and envelope

Building segregation is to be considered at design stage – keeping teaching spaces and offices in

separate zones to enable areas to be zoned off during holidays. This also extends to fire stopping

(discussed elsewhere) and compartmentation, which should be an integral consideration of the design

and installed as early as possible. Retrospective fire stopping can leave a poor aesthetic finish and

means the building has been vulnerable to fire spread for much if not all of the Construction Phase.

The performance at all junctions and intersections will be maintained. All openings within the envelope

are to be compatible visually and technically with the external walls.

Further guidance on the use of insulation materials is given in the LPC Design Guide for the Fire

Protection of Buildings 2000.

5.7.1 External Envelope

The materials selected for the envelope must be robust, readily available, preferably obtainable locally

with a minimum life span of 60 years and not subject to early surface deterioration. This is especially

relevant when selecting a facing brick. Plastic coated products are to be avoided unless the durability

of the coating has been proven and is protected by a sound warranty.

5.7.2 Roof (including rooflights)

The roof structure shall be designed and installed in accordance with the wind loadings and exposure

conditions and particularly at Frenchay Campus which is particularly exposed. Weather tightness, high

insulation and vapour control performance will be maintained across all roofs, including interfaces

with external walls.

Wherever possible, designs should prevent the need for access onto roofs. If routine access is

required to a roof a fixed means of access must be provided. UWE’s preference is that access should

be via a stairway (e.g. extension of the stair core) rather than ladder. Level, stable routes should be

provided over roofs (e.g. a walkway of suitable construction fitted on to a profiled roof system).

Locks should only be operable by designated, off-suite keys.

A detailed risk evaluation is required in the following circumstances:

Access is to be via a ladder rather than stairs

Fall restraint system is required. If so, the installation must be a Latchways system and positioned

so that it requires the use of a 1500mm lanyard, it must be compliant with Part L, it must be

accompanied by a calculation package, design life must be not less than 25 years, all components

should be stainless steel and installers must be approved by the system supplier.

Access to the roof is via a trapdoor/ opening roof light.



Fall arrest equipment is not to be used on roofs at UWE.

Permanent fixed guarding is the preferred edge protection.

Roof drainage is to be designed in accordance with BS 12056-3:2000.

5.7.3 Roof lights

Roofs which are partially or entirely glazed should be designed to prevent breakages or a fall.

UWE will never commission or accept a walk-on glazed roof (while accepting they are technically

feasible, the University sees no reason to incur the expense and residual risk).

Upstands, non-fragile surfaces and, where necessary, handrails should be used to prevent people

inadvertently walking or falling onto (and falling through) glazed roofing. Signage and demarcation

of designated routes may be used to supplement the preceding measures.

Designs should minimise the need to clean gutters and rainwater goods and glazing to roofs. The

access and maintenance strategy should explain how this will be done.

Designers must consider maintenance access to control gear and operators for roof lights or vents.

As explained in the Chapter 2, these should be accessible from a place of safety (e.g. on a protected

roof, with no risk of falls). The access & maintenance strategy (described in Chapter 2) must explain

how glazing panels will be replaced in the event of breakage.

When replacing slate roofs or installing a new slate roof, subject to Listed Consent and general

Planning conditions, consideration should be given to the use of artificial products with high levels of

recycled content. This may be specifically relevant to the Glenside campus.

5.7.4 Windows

Windows are to be pre finished with no need for subsequent cyclic maintenance such as

painting/staining or sealing. UPVC window systems must be avoided.

The design of the windows should permit cleaning of the external glass to be undertaken from within

the room if possible, or by pole fed systems externally. The window cleaning methodology is to be

included in the access and maintenance strategy.

In mechanically ventilated buildings, opening windows are to be restricted to 150mm max. In

naturally ventilated buildings windows this shall be 300mm max. If there will be vulnerable users

(e.g. a nursery), the opening must be 100mm max. Ironmongery to be robust, suitable for

institutional use and subsequently available for the recommended life of the window.



Silicon is only to be used as a secondary form of sealant, not the primary form of weatherproofing.

It should be possible to reach and operate the control of openable windows, skylights or ventilators

in a safe manner (i.e. people are not at risk of falling). Where this is not possible due to an obstacle

or excess height, tele-flex or similar control gear is to be provided. Where there is a danger of falling

from height, tamper-proof devices should be provided to prevent the windows opening too far.

No window, skylight or ventilator shall be positioned when opened which is likely to expose any person

to a risk to their health or safety. Open window, skylight or ventilators should not project into an area

where persons are likely to collide with them. The bottom edge of opening windows should normally

be at least 800mm above floor level, unless there is a barrier to prevent falls.

Manifestation, preferably in etched glass, to be used wherever there is a risk of collision of persons

or where modesty may be compromised. For example, floor-to-ceiling external windows or glass

balconies could potentially pose a threat to the dignity of someone wearing a skirt or shorts.

The function of the room is to be considered at the design stage to facilitate the appropriate level of

privacy. Permanent obscured glazing should be used rather that retrofitted films.

Daylight glare to be controllable by blinds.

5.7.4.1 Large glazed panels

Glazed panels should be sized to allow replacement to be undertaken using simple manual handling

techniques with simple mechanical lifting aids. The need for the use of cranes, even ‘spider’ mini-

cranes, to replace panels should be avoided wherever possible. If a designer believes (on balancing

the competing design considerations) large panels are the best design solution, it must be discussed

with the Principal Designer and recorded in the ‘design risk register’. The access and maintenance

strategy should also detail how this operation would be carried out.

5.7.5 External Doors

Robust external doors will be provided to all entrances and means of escape positions. Additional

doors will be required to plant rooms and refuse areas. Typically, main entrances will be double

doors, fully glazed, automated (operated by sensors and push button controls) and have level access

wherever possible. Buttons must be in close proximity to the doors.

Doors on a maintenance route must be wide and high enough to accommodate any necessary mobile

plant which has been considered necessary for subsequent maintenance activities.

Access control, currently card reader system, to be fitted to enable doors to be secured as and when

needed, such as out of hours. Chapter 3 explains the UWE security strategy and please refer to the

separate Chapter 8 details the IT infrastructure needed to support the strategy.



Fittings and ironmongery are to be of a high quality, robust stainless steel. Lock cylinders to be euro-

profile on UWE Kaba master Suite.

PVCU external doors must be avoided. Where doors are fully glazed, the door is to have a mid rail to

resist twisting and reduce subsequent re-glazing costs. The rail at the door head is to have a minimum

depth of 150mm.

Doors must not have ‘lips’: They create a barrier to wheelchairs, trolleys etc. and can be a trip hazard.

The factory applied colour to steel or aluminium doors is to be resistant to fading, this particularly

applies to the UWE red.

5.7.6 External Finishes

5.7.6.1 Cladding

Cladding to be lightweight with high thermal performance and good aesthetic appearance. The chosen

finish should mitigate solar gain and consideration should be given to the careful use of colours.

The cladding system is to be integral with the glazing system with a minimum 40 year lifespan. The

system is to be suitable for exposed conditions with stainless steel fixings.

Silicon is only to be used as a secondary, and never the primary, form of sealant.

UWE has trialled and pioneered the use of pre-fabricated straw bales into R Block 2. Amongst other

benefits, it is a highly insulating product and this approach should be considered in future designs.

In order to facilitate construction and replacement, cladding panels must be in unit sizes to allow easy

handling using readily available plant/equipment and trade skills. The need for a crane during

subsequent replacement of any parts should be avoided wherever possible. If a designer believes

(on balancing the competing design considerations) large panels are the best design solution, it must

be discussed with the Principal Designer and recorded in the ‘design risk register’. The methodology

must be included in the access and maintenance strategy within the health and safety file.

The design of the system should consider independent removal of individual panels to allow for

maintenance and replacement of damage and insertion of additional openings for new windows etc.,

or to allow working access for future refurbishments of upper floors.

If may be foreseeable that during the life of the building, high level access will be required on the

external façade of a clad building. An access and maintenance strategy and design risk evaluation

(contained within the ‘design risk register’) should confirm what access is required and what access

equipment is to be used, particularly if it is not possible to tie in.



If timber cladding is to be used, designers must consider the flammability of the cladding and ensure designs and specifications (e.g. off-site impregnated treatment (not coating which discolours timber and requires re-coating)) limit the risk or extent of loss due to fire. BS9999 offers some further information about the management of the fire risk posed by timber cladding.

5.7.6.2 Curtain Walling

Curtain walling to be of good aesthetic appearance with passive measures to reduce solar gain if

necessary (such as brise soleil, overhangs) and specialist glazing. Transoms and mullions to give clear

sight lines and be integral to system used.

The design should comply with the recommendations of the Centre for Window and Cladding

Technology (CWCT) ‘Standard for systemised building envelopes.’ with particular regard to;

• Internal and external environment

• Air permeability

• Thermal performance

• Access and safety

• Design life

5.7.6.3 Render

Render to be to current British Standards and be fully bonded to substrate with a good appearance

and colours to be sympathetic to surroundings. The render is to be self-coloured. The surface is not

to attract dirt and debris and is to be easily cleanable with low pressure water.

Detailing of adjacent cills, capping, flashings etc., to prevent moisture penetration. Roof overhangs

to be of sufficient dimensions to avoid “drip” staining.

Where external wall insulation is to be utilised the protective render is to be self-coloured, sufficiently

robust to resist light impact damage and when damage has occurred, easily repaired without the

need for specialist equipment or expertise. In the long term, the system should allow over painting.

5.7.7 Rainwater Goods

UWE prefers the use of cast aluminium or iron rainwater goods. If, on balancing different design

considerations, plastic is preferred, high density polyethylene (HDPE) is preferred over PVC.

http://www.cwct.co.uk/specification/home.htm



5.8 Internal Finishes

5.8.1 General Provision

• Robust durable finishes appropriate to each functional space.

• For renovation projects, consider the building’s character and existing finishes. All material

patches should blend as closely as possible. Some buildings on campus have an existing palette

that must be matched. Coordinate with the UWE PM.

• All specified materials must demonstrate suitability for use in an institutional setting, with similar

regularity of cleaning and maintenance.

• Colour-through homogeneous materials are preferred.

• Avoid material(s) that require routine sealing or significant specialized maintenance.

• O&M documents must clearly identify and note all finishes, including extent of coverage.

• Stencil fire rating above ceiling at all fire-rated walls, in 150mm high letters at 6m centers.

• All finishes must complete curing & drying (off-gassing) prior to Substantial Completion

5.8.2 Internal Walls & Doors

Internal walls shall be designed and constructed so they provide a secure and stable partition between

areas and spaces throughout the campus. The type and nature of any internal wall will have to be

discussed and agreed by UWE Estates prior to construction, and this will be based on the general

location, use of the room / area and the possible need for future flexibility.

Where block work is to be used, blocks should not weigh more than 20kg to reduce manual handling

risks during construction or subsequent alterations. A risk evaluation (contained within the ‘design

risk register’) is required if a designer wishes to specify blocks in excess of this weight.

Consideration to be given when constructing new stud partitions to incorporate additional support

battens for the UWE Toprail support system (or radiators etc.). When constructing corridor walls, fire

resistance, durability, robustness and good sound resistance is essential. If masonry corridor walls

cannot be provided (it is the UWE preference that corridor walls are masonry), 9.5 mm plywood can

be included behind the plasterboard to provide added resistance against penetration damage.

Internal doors will be provided to provide safe and effective access through all internal spaces and

escape routes. Doors and ironmongery are to comply with all current Building Regulations, Approved

Document part M and BS 8300.

Where doors form part of fire compartment they should fully comply with the requirements of BS9999

and provide equal protection to the surrounding walls. Corridor and main circulation doors to have

hold open devices linked to and released on fire alarm activation.

Doors must not have ‘lips’: They create a barrier to wheelchairs, trolleys etc. and can be a trip hazard.



Timber doors are to be self-finished to negate the need for subsequent redecorating. The head rail is

to have a minimum depth of 150mm.

Fittings & ironmongery are to be of a high quality finish, robust stainless steel. Locks to be of a

suitable profile to fit UWE Kaba 20 cylinders.

Where doors (or gates/shutters etc.) are powered they must ‘fail safe’. The electrical design guide

provides details of the required interface with the fire alarm system.

Fire doors in corridors and circulation spaces are to be held open with magnetic hold back devices

which release automatically when the fire alarm is activated. If doors need to be closed, a powered

door is the preferred solution. If this is not practicable then low resistance closers should be utilised.

UWE is willing to trial free-swing door closure devices following an evaluation of cost/risk vs benefits.

All fire doors and frames are to be manufactured and installed as a single unit and appropriately

certified before hand over.

If half-height internal walls are used (typically used to demark zones or functional areas in robotic or

engineering buildings), they should either be short enough that someone in a wheelchair can look

over or vision panels etc. should be positioned at appropriate points.

5.8.2.1 Physical Locks

Physical key locks are used across UWE. UWE deploy a system of suited locks in order to manage

and maintain suitable access. Any locks being installed must be agreed with the Security Systems

Team to ensure the correct suite is being used. See the Chapter on IT infrastructure for information

about door access control.

Physical locks are to be installed, as a minimum, on the following doors:

All external doors including those with access control

All internal perimeter doors including those with access control which mark the perimeter of a

Faculty/Service area, e.g. HAS internal perimeter doors

Offices

Cleaners’ cupboards

Lecture Theatres

Plant rooms

Comms rooms

Workshops

Laboratories

High risk rooms including those with access control

Other rooms as discussed and agreed with occupying clients and dependant on site specific use



5.8.3 Plasterboard

• Plasterboard must not be used on ceilings without UWE’s express permission (as it has historically

concealed pipework etc.)

• If it is permitted, adequate access provisions shall be made.

• Where pipes and cables are boxed in access must be provided.

• Plasterboard should meet WRAP requirement for recycled content.

• Plasterboard wall linings are not deemed suitable for high trafficked locations (i.e corridors),

communal areas (i.e. social spaces) or student accommodation. Plasterboard wall linings should

be assessed for suitability, but restricted to teaching, learning or office areas, unless otherwise

authorized by UWE Estates.

• Consideration should be made for ply-backed detailing or alternatively the use of wall-board.

• Wet areas and/or tile backer board:

Use cement backer board for tile.

Paper-faced moisture resistant gypsum board panels are not permitted.

5.8.4 Tiles

5.8.4.1 Floor Tiles

Cross-fall finished floor to floor drains.

Maintain adequate substrate to prevent lifting of tiles due to thermal dynamic movement of hidden

services.

Glazed or polished tiles are prohibited.

5.8.4.2 Wall Tiles

Colour contrasts to comply with BS 8300 (see visual contrast, elsewhere).

Ceramic floor and wall tiles should not be used in wet areas (including kitchens, laundries and

academic areas requiring high levels of hygiene). Instead, UWE prefers the use of vinyl safety

flooring and flexible vinyl systems. The solution can also include a vinyl ceiling finish (see below).

5.8.5 Suspended Ceilings

Ceilings should be designed to be easily accessible for maintenance and other access

requirements, such as future technology installations. The depth of void must be adequate to

accommodate integrated light fittings and the layout of the grid must align with M&E design.

Ceilings within a wet, humid or hygienic environment including areas that require regular cleaning

will have a product selected to suit the conditions. This can include interlocking vinyl planks.

Tile size (unless planks) generally will be 600 x 600 with painted perimeter shadow batten.



5.8.5.1 Voids created by suspended ceilings

The void created by a suspended ceiling should be 600mm minimum deep under flat structural soffits

in order to accommodate services. This distance can be reduced depending on the nature of services

with the void: Mechanical and electrical designs must be co-ordinated with the fabric/structural

design to inform these decisions.

5.8.6 Flooring

• Approved flooring systems and products for specific locations and uses are provided in the UWE’s

Standard B&CE Specification.

• In general, flooring (both internal and external) shall be non-slip (even when wet).

• Flooring must comply with general provisions in BS8300.

• Flooring shall not “turn up” the wall more than 150mm without a colour change.

• Building entrance: Primary & secondary walk off barrier matting with metal trim as applicable.

• Lift floors: Rubber tiles, classified under EN 685 for heavy use (standards 23,32 and 41).

• Wet laboratories: Use chemical resistant flooring (also see comments in ‘specialist areas’, below).

• Stair Treads & Risers: Colour contrasts to comply with current guidance.

5.8.6.1 Specialist areas

Due to the diverse range of activities undertaken at UWE, there will inevitably be circumstances when

standard flooring solutions are inappropriate. Examples: In one workshop there was the potential

for freshly welded metal or droplets of molten metal to come into contact with the floor. Potentially,

some substances may be handled which require or prohibit the use of very specific floor finishes.

Following the UWE project processes will help the team to arrive at a considered and suitable solution:

The project brief will establish anticipated teaching activities. The implications for design and

specification must be established through discussion (e.g. the weight, temperature or physio-

chemical properties of materials or substances etc. that may come into contact with the floor).

Flooring solutions should be identified that meet the demands/constraints.

Technical data and samples of bespoke products should be obtained and discussed with the client

and cleaning services. The faculty may need to adopt specific management arrange-ments for

the floor, leading to changes in risk assessments or standard operating procedures.

Potentially, there may be a mixture of bespoke floor finishes through a technical area. The

reasoning behind the various selections may be lost over time and eventually activities may

change, meaning that the chosen floor surfaces become inappropriate. Handover documentation

should explain why the various, bespoke floor surfaces were chosen. This might be conveyed in

a simple, annotated plan included in the O&M information.

The HSE slip assessment tool (http://www.hse.gov.uk/slips/sat/index.htm) should be used if there is

doubt about the ability of a bespoke product to reasonably prevent slips and provides information

that can help influence cleaning regimes or faculty operating procedures.

http://www.hse.gov.uk/slips/sat/index.htm



5.8.6.2 Raised floors

No raised floors at UWE must be classified as light under the MOB PF2 PS standard (or BSEN 12825

Class 1 and 2). The majority of office and teaching spaces will be MOB PF2 PS medium standard (or

BSEN 12825 Class 3 and above). Circulation spaces may need to be MOB PF2 PS heavy standard (or

raised floors may be inappropriate) depending on the anticipated loads. See ‘imposed loads and

performance’ earlier. Any raised floor should be a minimum distance of 250mm from floor finish to

structural floor to allow for services.

5.8.6.3 Prohibited flooring materials

Specialty flooring: bamboo, cork and laminate.

Wood flooring, except at gymnasiums and certain other specialized functions.

Masonry flooring: Not permitted if it has significant fill and/or requires routine sealing or significant

specialized maintenance.

5.8.6.4 Carpeting

For offices, circulation spaces and lecture rooms carpet tiles is the preferred option. Details are

provided in the Standard Specification.

Any existing carpeting removed for renovation must

be recycled where possible. Justification must be

provided for non-compliance.

Construction; Solution dyed, bleach proof nylon

construction. The use of polypropylene pile carpet is

to be avoided.

Minimum manufacturer’s warranty for wear, edge

ravel, tuft bind, delamination and static control:

o Barrier matting: 5 years

o Offices, teaching rooms and other areas: 10

years.

UWE wishes to avoid staining around drinking

fountains due to leaks and spills (as shown to the

right). The choice of fountain and selection of floor

covering should limit these unsightly stains.



5.8.7 Painting

• Manufacturers, products and colour ranges are to be restricted to the palate given in the UWE’s

Standard B&CE Specification.

• The UWE will consider the use of water based undercoat and gloss finishes where appropriate.

5.8.7.1 Teaching Walls

In teaching spaces, teaching walls (i.e. the walls on which images will be projected etc.) must be

00NN 16/000 – Grey. This helps to accentuate the screen and is of great benefit to students with

certain cognitive and visual impairments.

5.8.8 Vision Access/visual contrasts

The need for contrasting colours between floors and walls and doors; stair treads and risers;

doors and handles; walls with switches/sockets etc. is well established.

While the UWE standard specifications support effective contrast, it is incumbent on designers

to review colour contrast of adjoining materials and seek advice if in doubt.

Busy, highly patterned surfaces to be avoided.

Columns can be at risk of ‘blending in’ to the background and may need manifestations to ensure

they are visually distinct.

5.8.9 Acoustics

Provide appropriate acoustic absorbing surfaces to teaching and meeting spaces and in particular

to reception, refectory, assembly and sports/leisure areas where there are hard surfaces and

reverberation.

Ensure adequate sound resistance of structure to ensure acoustic separation, particularly between

teaching spaces, interview rooms, residential accommodation and performance areas.

5.8.10 Fixtures and Fittings

UWE buildings will require ‘Toprail’ flexible wall furniture system in teaching rooms, offices and

specific corridor locations (to solid or suitably reinforced stud partition walls only).

Notice boards located within corridors or escape routes are to be enclosed.

Specialist fixtures and fittings for science laboratories, computer laboratories, engineering

workshops etc. will be specified separately according to building/room use. However, designers

are invited to bring their expertise forward and suggest solutions.



5.9 Provision for storage, deliveries and movement of materials

Through consultation with stakeholders, design teams must establish the storage and delivery

requirements. Lack of storage is a frequent source of frustration. Different faculties and services

have different requirements. In some cases, storage (e.g. for hazardous substances) must be secure

and have a range of other controls and precautions (e.g. alarms, general or forced ventilation etc.).

In relation to deliveries, the access and maintenance strategy should set out where and how materials

will be delivered to the building. Design teams will need to consider:

Catering supplies

Teaching materials

Stationary supplies and office equipment (including desks and photocopiers)

Materials required for routine maintenance and life cycle redecoration/refurbishment

Such considerations are likely to inform the size of lifts and specification of doors (such as double leaf

or leaf-and-a-half) especially into plant areas, on main access routes etc.

5.10 Catering design

An attractive, varied and efficient catering experience supports many of UWE’s overarching priorities,

as set out in Strategy 2020 and other strategic policies. Specifically, it promotes (amongst other

things):

Positive student experience

Wellbeing of staff and students

Inclusivity by meeting varying dietary needs and requirements

Value for money (e.g. through more efficient services or by designing catering facilities that can

be changed to respond quickly and cheaply to changing food trends)

Hospitality and catering are one of Estate’s key stakeholders (as described earlier in this design guide).

It is critical that they are engaged early enough to have a meaningful input into design. They should

therefore be involved by at least the start of RIBA stage 3 (developed design).

In practice, catering and hospitality will be taking a brief from their own stakeholders, using this to

assess catering needs for the new or refurbished space, ensuring this fits into the overarching catering

strategy for the campus then preparing more detailed specifications for the design team.

The project brief (and budget) should clarify who is responsible for providing plates, cutlery, trays,

cooking utensils etc.



5.10.1 Lessons learned

There are numerous examples of designs which have not met the needs of Catering and Hospitality.

They typically occur because catering and hospitality are not consulted early enough or because the

principles in this design guide are not followed. Examples include:

Imposing limited space, which cannot accommodate the equipment or activities which catering

services require to provide the services required by the end users.

Not installing water supplies, drainage and/or extraction which prevents a catering facility

being upgraded to meet changing requirements

Inadequate power supplies, equipment needs are compromised by an insufficient power grid.

Expansion proves very expensive to provide retrospectively.

Improper brief, unclear final outcome leads to a project failing to meet stakeholders’

requirements or last minute fixes that add expense or do not provide the required service.

5.10.2 Production Kitchens

This section of the design guide relates to deli/café/bar and vending operations. While many of the

general principles in this section will hold true for production kitchens (e.g. the need for adequate

storage), production kitchens are significantly larger, complex, busy spaces with a diverse array of

catering equipment and activities.

Much more detailed analysis will be required to determine what represents ‘adequate’ storage or

washing facilities, for example. There is a need for very high standards of co-ordination between

mechanical and electrical services, incorporation of numerous safety devices (e.g. emergency cut off

devices) and liaison with other UWE stakeholders (e.g. the UWE Fire Advisor).

In practice, Catering and Hospitality will need to be involved at the concept design stage.

It should be noted that kitchens should be capable of accommodating duplicated appliances to cater

for specific dietary requirements.

http://www.google.co.uk/url?sa=i&rct=j&q=&esrc=s&source=images&cd=&cad=rja&uact=8&ved=0ahUKEwjYoovt4r7PAhVCsxQKHY2yD8UQjRwIBw&url=http://www.targetcatering.co.uk/commercial-kitchen-design&bvm=bv.134495766,d.d24&psig=AFQjCNHqxk_qbRNZN_9f36R5yB9RTOgPsw&ust=1475588810493056



5.10.3 Deli/Café/Bar Style Operation

The guideline will enable the main aspects of design to be considered in developing a brief for the

design of the style of catering operation.

Considerations will be given to:-

Design

General layout and room specifications

Service Style

Mechanical and Electrical to include IT and phone lines

General Service Requirements

Finishes

5.10.3.1 Design

The design of modern retail Deli/Cafe catering outlet should only be undertaken by a specialist

catering Design Company with experience in delivering a “Turnkey” package.

A detailed brief can be provided by the client utilising this guideline as starting point.

This process ensures that the design is Client-based with a full understanding of the commercial

aspects and technical issues demanded from the proposed outlet.

The Outlets should be so designed to create a modern bright space with the emphasis on a de-skilled

or semi-skilled food production, and able to offer a range of quality light meals, snacks, sandwiches

and beverages. Consideration to design if location to be licensed for the sale of alcohol.



5.10.3.2 General Layout and Room Specifications

The operation will ideally be a self-sufficient unit but could be partly supplied via a larger local central

catering operation.

Stores for storage of back up stock would be required as will modular refrigeration & freezer units.

Ventilated dry storage should be provided with adequate shelving space for holding stock equivalent

to 30 days.

Modular cold storage units would ideally be divided into three areas, High risk storage, low risk storage

and freezer storage. This facilitates the implementation of the food handling elements of the food

safety act.

Depending on style an area would also be required for the Chef Manager to receive goods and to

conduct cashing up. This would normally be sited close to the entry point for goods.

There will only be a limited use of crockery with disposables being used in the main. A dishwasher

system however maybe required for the washing of crockery and utensils and this should be sited

within an area away from food preparation areas.

This operation will produce waste and therefore, consideration should be given to separating food

waste from waste that can be recycled.

Waste areas should be identified as under counter and external recyclable waste bins. External

enclosed bin areas should be considered within the design or have a holding facility away from food

preparation areas whereby waste can be stored prior to being taken to main waste storage areas.

A separate lockable COSHH cupboard with shelving and Belfast bucket sinks should be provided for

cleaning and chemicals.

5.10.3.3 Kitchen Design

The operation is dependent upon a minimum of food being prepared on site and therefore the space

required is relevant to the operation. However, sufficient space should be given to produce food in a

safe and organised manner maintaining separate areas for high and low risk food preparation.

The operation should allow raw and cooked foods to be prepared in separate areas, having dedicated

refrigeration, sinks and prep benches for those areas.

Cooking equipment should be adequate for use, with the extra ability to meet demands for increased

business. Low intensity food production methods are advised for Deli/Cafe/Bar style food operation

refrigeration and oven and frying equipment to be selected for purpose of design. Extraction fan to

be fit for purpose of selected equipment.



A balance of equipment power requirements should be achieved with a view to having a mix of gas

and electrical cooking equipment. Additional electrical power to be available for any future additional

equipment needed.

Separate sinks are required for food use and cleaning use. Adequate hand wash sinks are required.

Sinks to be accessible to users with reduced dexterity.

The catering environment to be temperature controlled with adequate fresh air make up and if

feasible adequate natural light.

All finishes within the service area should be of an impervious nature and cleanable with the ability

to be regularly sanitized.

The position of pest control measures will need to be discussed/agreed with the current contractor

and considered in the design.

The potential need for duplicated appliances to cater for specific dietary requirements must be

established early on: This will have significant implications for space requirements, as well as

services.

5.10.3.4 Service Style

Operation is relatively low skilled with the emphasis being placed upon low intensity food production.

The main service counter would be approximately 6 metres in length with a back counter around the

same. Again this would depend on location and space available.

Space should be given to chilled ambient, hot, option and retail space for grab and go.

The design elements of the flow of customers should be considered to reduce dwell time and queuing

issues. This may affect the type of coffee machines utilised which could be self-service, barista style

or bean to cup.

Consideration should be given to the careful management of staffing levels required to operate the

food service points. Staff should be able to migrate between counters during quieter periods. Staff

should be adequately trained in all areas of food production and service.

The food service counters should include:

Limited hot section Chilled Deli and salad section Hot Snacks

Grab and go, with easy access to tills for speed of service to include-cold drinks sandwiches

and boxed salads etc.

Quality coffee and hot beverage offer on back or front counter



Each area of the counter outlet will serve and display from either hot (dry heated solid tops)

or cold (chilled self-selection and served) units. This could be of a mobile nature for use

elsewhere or fixed as part of the shop fitting.

Space on the counter and their approaches should provide for the merchandising of trading

up items. Each outlet will require power and data connections to operate POS systems and

widescreen confirmation of service times and menu offerings

Easy access or dispense of free drinking water to be available in all food service outlets

5.10.3.5 Finishes

Consideration should be taken in applying the selection of kitchen finishes in order to ensure

compliance with health and safety and the food safety act.

Ceramic floor and wall tiles are not permitted.

Ceiling finishes should have a plastic faced cleanable tile on a white corrosion resistant grid.

A 600mm2 grid is advisable. Light fittings should be enclosed vapour proof fittings with

diffusers fitted in to the ceiling grid.

Floors should be anti-slip vinyl or quartz screed with 120-150mm coved edges.

Wall finishes should be of a cleanable and impervious nature vinyl sheeting with an integral

biocide is advised.

Doors should be manufactured with cleanable laminate surfaces.

All paint surfaces should be either low VOC Matt or eggshell.

Food server counters should be manufactured in stainless steel with decorative polymer

counter tops or granite, and have decorative laminates to the front facing elevations. Any

joins to be finished in impervious materials that are suitable for the area.

Impulse space should be designed in to the counter along with an element of retail.

Back counters should be manufactured in stainless steel with stainless steel work surfaces.

5.10.3.6 Seating area

Social spaces should have a variety of seating which would suit the varied dining styles offered.

The mix of seating ideally would include fixed seating, breakfast bars and soft seating areas.

The colour scheme should be so designed as to create a bright and airy environment with the

use of neutral tones accented with stronger feature colours.

Flooring to be cleanable and possibly include some carpeted areas where soft seating is

present.

The use of audio visual facilities should be utilised within the space for information purposes,

therefore data cables would be required in those areas.

As discussed elsewhere, small power should be supplied.

More generally, the seating area can be used as a social or breakout areas and may need to

accommodate televisions, marketing screens etc. These requirements will be established in

the initial brief and may necessitate the provision of power, data etc. which should be allowed

for within the project and co-ordinated into the overall design.



5.10.4 Vending Operation

5.10.4.1 General

The intention of this guideline is to seek to provide a modern efficient Vending Service.

This guideline will enable the main aspects of design to be considered in developing a brief for the

design of a Vending Operation.

Vending can be used to capture sales in areas of significant footfall or designed to provide an

additional out of hour’s service to back up retail catering operations.

It can be used to provide a service in remotely located areas away from the main Catering operations.

Vending machines have changed significantly in recent years and can be used to supply a range of

hot and cold food and drinks. There may need to be mains water, small power and potentially

drainage. Consideration will therefore need to be given to -

Mechanical and Electrical requirements

Design

General Service Requirements

5.10.4.2 Design

The design of a retail Vending Operation should only be undertaken by a specialist in Supplying

Vending or a catering design company with experience in delivering such a service.

A detailed brief can be provided by the client utilising this guideline as basis on which to commence

the design process.

This process ensures that the design is client based with a full understanding of the commercial

aspects and technical issues demanded from the proposed outlet. The Outlets should be so designed

to create a discreet vending operation which is carefully sited and fits well within a given social space.

A Vending operation will require the use of a remote storage facility sufficiently large enough to hold

back up stock particularly where the supply of chilled drinks are required through vending. Space is

also required for storage of hot beverage product and drinks cups.

It may be that chilled back up space is required where sandwich and chilled snack are held in

situations where the vending machines are stocked more than once per day.

The stores should be adequately lit and well ventilated. Dry storage should be provided with adequate

space for holding stock equivalent to 3-5 days.

All stock is subject to the requirements of the Food Safety Act.



Vending produces waste and therefore, consideration should be given the provision of separating wet

waste from waste that can be recycled. To this effect consider the use of waste and recycling units

adjacent to the vending area. As mentioned above, drainage may need to be considered.

5.10.4.3 General Service Requirements

The University Health and Safety Advisor should be consulted at an early stage of the design process

to ensure that the vending is not sited so to cause any restriction or hazard in public spaces and will

satisfy statutory regulations.

Social spaces may be adjacent to the vending and consideration should be given to a variety of

seating which would suit the operation.

Vending is often best placed within a shop fitted housing which can be designed and built to

complement the local scheme.

Consider the use of anti-slip flooring to the area immediately in front of the vending machines due to

the potential slip hazard created by spillage.

5.10.5 Tea Points

Tea points are required within large office areas and will be a minimum area of 4m2 and will consist

of Vinyl flooring, overhead and under counter storage, sink, fridge dishwasher and fridge.


Chapter 6: Mechanical Engineering Design


C h a p t e r 6 | M e c h a n i c a l E n g i n e e r i n g D e s i g n I s s u e 1 . 3 P a g e | 2

Table of Contents 6.1 General Mechanical Design Principles ............................................................................ 3

6.2 Management of Mechanical Design ............................................................................... 4

6.2.1 Initial Survey and review of existing asset information ............................................. 4

6.2.2 Design Co-ordination ............................................................................................. 4

6.2.3 Initial Load Assessment ......................................................................................... 4

6.2.4 Plant, System Selection and Location ...................................................................... 4

6.2.5 Statutory Guidance and Practice Recommendations ................................................. 5

6.3 Stage Gate Approvals (RIBA Stages 2-6 2013) ............................................................... 5

6.4 Schedule of Statutory Notifiable Plant: .......................................................................... 6

6.5 Commissioning: Mechanical .......................................................................................... 6

6.6 General Principles Governing the HVAC strategy ............................................................ 6

6.7 Pumped Water and Air Circuits ..................................................................................... 8

6.8 Acoustics .................................................................................................................... 9

6.9 Metering ..................................................................................................................... 9

6.9.1 Heat Meters ....................................................................................................... 10

6.9.2 Electric meters.................................................................................................... 10

6.9.3 Gas and Water meters ........................................................................................ 10

6.10 Disposal Systems ...................................................................................................... 11

6.11 Laboratory/Industrial Waste Drainage ......................................................................... 11

6.12 Pumping of Drainage ................................................................................................. 11

6.13 Piped Supply Systems ................................................................................................ 12

6.14 Heating Pipework ...................................................................................................... 12

6.15 Hot & Cold Water Services ......................................................................................... 13

6.15.1 General .............................................................................................................. 13

6.15.2 Hot Water Service ............................................................................................... 14

6.15.3 Sustainable designs ............................................................................................ 15

6.16 Natural Gas............................................................................................................... 15

6.17 Medical/laboratory gas ............................................................................................... 16

6.18 Refrigerant Pipework ................................................................................................. 16

6.19 Mechanical Heating/Cooling/ Refrigeration Systems ...................................................... 17

6.19.1 General Temperature Performance Requirements .................................................. 17

6.19.2 Heating .............................................................................................................. 17

6.19.3 Cooling .............................................................................................................. 18

6.20 Ventilation/Air Conditioning Systems ........................................................................... 20

6.20.1 Mechanical Ventilation ......................................................................................... 20

6.20.2 Fire Strategy ...................................................................................................... 21

6.21 Central control/building management system............................................................... 21

6.22 Approved Mechanical Suppliers ................................................................................... 23

6.23 Approved Mechanical Contractors ............................................................................... 23



6.1 General Mechanical Design Principles

Designers must read Chapters 1, 2 and 3 of this Design Guide, as well as this Chapter, before

commencing any mechanical design work.

This chapter provides designers with an insight into what should be taken into account when

preparing their designs and the issues that should be considered to ensure that a building services

installation can be practically installed, efficiently maintained and will meet the client’s written and

implied aspirations for the short-, medium- and long-term.

This chapter sets out the minimum standards of engineering services to be applied throughout the

estate, they are not intended to stifle innovation or technical advances.

It is the wish of the Estates department to adopt low carbon principles within its design. A

fundamental requirement is therefore to design out any avoidable energy requirements. Demand

reduction takes priority over covering energy requirements through low carbon or renewable

sources. The design should apply the principles of Low Carbon Design:-

Understand energy use in the building type

Use the form & fabric of the building to minimise energy demand

Focus on insulation and air tightness

Use high efficiency building services with low carbon fuel

Manage energy within the building

Use renewable energy systems

The Building Services design should follow the principles of the energy efficiency hierarchy:-

Reduce demand by using passive measures

Use energy efficient equipment and controls

Use low carbon and renewable technologies

The Building Services design should consider implications of a changing climate as detailed in

Chapter 2 of this Design Guide. UWE use their buildings throughout the year and therefore all

buildings shall be thermally modelled as being occupied during the summer months.

The building services design should comply as a minimum with any local building planning

conditions, but this should not be considered as the design standard, but improved upon where

possible to meet both the University’s energy performance and carbon targets.



6.2 Management of Mechanical Design

Chapters 1 and 2 of this guide states that all designers must consult with a range of stakeholders

including end-users and the Facilities department, during design development. This may be in the

form of structured liaison meetings organised by the internal or external project manager.

Mechanical designers, depending on their exact discipline and the nature of the project, will need to

take the following actions:

6.2.1 Initial Survey and review of existing asset information

Survey existing services and ascertain the implications of any new works. A condition survey

may be required for works within existing areas. The designer is responsible for checking the

suitability of all existing water supplies, drainage capacity etc. at project inception.

Consideration and review of case studies and technical papers of similar applications.

Consider budgetary and energy conservation requirements.

6.2.2 Design Co-ordination

Analysis of the building’s façade in conjunction with the building designer and structural

engineer to assess thermal performance and ultimately to increase energy efficiency.

Liaise with all members of the design team including the building designer and structural

engineer to provide an integrated building/ structural / services installation. This must include

coordination of mechanical builders work requirements, plant space and significant apertures

within the structure.

Coordination is also required with the electrical services designer regarding the power and

control requirements for the mechanical services.

External Shading should be considered in conjunction with the building designer to consider the

full implications including minimising the effects of unwanted heat gain to occupied space. This

should be done from building conception.

6.2.3 Initial Load Assessment

This is required for early assessment of the plant space requirements for co-ordination with the

building designer.

BSRIA documents and Institutes/CIBSE rules of thumb can be used as a check.

6.2.4 Plant, System Selection and Location

Selected to maximize operational efficiency and availability.

To suit ambient conditions (thermal & noise) during all seasons.

Continuity with existing plant and manufacturers where appropriate.

Consideration of maintainability and the minimisation of impact within occupied spaces



Consideration and review of case studies and technical papers of similar application.

Consideration of plant operation at part load should be made, with the use of fully modulating

plant preferred where considered economic.

The University prefers major plant such as chillers to be located at Ground Level. If this does

not appear achievable approval will be required from the UWE Estates Team. See the section

on maintenance access in Chapter 2 of this guide for further information.

6.2.5 Statutory Guidance and Practice Recommendations

The Building Services design is to follow best practice recommendation, which includes, but is not

limited to:

Bristol Water Regulations.

UWE Standard Mechanical Specifications.

Building Services Research & Information Association (BSRIA) Publications

Chartered Institution of Building Services Engineers (CIBSE) Guides & Technical Memoranda;

Institute of Plumbing (IoP) Standards; and

Heating & Ventilating Contractor’s Association (HVCA) DW series documentation.

The designer shall inform and advise UWE of any conflict between the above, and seek UWE

approval of proposed resolution.

6.3 Stage Gate Approvals (RIBA Stages 2-6 2013)

On major capital projects (nominally any project over £2.5m), UWE will adopt BSRIA BG6 Design

Framework for Building Services to manage the allocation of design responsibilities. At the

discretion of the UWE Project Manager, BG6 shall be applied to projects of lower value (especially

where there is a heavy emphasis on building services).

BG6 contains a number of pro-forma templates to be used at different RIBA stages. Due to the

fact that UWE is an informed client, most of the pro-forma 1 activities have been or will be carried

out in-house by UWE (e.g. obtaining and providing existing building information) and other project

processes are in place to ensure this is done.

Therefore, design teams will only be required to use pro-forma 2 onwards contained in BG6.



6.4 Schedule of Statutory Notifiable Plant:

The mechanical designer must consider the statutory requirements for all of the following

installations and advise the Facilities CA\Engineer of their project implications via the reporting

process detailed within the appendices of this design guide:-

• Legionella Risk Assessment, schedule of legionella susceptible plant. • Bristol Water, notifications. • Refrigerant plant. • Boilers • Pressure vessels and MPHW calorifiers (heating, CHW, refrigerant or CWS), schedule of

plant. • COSHH tests, schedule of plant.

Certificates for the factory pressure testing of boilers, calorifiers and other pressure vessels should

be specified at tender and provided at handover stage

6.5 Commissioning: Mechanical

The designer should ensure that systems are fully commissionable (and self-balancing where

economically viable).

Commissioning devices should be installed to manufacturer’s recommendations and accessible for

future use.

CIBSE commissioning codes, BREEAM and BSRIA guides should be adhered to.

10-15% of all values should be checked by the mechanical designer.

100% of all safety interlocks (and all fire dampers’ operation) should be witnessed by the designer.

6.6 General Principles Governing the HVAC strategy

The Building Services Consultant should:

• Note that UWE expects the maximum use possible of natural ventilation in all its buildings. • Ensure that the thermal mass of the building can be used to minimise summer overheating. • Evaluate the use of mixed-mode ventilation systems with heat recovery • Consider the use of external solar shading to minimise summer overheating



The following hierarchy shall be adopted for the avoidance of summertime overheating:

1. Natural Ventilation

2. Mechanical Ventilation

3. Mechanical Ventilation with phase change medium

4. Other passive cooling methods such as ground coupled ventilation

5. Forced Refrigerative (mechanical) cooling

The European Energy Performance of Buildings Directive Article 9, in conjunction with the UK

Building regulations Part L has imposed strict limits on forced cooling. Forced refrigerative cooling

shall only be considered once all other means of achieving the required conditions have been

exhausted, including passive cooling systems.

To avoid the need for cooling systems the following principles should be adopted as appropriate:

Heat releasing equipment should be sited in areas with openable windows, free natural

ventilation or naturally cool areas e.g. basements etc.

Heat releasing equipment should therefore be located close to external walls (or externally),

to facilitate natural cooling. The equipment should not be positioned where it could be

susceptible to solar gain.

A large population of heat releasing equipment should not be installed in a single area or in

areas where there are large occupancy levels.

Only the necessary quantity of machines/equipment should be installed.

Local extract ventilation systems used to remove heat from source wherever possible

In areas not mechanically cooled the Building Regulations Approved document L2 performance

standard for avoidance of summertime overheating for learning, teaching and office areas shall be

adopted. The performance standard shall be extended to include all internal building spaces which

will be utilised by staff and students e.g. corridors and stairwells. UWE use their buildings

throughout the year and therefore all buildings and all rooms shall be thermally modelled as being

occupied during the summer months.

The above refers to comfort cooling only. When the function of an area requires specific operating

conditions i.e. processes, specialist equipment, chemical storage etc. then such areas will be

assessed independently. If it is concluded that cooling or air conditioning is necessary then these

shall be in addition to Local Exhaust Ventilation systems.

When designing mechanical cooling for IT Comms rooms this needs to be selected with energy

efficiency in mind and consideration of PIR sensors with higher set back temperatures to save

energy when the rooms are not occupied.

Adequate double-sided cross-flow ventilation is difficult to achieve in buildings with widths

greater than about 15 metres, (offices 6 metres deep with openable windows on either side

of a central 3 metre corridor). Buildings which rely on natural ventilation can have high



summer ventilation rates with no energy penalty. Summer ventilation rates may need to be

ten times greater than those achieved in winter to avoid overheating. There is some evidence that

natural ventilated buildings can be “healthier” than some air-conditioned or mechanically ventilated

buildings.

Buildings can be designed to use a mechanical ventilation system with heat recovery during

the heating season, and natural ventilation from opening windows during summertime.

During the heating season, the windows should be locked shut or have interlocking controls to

avoid heating when the windows are open. This type of servicing arrangement is termed

‘mixed mode’ and recent data from the Building Services Research Establishment has shown that

office buildings with mixed-mode systems can use less energy than either continuously

mechanically ventilated or air-conditioned buildings.

Natural ventilation can be provided from windows, ventilation slots in window frames, solar driven

stack-effect or from purpose-made controllable through-wall systems. Thermal comfort may also be

influenced by the exposed thermal mass of the building: a lightweight building will respond rapidly

to changes in external conditions, whereas with a heavyweight structure a noticeable damping

effect on internal temperatures may occur. The use of suspended ceilings effectively removes the

thermal mass of the floor slab from the thermal response of the building, allowing more rapid

variations in temperature. Figures from the BRE suggest that for naturally ventilated offices with

internal blinds overheating can be reduced to 10 days per year or less. Where external blinds are

used, overheating would occur on average for only 3 days or less per year.

Re-use of low grade heat, such as heat rejection from chiller plant should be fully considered both

with respect to the building under design and/or buildings in the vicinity.

6.7 Pumped Water and Air Circuits

Water pumped circuits should have at least 100% standby (excluding HWS secondary, where a

spare pump shall be provided).

+10% to be added to all pump duties (head & flow) to make allowance for commissioning

tolerances.

In the first instance variable volume pumps/fans with static pressure control via the BMS should be

considered. This is also important when future expansion of the installation is envisaged.

Variable speed drives should utilised where possible and have differential pressure sensors rather

than switches.

Local visual indication via temperature and pressure gauges should be provided in addition to BMS

sensors (BMS sensors alone are insufficient).



6.8 Acoustics

Please also refer to the appendix addressing Acoustic performance requirements.

Noise from building services should not exceed the noise rating (NR) values listed below. This

includes noise from the normal operation of heating, ventilation and air conditioning plant. Higher

levels may be permissible during purge ventilation. When planning ventilation duct runs, they

should as far as possible avoid crossing partition walls, and where this is inevitable a crosstalk

silencer must be incorporated so that the sound insulation requirements listed in section 3.6 are

met.

Designs should aim to ensure that plantrooms operate at 78db or less. If sound pressure level is

between 79db-82db then a warning sign should be installed on the door stating that hearing

protection should be worn if individuals are in the room for more than half a day. In addition,

visual and auditory fire alarms should be installed. If sound pressure will exceed 82db then a

detailed risk evaluation is required to provide details of the required management strategy. Plant

rooms must not operate at 88db or above.

Type(s) of room Maximum NR Value

Academic staff and admin offices NR 35

Cafeterias, coffee bars etc NR 40

Class rooms, lecture rooms, seminar rooms and tutorial rooms Audio visual and video conference rooms Language laboratories

NR 30

Drama studios, music practice rooms NR 30

Entrance halls, corridors, stairwells, atria and circulation spaces NR 40

Halls and rooms for music drama and other live performances NR 30

Large lecture theatres and flagship conference rooms NR 30

Lecture theatres up to 100 seats NR 30

Library circulation and media storage areas NR 35

Library study areas NR 30

Recording studios NR 30

Rooms intended for clinical examination and treatment, confidential interviews, psychotherapy, speech therapy etc.

NR 35

Science laboratories, art and design studios, graphics workshops NR 30

Sports halls and gymnasia NR 35

Swimming pools NR 50

Workshops NR 35

6.9 Metering

Metering and sub metering of utilities shall be installed as per CIBSE guide TM39, Heat Network

Regulations (2014) and BREEAM requirements. For the sub-metering of mechanical systems (HVAC

and Mains Water Services), the following principles should be followed:

Major plant that consumes more than 10% of the building energy should be sub metered.



Sub metered per floor (particularly for water services).

Sub metering any lettable spaces e.g. leased spaces to shops or businesses within UWE.

Any cooling loads shall be metered separately.

Sub-metering shall be provided in accordance with the requirements of the Building Regulations

specifically “The Building Regulations 2000 part L Conservation of Fuel and Power”.

Metering of electricity supplying mechanical plant shall be installed to all distribution boards either

in the main switchboard or integrally in each distribution board.

Volumetric flow metering (i.e. for water, gas and heat services) should be specified to meet average

flows as there is risk that oversized meters do not provide useful profile data.

All new meters should have an output that is connected to the University Energy Team’s

Elcomponent metering system (see below for further clarification). All necessary equipment

required to ensure that each metering unit can be connected onto the Elcomponent system,

including data points, power supplies, pulse loggers etc. shall be provided as part of the project.

Allowance shall be made for modifying and/or extending the existing data collection system as

required ensuring that it is sufficiently sized to accommodate the additional metering units within

the building. All meters must be fully installed, commissioned and operational at handover.

6.9.1 Heat Meters

Elcomponent communicates with three types of heat meter via MODBUS, these are:

Kamstrup

Micronics

Sharkey

6.9.2 Electric meters

Use either:

Elcomponent’s own AEM33 meters (click ‘AEM33 meters’ to be directed to the Elcomponent

website). These are either multi-parameter or 3 channel meters.

Schneider meters with pulse output as a minimum.

The UWE engineer providing technical assurance, in conjunction with the UWE energy team, will

determine if a multi-parameter meter is necessary or whether pulse output is sufficient.

6.9.3 Gas and Water meters

Gas and water meters must have a pulse output.

http://www.elcomponent.co.uk/site/product/view-category/category-86/AEM33-96x96-3-Phase-Multiparameter-Meter.html



6.10 Disposal Systems

All drainage pipework must not be routed in locations (distribution boards, MCC’s etc.) where it is

possible a leak could cause a health and safety hazard.

HDPE or Stainless Steel shall be used for drainage.

6.11 Laboratory/Industrial Waste Drainage

Vulcathene pipework shall be used for chemical drainage including laboratories etc

In engineering/science all drain runs which will carry hazardous or radioactive substances, must be

labelled accordingly.

Waste traps/catch pots are to be labelled with appropriate warning signage and contained in locked

and labelled cupboards.

Please find a list of ‘prescribed substances’ as given by the UWE sewerage provider. These

substances cannot be put down the drain without notifying the sewerage provider, who then needs

to notify the Environment Agency:

Mercury and its compounds

Cadmium and its compounds

Gamma-hexachlorocyclohexane

Pentachlorophenol and its

compounds

DDT

Hexachlorobenzene

Hexachlorobutadiene

Aldrin

Dieldrin

Endrin

Carbon tetrachloride

Polychlorinated biphenyls

Dichlorvos

1,2-dichloroethane

Trichlorobenzene

Atrazine

Simazine

Tributyltin compounds

Triphenyltin compounds

Trifluralin

Fenitrothion

Azinphos-methyl

Malathion

Endosulfan

Trichloroethylene (above 30kg/year)

Perchloroethylene (above 30kg/year)

The use of prescribed substances shall be avoided where possible, where the use of a prescribed

product is proposed by a faculty the designer shall inform and review the full implications with the

design team and UWE faculties.

6.12 Pumping of Drainage

UWE only wishes to use gravity drainage. Sewage pumping, including of condensate, must be

avoided. If a pumped solution is deemed unavoidable then approval for its use must be obtained

from the UWE Estates Team (see management of derogations elsewhere). UWE will need detailed

justification and assurances that the system offers adequate reliability and resiliency (e.g. through

provision of back up pumps).



6.13 Piped Supply Systems

Distribution pipework should generally be to match the existing installation.

The use of plastic pipework is generally not accepted (excluding overflows and warning pipes etc.).

All water services pipework must not be routed in locations (close to distribution boards, MCC’s etc.)

where it is possible a leak could cause a health and safety hazard.

Low level copper pipework to radiators is prohibited without prior agreement with Estates

Adequate allowance for system expansion should be made in pipework design rather than use of

expansion bellows.

Services for open plan accommodations should be designed on a grid basis.

ALL new plant and pipework/ductwork jointing gaskets in existing buildings must be asbestos-free

with confirmation plastic tags (which extend beyond adjacent joints for ease of future

identification).

Unless identified as indicated above, ALL existing gaskets should be assumed to contain asbestos

until known otherwise. Therefore, if they are to be exposed or removed during the contract works

they must be treated as hazardous and dealt with in the appropriate manner.

6.14 Heating Pipework

All heating pipework up to and including 125mm shall be installed using mild steel pipes to BS1387,

heavy grade, black varnished finish.

All heating pipework 150mm and over shall be installed using carbon steel grade 430 pipes to

BS3601 ERW, dimensions to BS3600 table 1, standard mill protective coating finish.

All heating cold feed and open vent pipework, and safety valve or vent cock discharge pipes, shall

be installed using mild steel pipes to BS1387, heavy grade galvanised finish.

All pipework off air bottles or AAV's shall be copper to BS2871, part 1, table X or Y.

All black steel pipework up to and including 50mm shall have screwed joints to BS21 taper thread,

using hemp and jointing compound to BS5292.

All black steel pipework 65mm and over shall have welded joints or flanged joints throughout.

Joints shall not be permitted within any part of the building fabric.



Screwed fittings on black mild steel pipework, other than sockets, shall be malleable cast iron to

BS6681, having ends to BS143 or BS1256, black finish manufactured by Crane Ltd.

Screwed fittings on galvanised steel pipework, other than sockets, shall be as for black mild steel

pipework, but galvanised finish.

Fittings on welded pipework shall be carbon steel grade 430 seamless, to BS1965, part 1, heavy,

having bevelled ends, varnished finish.

Joints shall be provided as necessary to enable all pipework to be dismantled without cutting.

6.15 Hot & Cold Water Services

6.15.1 General

The designer is responsible for checking the suitability of all existing supplies at project inception. If

record information is not availability the designer shall either survey or request and provide a brief

for any surveys required. The designer if required shall contact the relevant statutory supplier to

establish suitability of supply capacity.

All water services shall be in accordance with the UWE Legionella Policy (specifically the UWE

Procedure on the Management and Control of Legionella).

A mains water service with no tanked supplies should be utilised wherever possible

If CWS storage is required it should have a minimum of two independent tanks (inter-connected in

a ‘fill’ and ‘draw’ configuration) to minimise down time during times of maintenance. However,

their capacity should be minimised.

Cold water outlets in kitchens, tea bays and vending areas should be mains fed.

Communal drinking water should be dispensed via proprietary refrigerated units with carbon filters,

bottle filling as a well as drinking facilities and gravity drains (see approved mechanical suppliers).

To minimise the risk of water stagnation or bacteriological growth, storage capacity should be

commensurate with minimum storage rates.

Labs and workshops where applicable should gave fluid cat 5 supplies to non-domestic appliances.

Back flow protection devices should be provided to Bristol Water Regulations.

To prevent future cross-connection of Cat 5 and domestic pipework, Cat 5 pipework should be

insulated with a different surface finish to domestic (preferred method ISOGENOPAK).



Domestic washing machines and dishwashers to have appropriate back flow protection to current

water regulations (normally Cat 3).

External bib taps for irrigation and window reach and wash cleaning operations should be avoided

where possible. Where unavoidable, appropriate back flow protection to current water regulations

should be provided (normally Cat 5).

RPZ non-return valves should not be used without the approval of UWE Estates PM/Engineer.

6.15.2 Hot Water Service

All methods of hot water production should be evaluated including Combined-Heat and Power

(CHP), solar, heat pumps etc. Biomass/bio-fuel will be considered under particular circumstances.

An assessment should be made of the most efficient method of hot water production, including the

separation of heating and hot water.

Hot water storage calorifiers or Heat Interface Units shall be assessed for buildings with the

potential to connect to the district heating system, elsewhere gas fired water heaters should be

used for hot water service generation.

Two pipe (Recirculatory) type systems are preferred, approval should be sought from the Facilities

CA\Engineer before installation of any other type. Where hot water use is expected to be low, the

use of electric instantaneous heaters, or low volume electric storage heaters for localised supply

should be considered.

Central water generators should have a minimum of two generators to minimise down time during

times of maintenance.

Storage calorifiers should be selected and designed to be capable of raising cold water from 10oC to

65°C, with a two hour recovery period.

Calorifiers should have anti-stratification pump circuits, controlled to the dictates of document L8.

All HWS should be stored at 60°C and warning labels provided at all outlets where there is a risk of

scalding.

Outlets within Disabled toilets and other areas with vulnerable occupants must have reduced

temperature flow via thermostatic mixing valves, specified as being suitable for this application,

outlets elsewhere should be conventional mixing valves with time flow and/or equalising pressure.



Where Thermostatic Mixing Valves are used the TMV shall be integral to the tap. No remote

thermostatic mixing valves shall be used on the water systems unless a special case is made to and

approved by the Estates Team.

Surface (i.e. non-intrusive) scale-prevention plant should be provided when performing extensive

works to existing central HWS generators. New plant should have probes mounted within the

pipework (see approved mechanical suppliers). Expansion vessels used on potable water supplies

should be of a flow-through type.

All above ground Water Services pipework up to and including 133mm shall be installed using

copper tubes Table X, uncoated or current equivalent. Flexible connections to sanitary appliances

are prohibited.

Above ground Water Services pipework 159mm to 219mm shall be installed using copper tubes to

temper annealed, Table 5 up to 7 bar working pressure, and Table 6 up to 17 bar working pressure.

6.15.3 Sustainable designs

An assessment should be made of the use of rain water and grey water harvesting systems. UWE

Sustainability Plan 2013-2020 has a target to increase rainwater and greywater systems at all

campuses. The aim of this target is to improve the University’s water resilience in the event of

water scarcity in the future.

Low flow water fittings and IR-controls should be considered for all appliances particularly wash

hand basins, urinals, WC’s and showers. Using the BREEAM criteria as values to be achieved.

6.16 Natural Gas

The designer is responsible for checking the suitability of all existing supplies at project inception. If

record information is not availability the designer shall survey or request and provide a brief for any

surveys required. The designer if required shall contact the relevant statutory supplier to establish

suitability of supply capacity.

Gas installation line diagrams for new installations or amendments to existing must be provided.

They should be mounted on site plus a copy given to the Facilities CA at handover.

Gas detection systems, linked to solenoid valves, should be provided within all new remote boiler

houses or those integral within the building and over 300KW.

Where Gas solenoid valves are provided the system must be designed to ensure they do not auto-

open upon power re-instatement, plus control provision should be made such that its power supply

is not interrupted during the university’s regular fire alarm testing regime.



Emergency Isolation Points and gas proving systems shall be provided in all laboratories and

kitchens.

Interlock of gas supply with supply air for all main kitchens is essential.

6.17 Medical/laboratory gas

Designers of faculty gas installations or specialist services (e.g. laboratory gases) must co-ordinate

their designs with the rest of the design team, the faculty and vice versa, even if this installation is

being procured as a separate package.

6.18 Refrigerant Pipework

The entire refrigerant pipe work installation shall be installed using copper tube to BS 2871, Part 2,

Table 2 designation C106 or equivalent, suitable for the type of oil and refrigerant used.

Refrigerant Pipe work up to and including 3/8" (12mm), shall be installed using tube to specification

standard ASTM280, DIN 1754/8905 or equivalent, annealed, having plain ends, finished uncoated,

tested by Eddy Current method, all fully de-greased, dehydrated and capped, all internal surfaces

being absolutely free from scale and dirt.

Refrigerant Pipework for sizes ½" (15mm) and over, shall be installed using tube to BS 2871, Part

2, half hard condition or specification standard ASTM280, DIN 1754/8905, half hard temper or

equivalent, having plain ends, uncoated finish, tested by Eddy Current method, all fully de-greased,

dehydrated and capped, all internal surface being absolutely free from scale and dirt.

Where there is a likelihood of mechanical damage it shall be protected by inverted cable tray

including all external refrigerant pipework.



6.19 Mechanical Heating/Cooling/ Refrigeration Systems

6.19.1 General Temperature Performance Requirements

6.19.1.1 Heating Season (air temperature)

Winter ambient: - 5.5°C db/100% RH

Room temp (general): 22°C db

(See CIBSE guides for specific areas)

100% outside air ventilation ambient: -7.0°C db/100% RH

Allowances for intermittent heating: (See CIBSE guides).

6.19.1.2 Cooling Season (air temperature)

Summer ambient: 28°C db/20°C wb

Summer ambient (heat-rejection plant): 30°C db/21°C wb

Room temp (general): 22°C db (only used for mechanical cooling)

(See CIBSE guide for specific areas)

Note, these temperatures are only applicable where the case for mechanical cooling has been

accepted by the Estates team otherwise the temperature should meet the constraints of the

Summertime Overheating Criteria.

6.19.2 Heating

Heat source: An assessment of low/zero carbon heating sources should be conducted before

specifying fossil fuel boilers. This assessment should include consideration of connecting to the

proposed district heating network at Frenchay Campus, and any other known, existing or, proposed

district heating systems in the proximity to the specific site whether UWE-owned or by another.

Where gas boilers are used, atmospheric gas fired boilers should be used in preference to forced

draft boilers.

Spare capacity: Except in individually served housing units, a minimum of two heat sources must

be installed: 150% total nominal capacity.

Three or more heat sources: 120% total nominal capacity

Heat source control: As HM Government: Non-domestic Building Services Compliance Guide



Pumped circuits: Each pumped circuit must have dual pumps (i.e. run and standby). Pumps

should be specified with variable speed drives.

Design Margin: A minimum of +10% of heat out-put should be added to all terminal/(heat

emitting) devices. Adequate allowance for heat loss from distribution pipework should be made.

Electrical Heater Batteries: Must be agreed in advance with UWE Estates.

Use of storage tanks: If storage tanks are to be used for providing heating fuel (e.g. bio-fuel),

tanks should be fitted with a fill indicator which is to be clearly visible at the filling point and the

tank should also be fitted with an overfill alarm, linked to the BMS. Secure filling point to be located

on accessible external wall. Tanks are to be double bunded. Handover documentation must contain

details of the refilling strategy (including required traffic management controls etc.).

Zoning: Appropriate heat zoning and controls should be defined to maximise system efficiency,

and to accommodate differences in end user needs.

6.19.3 Cooling

6.19.3.1 General

The emphasis of good design must always be on minimising internal summertime temperatures.

This should be approached in two stages. Stage 1 should evaluate the suitability of natural or

mechanical ventilation. If during this preliminary period it becomes apparent that suitable conditions

will not be achieved with natural ventilation, then Stage 2 should be to investigate the use of

mechanical cooling (see General Principles of this design guide).

The use of Mechanical Cooling is to be avoided, where it cannot be avoided, approval for its use

should be sought from UWE Estates. Passive rather than active systems should always be

prioritised e.g. the use of chilled beams in preference to fan coil units. The system/s shall also

comply with the following:

6.19.3.2 Large-scale

Cooling towers or other spray units will not be accepted.

Number of chillers: A minimum of 2 chillers should normally be installed: nominal System

total nominal capacity: 125%.

Chillers must have dual safety valve configuration to minimise loss of refrigerant during

maintenance procedures.

Larger computer rooms which require comfort cooling will require sensible coolers selected

with minimal latent cooling capacity, N+1 cooling provision shall be provided, consideration

shall also be given to future expansion of the cooling requirement, a report shall be



submitted to Estates for approval, detailing the level of cooling to be provided and method

of calculation.

6.19.3.3 Small-scale

Local DX Cooling

Heat pump – The use of reverse cycle heat pump shall be evaluated.

Ducted Fresh Air via Fresh Air spigot to external

BMS / controls Requirement: Remote Start/stop

o Common alarm

o Room temp sensor

o Auto-restart upon power reinstatement

The mechanical designer should ensure the details of the amount of refrigerant used and source of

power supply is provided on a trafolyte label screwed to the condensing unit.

6.19.3.4 Design Margin

A minimum of +10% of cooling out-put should be added to all terminal devices.

Adequate allowance for heat gain from distribution pipework should be made.



6.20 Ventilation/Air Conditioning Systems

The fresh air supply rate, calculated in litres/second/person, should comply with CIBSE guides A

and B, and Part F of the Building Regulations. The chapter of this design guide dealing with space

standards provides minimum space allowances for some spaces. This will allow maximum

occupancy (and therefore air supply rate) to be calculated. This should be used for initial

assumptions about HVAC strategies and plant sizing (at RIBA Stage 2). However, the Space

Planning team should be consulted, especially where specialist spaces are concerned, about

anticipated occupancy. The project team must establish the exact processes to be undertaken in

the space (e.g. use of LEV systems) which will influence design.

6.20.1 Mechanical Ventilation

Ducted supply ventilation: Major supply AHU’s (above 0.5m3/s) should have the following:

Pre filter: panel to EU3

Main filter: Bar to EU6

(With Magnahelic and BMS pressure sensors across both filters)

Facility for recirculation of air where possible via motorised dampers. Where full fresh air is

essential, other methods of heat recovery shall be evaluated.

Automated windows and Ventilators: Where installed, they should be complete with position

indication or contacts.

Variable speed drives: Use of these drives to be assessed to maximise efficiency of the system.

Direct drives: Fan power should be of the direct drive type as opposed to belt drive.

Fire damper type: To be specified and installed for ease of annual testing, external resettable fire

dampers shall be used wherever possible. The mechanical designer should make provision to

witness the operation of all fire dampers as part of their witnessing of the commissioning process.

Displacement Ventilation: Use of this principle is preferred where practical and cost effective.

Intake and discharge locations: These should be considered at an early stage in the project

whilst applying good design principles and CIBSE guide B recommendations. Consideration of

discharge and intake pollution must also be considered. External weather louvers should be selected

and specified by the mechanical services designer.

Where cost effective, ground coupled fresh air supply system shall be used.



In all cases, the legionella risk of passing intake air over water should be considered and low level

air intakes should be sited to avoid any accumulation of floor washing or rain water.

Ducted supply & extract fans: Differential Pressure Switches to be mounted across all fans.

VAV supply & extract fans: These should have differential pressure sensors rather than switches.

Humidification: Use of humidifiers is not generally accepted and approval should be sought from

the Estates Team for the use of central plant for dehumidification with reheat.

6.20.2 Fire Strategy

As detailed in Chapter 3 an updated fire strategy is required for any major changes to the building.

This must include the ventilation provision.

The fire strategy should identify the requirements for smoke ventilation, dry risers, hydrants etc.

The Design team and the Mechanical Consultant shall design the systems to meet current

regulations and good practice, where any ambiguity exists between the requirements the design

team should contact Estates for advice.

6.21 Central control/building management system

The UWE Building Management System to be used at Frenchay and Bower Ashton should be

Schneider StruxureWare.

A Trend 963 system is installed in several buildings and the entirety of the Glenside campus, all new

controllers to be BACNet compatible.

BMS monitoring and control shall be provided to all significant items of Mechanical Plant items,

unless agreed with the Estates Team.

Provision should be made within the construction programme for client witnessing of the BMS

controls prior to handover.

Graphics and software shall be created in accordance with associated UWE standard documents:

BMS Graphics Standards

BMS Software Standards

A copy of all BMS graphics, control philosophy and bespoke software programming should be issued

to the Facilities CA\Engineer for approval, with sufficient time period (two weeks) for comment.



All safety interlocks must be hardwired (i.e. temperature, pressure, airflow etc.) with indication only

to be provided via the BMS where applicable.

All plant’s MCCs must be linked to the sites fire alarm system, with a provision to over-ride this link

for regular fire alarm testing.

As a rule of thumb, room sensors should be located 1.5M AFFL, 0.5M from corners and vertical

protrusions, away from draughts e.g. doorways, avoiding heat emissions and other thermal hot-

spots. They must be representative of the space being controlled.

Fridges/freezers that are considered business or research-critical must be monitored by the BMS.

All motorised dampers and valves should have their ‘open’ and ‘closed’ positions clearly marked on

the side of their respective actuators and/or damper linkage prior to handover.

As discussed elsewhere, it is critical that actuators, sensors etc. can be accessed from a position of

safety (avoiding the need to work at height if practicable) and without the need for dismantling.

Schneider Building Analytic software to be installed during the BMS commissioning stage (covering

all plant provided under the contract) with the objective of providing a ‘defect-free’ installation at

handover. Furthermore the contractor shall include for the monitoring, analysis and defect

rectification of all BMS components, and software engineering of said equipment through-out the

entire defects liability period, culminating in a totally defect-free BMS system at end of DLP.

Critical alarms shall be agreed at handover and included in the Bureau remote monitoring system.

Email alerts shall also be configured.



6.22 Approved Mechanical Suppliers

Heating Plant Cooling Plant

Boilers up to

70 kw

Caradon/Ideal

Baxi

Potterton

Vaillant

Chillers Daikin

Carrier

Trane

Boilers over

100 kw

Hamworthy

Hoval

Clyde Combustion

Wellman Robey

DX/VRV Daikin

Mitsubish

Ventilation Plant

Burners Riello

Nuway

AHU ABB Flatk

Dalair

Senior Moducel

Radiators Stelrad (or to match existing)

Runtal / Hudevad in specifically

agreed locations

Fans ABB Flatk

Nuaire

Howden Group

Elta

TRV’s Oventrop TRV’s. Model Series

AV6 (TRV Body). Uni LGH

(Sensing Head), Combi 4 (LSV).

Building Management System

BMS Schneider

Water Generators

Pumps/Pressurisation Units Instantaneous

electric

Heatrae Sadia

Santon

Pumps Armstrong

Grundfos

Smedegaard

Direct gas

fired

Lochinvar

Water Conditioning Drinking Water Dispensers

Water

Conditioning

Hydrotec (UK) Ltd

Enigma - Environmental

Treatment Concepts Ltd

Drinking

Water

Dispensers

Cooleraid

MIW

6.23 Approved Mechanical Contractors

The designer should advise and/or recommend to the Estates Project Manager of suitable

contractors. Estates Project Manager will make the final selection.


Chapter 7: Electrical Engineering Design


C h a p t e r 7 | E l e c t r i c a l E n g i n e e r i n g D e s i g n I s s u e 1 . 3 P a g e | 1

Table of Contents 7.1 Introduction ................................................................................................................ 3

7.2 Management of Electrical Design .................................................................................. 3

7.2.1 Initial Survey ........................................................................................................ 3

7.2.2 Design Co-ordination ............................................................................................. 3

7.2.3 Initial Load Assessment ......................................................................................... 3

7.2.4 Plant, System Selection and Location ...................................................................... 4

7.2.5 Electrical Design Standards .................................................................................... 4

7.2.6 Stage Gate Approvals (RIBA Stages 2-6 2013) ........................................................ 4

7.3 Electrical Systems ........................................................................................................ 5

7.3.1 Utilities ................................................................................................................ 5

7.3.2 HV Switchgear and Transformers ........................................................................... 5

7.3.3 LV Modular Switchboards ...................................................................................... 6

7.3.4 LV Panel Boards ................................................................................................... 8

7.3.5 LV Distribution Boards ........................................................................................... 8

7.3.6 Labelling System ................................................................................................... 9

7.3.7 Metering ............................................................................................................ 10

7.3.8 Transient over Voltage Protection ......................................................................... 11

7.3.9 Power Factor Correction ...................................................................................... 11

7.3.10 Harmonic Filters ................................................................................................. 11

7.3.11 Small Power Services .......................................................................................... 12

7.3.12 Under Floor Bus-Bar System ................................................................................ 13

7.3.13 Dado Trunking System ........................................................................................ 13

7.3.14 Special Small Power Areas ................................................................................... 14

7.3.15 Electrical Supplies to Mechanical Plant .................................................................. 15

7.3.16 UPS Systems ...................................................................................................... 15

7.3.17 Generator Systems ............................................................................................. 16

7.3.18 Lighting ............................................................................................................. 17

7.3.19 Lighting Control .................................................................................................. 19

7.3.20 Lighting Control by Area Type .............................................................................. 20

7.3.21 Emergency Lighting ............................................................................................ 23

7.3.22 External Lighting ................................................................................................. 24

7.4 Fire Alarm System ..................................................................................................... 25



7.4.1 General requirements for the Fire Alarm System .................................................... 25

7.4.2 Fire Alarm System / Mechanical Systems Interface ................................................ 25

7.4.3 Fire Alarm System / Access Control Systems Interface ........................................... 26

7.4.4 Fire Alarm System / General Passenger Lifts Interface ........................................... 26

7.5 Containment and Wiring ............................................................................................ 27

7.5.1 Individual Wiring Methodology ............................................................................. 27

7.5.2 Individual Containment Methodology .................................................................... 29

7.6 Ancillary Services ...................................................................................................... 29

7.6.1 Lightning Protection System and Surge Protection ................................................. 30

7.6.2 Assistance Call Systems ....................................................................................... 30

7.6.3 Wall Clocks......................................................................................................... 31

7.6.4 Electrical hand and hair dryers ............................................................................. 31

7.6.5 Hearing Assistance Systems ................................................................................. 31

7.6.6 Lifts ................................................................................................................... 31

7.6.7 CCTV, Security Alarm, Access Control and Car Park Barrier Systems ........................ 32

7.6.8 Disabled Refuges ................................................................................................ 33

7.7 Energy ..................................................................................................................... 34

7.7.1 Photovoltaics (Where Required) ........................................................................... 34

7.7.2 Inverters ............................................................................................................ 34

7.7.3 Online monitoring ............................................................................................... 34

7.7.4 Considerations .................................................................................................... 34

7.7.5 Demand Side Response ....................................................................................... 34

7.8 Commissioning .......................................................................................................... 35

7.9 Management of Isolation ........................................................................................... 35

7.10 Lessons Learned ....................................................................................................... 36

7.10.1 Tracing / Identification ........................................................................................ 36



7.1 Introduction

All designers must be familiar with Chapters 1, 2 and 3 of the UWE Design Guides before

commencing any design work.

This current Chapter of the design guide relates to electrical engineering design.

7.2 Management of Electrical Design

Chapters 1, 2 and 3 of this guide states that all designers must consult with a range of stakeholders

including end-users and the Facilities department, during design development. This may be in the

form of structured liaison meetings organised by the internal or external project manager.

Electrical designers, depending on their exact discipline and the nature of the project, will need to

take the following actions:

7.2.1 Initial Survey

Survey existing services and ascertain the implications of any new works. A condition survey

may be required for works within existing areas. The designer is responsible for checking the

suitability of all existing water supplies, drainage capacity etc. at project inception.

Consideration and review of case studies and technical papers of similar applications.

Consider budgetary and energy conservation requirements.

7.2.2 Design Co-ordination

Liaise with all members of the design team including the building designer and structural

engineer to provide an integrated building/ structural / services installation. This must include

coordination of electrical contractors’ work requirements, plant space and significant apertures

within the structure.

Particular attention must be paid to the end-users small power requirements.

Coordination is required with the mechanical services designer regarding the power and control

requirements for the mechanical services.

Likewise, IT infrastructure has specific power, and energy consumptions, requirements which

are discussed in this Chapter (but also see Chapter 8). There must be close co-ordination

between the electrical services designer and UWE IT Engineers.

7.2.3 Initial Load Assessment



This supports early assessment of plant space requirements for co-ordination with the building

designer.

BSRIA documents and Institutes/CIBSE rules of thumb can be used as a check.

7.2.4 Plant, System Selection and Location

Selected to maximize operational efficiency and availability.

7.2.5 Electrical Design Standards

All electrical specifications and designs shall comply with the current version of BS7671 at the time

the design is prepared including all amendments.

This shall be as a minimum standard to be achieved and / or as supplementary requirements to

detailed technical clauses which relate to a specific aspect of an installation.

If there are any doubts or questions relating to electrical systems or standards required, the

designer shall discuss these with UWE Estates department.

7.2.6 Stage Gate Approvals (RIBA Stages 2-6 2013)

On major capital projects (nominally any project over £2.5m), UWE will adopt BSRIA BG6 Design

Framework for Building Services to manage the allocation of design responsibilities. At the

discretion of the UWE Project Manager, BG6 shall be applied to projects of lower value (especially

where there is a heavy emphasis on building services).

BG6 contains a number of pro-forma templates to be used at different RIBA stages. Due to the

fact that UWE is an informed client, most of the pro-forma 1 activities have been or will be carried

out in-house by UWE (e.g. obtaining and providing existing building information) and other project

processes are in place to ensure this is done.

Therefore, design teams will only be required to use pro-forma 2 onwards contained in BG6.



7.3 Electrical Systems

7.3.1 Utilities

The designer shall ensure that, where there is an existing supply to an existing building, it is of a

suitable type and capacity for the new anticipated load. Consideration shall be given to the load

growth of the installation and time/season of the year. Measurements over a period of 1 month

shall be taken to ascertain the existing electrical load profile. Where programme allows, the month

of monitoring shall apply to the month most anticipated to have the greatest electrical demand.

Where a new supply is required, the designer shall be responsible for liaising with UWE estates

engineers to confirm a suitable connection point for a new supply of adequate rating and capacity.

Marker tape shall be installed above all buried cables. The tape shall be yellow PVC or polyethylene

ribbon at least 150 mm wide and shall be printed with the words “ELECTRIC CABLE” in bold capital

letters throughout its length and at intervals not exceeding 700 mm.

When producing external design drawings please refer to ‘NJUG guidelines on the positioning and

colour coding of underground utilities apparatus’.

7.3.2 HV Switchgear and Transformers

Any new substation shall be connected to the site wide network, connection details shall be agreed

with UWE Estates.

HV switchgear panels shall be built to IEC 60694 and appropriate sections of IEC 62271 -200 2012

or 62271-202:2014 for prefabricated Sub stations.

Switchgear shall be a minimum of IP44 and selected according to site conditions.

Switch Panels shall be equipped with intelligent microprocessor protection relays and trip units

offering data measuring and appropriate communication facilities.

All Ring Main Units (RMU) shall be of the Non Extensible Type, unless specified otherwise.

Ring Main units to be provided with VIP protection relays to ensure that discrimination can be

achieved. Time fused link may also be considered once full calculations have been carried out at

detailed design stage. RMU’s shall also be provided with a voltage presence indicating system and

also have a Pfisterer facility to enable phase comparisons to be carried out at the RMU.

Phase rotation shall be verified when replacing equipment to ensure that cross phasing does not

occur and supplies are not connected to cross phases.



Each new RMU shall be provided with Earth Fault Passage Indication units.

All new equipment shall be of the same manufacture, the preferred UWE supplier being Schneider

Electric utilising ‘Ringmaster’ units, the outline design is based on these units.

It should also be noted that as of the 1st July 2015 Directive No 548/2014 came into force and is

aimed at reducing the amount of energy unnecessarily wasted through transformer losses.

All new transformers shall be, super / ultra low loss, hermetically sealed. Insulating fluid shall be

Model 7131. Low loss cast resin transformers may be proposed where circumstances necessitate

their use, but cast resin transformers are not the preferred transformers.

Transformers shall be sized to ensure their most optimum performance. Each substation shall

require a specialist earthing and bonding design to provide a safe environment and allow the HV

and LV earth terminals to be interlinked. New main earth bars shall be required at each substation

location. The design will firstly require specialist on-site measurements and survey, as well as the

existing fault characteristics and HV supply substation ‘hot’ or ‘cold’ designation to be known.

The consultant shall engage with a HV an earthing specialist to produce a HV earthing design for

each/ all substations. The design shall show details such as the main earth bar and all sized

connections and recommendations for all bonding within each substation.

All electrical switchboards shall be provided with a 1m wide carbon free rubber mat or mats having

a ribbed upper surface and being of such continuous length to suit the full operating extent of each

switchboard.

Where a design entails work on electrical plant within an existing substation, the designer shall

include for a HV earthing specialist to produce a report on the existing HV earthing arrangements

and provisions. The report and any recommendations shall be discussed with UWE Estates on how

these may be implemented in a project.

Approved Equipment and Companies - Schneider Electric, Square D, Siemens, Reyrolle, or

Hawker Siddeley Switchgear.

7.3.3 LV Modular Switchboards

Switchboards shall be a minimum of Form 4b Type 6 construction.

Air Circuit Breakers shall be installed (ACB’s) on all incoming and bus-section switches. The ACB’s

shall be equipped with intelligent microprocessor protection relays and trip units offering data

measuring and communication facilities.



Switchgear shall have pulsed output, kWh and kVArh digital meters with serial output for A, V, kW,

kVAr and power factor. Metering to be provided for each outgoing circuit and be linked to the UWE

campus Elcomponent system.

A separate cubicle shall be provided for the termination of all metering outputs and external control

circuits. Access shall be possible with the switchboard remaining live.

Outgoing switches up to and including 630A shall be Moulded Case Circuit Breakers however fuse-

switch types may be considered where necessary to overcome discrimination issues.

Outgoing switches rated at 630A to 1000A or over, shall be ACB type.

Switchboards shall incorporate transient voltage surge suppression protective devices.

Allowances of at least 25% spare capacity shall be made for future expansion.

Spare cubicles shall be incorporated into the design of LV modular switchboards for future

adaptations.

An assessment of the harmonics content and power factor correction requirement for the connected

loads shall be made at the design stage. Appropriate measures shall be incorporated into the design

of the LV modular switchboards.

Devices for locking-off switches for future maintenance and isolation purposes shall be provided

within the specification and final switchboard installations. The padlocks and keys shall be suitably

engraved for identification purposes.

Switchboards shall incorporate transient voltage surge suppression protective devices.

Access space to be allowed to the rear of the panels to enable maintenance. Resistive rubber mats

to BS 921:1976 to be provided for all accessible sides of LV switchboards (in addition to HV).

7.3.3.1 Discrimination/ grading study

The electrical contractor shall allow for carrying out a complete discrimination and protection

grading study of the complete electrical distribution system, including all connected equipment.

Provide fault (short circuit) calculations for the distribution system as indicated on the

drawings and a protective device co-ordination study to ensure that all protective devices

are co-ordinated. Base the study on the actual devices and cable lengths installed.

Prepare the fault calculations and protective device study with a network analyser, digital

computer or by written calculations, include complete fault calculations for each proposed

source and combinations thereof including motor and generator contributions.

Carry out the protective device co-ordination study including the following:



Time-current co-ordination curves graphically indicating the proposed co-ordination for the

system on log-log graph transparencies. Include on each sheet, a complete title and one line

diagram identifying the specific portion of the system covered.

A detailed description of each protective device identifying its type, function, manufacturer

and time current characteristics and tabulation of recommended settings.

Include on the curve sheets, system HV equipment relay characteristics, pertinent

transformer, motor and generator characteristics including up to the largest outgoing LV

circuit breaker/fuse for each distribution board. Indicate manufacturing tolerances clearly

showing the final grading margin.

Carry out adjustments of the protection settings to conform with the requirements of the study.

Ensure that discrimination is achieved throughout the network and select protective devices and

settings accordingly.

Approved Equipment and Companies - Schneider Electric or Square D.

7.3.4 LV Panel Boards

Modular Panel boards shall be built to relevant sections of BS EN 60439.

Form 3b type 2 as standard, however use of outgoing neutral or 4 pole breakers can increase the

form rating to form 4b types 2 and 6.

LV panel boards are ideally suited to installations where space is restricted or few outgoing circuits

are required.

Ratings from 250A up to 1600A.

May be used as a main switchboard or sub distribution board.


7.3.5 LV Distribution Boards

Allowance to be made for future expansion. Distribution boards shall have at least 25% spare

capacity.

Separate or split distribution boards shall be provided to segregate the following services: lighting

services and small power services.

MCB’s and RCBO’s to have a minimum rated breaking capacity of 10kA



3No. MCB lock out kits to be provided with each distribution board.

RCBO’s to be single module units.

Distribution boards to be provided with door locks.

Distribution boards to incorporate a main switch disconnector. Devices for locking-off MCB and

RCBO for future maintenance and isolation purposes shall be provided within the specification. The

padlocks and keys shall be suitably engraved for identification purposes. All keys to be handed over

to UWE estates electrical engineers.

This small be a minimum of Form 3, Type 2 (as detailed in BS EN 60439). The designer shall,

however, assess the use/application and use a higher rated board if considered necessary.


7.3.6 Labelling System

All electrical switch rooms or electrical cupboards shall be identified with appropriate signage as

agreed with UWE estates.

All accessories shall be labelled with the distribution board room number, distribution board number

and circuit reference.

Details of cable sizes and type, protection device ratings, and point of origin shall be labelled on all

LV switchboards, panel boards and distribution boards.

Details of Ze readings with the date of test shall be displayed at each switch board/panel

board/distribution board.

All distribution boards shall have engraved labels fixed to the front of the distribution board.

Dyno labels shall be used to identify all circuit descriptions within each distribution board (adjacent

to MCB’s).

All cabling shall be identified by ferrule type cable markers on all phases, neutrals and cpc’s.

All new distribution board and circuitry shall adopt UWE standard methodology for labelling.

Labelling standards to be obtained from estates team.

UWE have an asset tagging system in place, the consultant shall familiarise themselves with UWE

requirements and ensure this is captured within the design.



Warning labels showing voltage affixed to all switchboards, panel boards and distribution boards.

7.3.6.1 Circuit Charts

An accurate circuit chart is to be provided for all new distribution boards or boards which have been

altered. An electronic copy is to be provided to the UWE Electrical Engineer. A hard copy is to be

laminated and positioned adjacent or within the distribution board.

7.3.7 Metering

Metering and sub metering of the electrical distribution shall be installed as per CIBSE guide TM39

and BREEAM requirements. For the electricity metering the following principles should be followed:

Any major plant that consumes more than 10% of the building energy should be sub

metered.

Sub metered per floor.

Sub metering of lighting and small power separately.

Sub metering any lettable spaces e.g. leased spaces to shops or businesses within UWE.

Any cooling loads shall be metered separately.

Sub-metering of electrical supplies shall be provided in accordance with the requirements of the

Building Regulations specifically “The Building Regulations 2000 part L Conservation of Fuel and

Power”.

Metering units shall be installed to all distribution boards either in the main switchboard or

integrally in each distribution board. All meters shall have pulsed outputs.

Metering units shall be linked to the Facilities – Estates Elcomponent Energy Monitoring Package

and the ‘Power Logic’ monitoring and diagnostic system. An analysis study shall be completed for

the buildings to ensure that radio signals can reach the existing transmitter/receiver of the Facilities

– Estates Elcomponent Energy Monitoring Package and that there is spare capacity on the

Elcomponent system. Where the signal strength is weak or not present then number of additional

transmitter/receiver units shall be installed as required.

All necessary equipment required to ensure that each metering unit can be connected onto the

Facilities – Estates Elcomponent Energy Monitoring Package including data points and power

supplies shall be provided. Where required, allowance shall be made for modifying and/or extending

the existing system as required ensuring that it is sufficiently sized to accommodate the additional

metering units within the buildings and an additional 25% spare capacity.

Where the system needs to be augmented then a complete system shall be installed.



7.3.8 Transient over Voltage Protection

The main switchboard shall have an integral three phase and neutral transient over voltage

protection unit to protect the system from the effects of lightning strikes and harmonic spikes.

The transient over voltage protection unit shall be sized and rated to suit the application.

Other protection may be required for outgoing supplies, but this shall be determined by the

lightning protection and surge protection assessment.

Designed to BS6651: 1999 Code of practice for protection of structures against lightning.

Approved Equipment and Companies - Furse or Dehn

7.3.9 Power Factor Correction

If any switchboard has a permanently connected standby generator that supports part or the entire

switchboard upon loss of normal mains, the design and installation shall ensure the power factor

correction is not active on the bus bar sections of the generator.

A suitably sized spare way on the main switchboard shall be provided for the installation of power

factor correction. Power factor correction shall be provided with detuned capacitors to serve the

whole building. The switchboard shall have integral power factor correction equipment comprising

multiple 25kVA capacitor banks to correct the reactive load and automatic switching control of each

bank to apply the necessary capacitance.

The power factor shall be installed to maintain a power factor between 0.95 lagging and unity at

any given time.

7.3.10 Harmonic Filters

A suitably sized spare way on the main switchboard shall be provided for the installation of

harmonic filters. The harmonic content of the system shall be monitored following the completion of

the installation forth first three months and the results shall be made available to the Facilities –

Estates Department, UWE University. Should the harmonic content be above the limit as detailed in

G5/4 ‘Limits for Harmonics in UK Electricity Supply System’ then harmonic filters shall be installed to

reduce the levels to an acceptable level.

The harmonic content metering capability shall be incorporated in the main incoming supply meters

for each LV switchboards.

For particular items of equipment that are known to produce high levels or harmonics, dedicated

filtering should be considered at the design stage.



7.3.11 Small Power Services

The number of socket outlets and dedicated supplies shall be derived from client briefing and

project specific room data sheets.

Small power systems shall be designed to comply with the requirements of the latest edition of the

IET Wiring Regulations BS7671 and current amendments and other applicable British and European

Standards and Codes of Practice.

Room data sheets detail the minimum requirements for small power outlets in each area. However

where PC’s are to be utilised in the space, circuits shall be limited to accommodate a maximum of 8

no. PC’s per circuit. Allowance shall be made for future expansion on each other sub circuit.

The installation layout drawings for small power shall include all small power outlet locations, circuit

references and outlet types. Within all spaces where PCs are likely to be used all twin switched

13A, 230V socket outlets shall have dual earths and outboard switches. The circuit cables shall be

4mm2and arranged as dual earth circuits.

Dedicated single small power outlets shall be provided for cleaners use, with the cleaners sockets

being single gang colour RED. These shall be equipped with 30mA RCD protection. The designer

shall ensure there is a red cleaners socket on all stairwell landings, in each normally occupied room,

of 10m spacing intervals in corridors and in large rooms/ areas.

All teaching rooms, lecture rooms and meeting rooms shall be provided with 13A socket outlets,

audiovisual outlets, RJ45 outlets for data points and a telephone point for the Audio visual and IT

installations, and containment for future Audio visual and IT installations. The requirements are

contained in a separate Audio visual and IT specification.

Many people with disabilities use equipment that needs to be recharged regularly. Multiple power

points with contrasting colour cover plates shall be available at waist height around rooms.

IT server racks or wall mounted server racks shall be supplied via a dedicated circuit. The protective

device will be a 32A type C MCB and supplied via a 32A commando socket.

Where new mains comms rooms are being installed that contain more than one cabinet, the room

shall be provided with a dedicated distribution board that in turn supplies the dedicated circuits for

commando sockets.

UWE are currently implementing the installation of ‘Lecture capture facilities’ on all campuses. Final

details on the requirements are to be obtained from UWE Estates.

Approved Equipment and Companies – MK or Crabtree.



7.3.12 Under Floor Bus-Bar System

In areas with raised access floors an under-floor bus-bar system shall be provided to serve 13A

socket outlets.

The bus-bar shall comply with the requirements of the latest edition IET Wiring Regulations. Wiring

to the under-floor bus-bar shall be in XLPE/SWA/LSF cabling installed directly on the slab floor (the

armour shall not be used as the sole method of CPC or earth reference). All under-floor bus-bar

system shall be rated at 63A and shall be supplied cables sized for the full load of the bus-bar. Bus-

bar shall be provided under certain teaching spaces, IT suites, meeting rooms, offices and studios

where raised floors are available and the diversity of sockets and floor boxes dictates. This shall be

considered on a project by project basis.

The under-floor bus-bar system shall enable the connection of the four compartment floor boxes.

The bus-bar track shall be located in the floor with the maximum spacing of 5.5 metres between

bus-bars and 2.5 metres from walls. The floor boxes shall be fed via prewired 3 metre un-fused tap

offs, the use of fused type tap offs to served floor boxes shall not be permitted.

Under-floor bus-bar systems in IT suites and office areas shall be used to enable connection to desk

mounted socket outlet modules. The desk mounted 13amp socket outlet modules are to have USB

charge facilities and shall be fed via prewired 5 metre fused tap offs which shall exit the floor void

via grommets mounted in the floor. The desk mounted socket outlet modules shall be provided as

part of the electrical installations work. Each tap off unit identified in the room data sheets shall

consist of an electrical supply to the desk mounted socket outlet modules and an RJ45 data outlet.

Floor Boxes shall be of the MK, Crabtree or Legrand type and shall be selected to suit the

installation requirements.

Approved Equipment and Companies – MK, Legrand, Crabtree or Office Electrics.

7.3.13 Dado Trunking System

Dado Trunking can be installed in areas where raised floors are not installed. The extent of use of

dado trunking shall be discussed with UWE Estates and the architect for each project.

Dado trunking shall be 3 compartment, as per Marco Elite shall be installed around the perimeter of

rooms and columns. The dado trunking shall be installed above desk height. The dado trunking

shall accommodate a single or twin switched 13 amp socket outlets and CAT 6 data/voice outlets.

The 13amp socket outlets mounted on the dado trunking shall be wired in Ring configuration and

NO spurs shall be permitted.



The central compartment covers of the dado trunking shall be grey in order to comply with Part M

and provide a 30% visual contrast to the colour of white socket outlets.

Desk mounted socket outlet modules, complete with USB charging points, shall be provided and

installed to connect the desk to the dado trunking.

Approved Equipment and Companies – Marco Elite, Office Electrics.

7.3.14 Special Small Power Areas

7.3.14.1 Studios and Workshops

The electrical distribution system in studios and workshops shall be configured such that all of the

small power outlets (except cleaner’s outlets) can be isolated through one removable key switch

located within the studios and workshops. A ‘Firewatch’ panel shall be installed for this purpose.

Emergency stop buttons shall be installed throughout the studios and workshops to isolate power if

activated. Stop buttons shall be ‘non-latching’ type buttons and isolate all power to machinery and

open sockets and where applicable Gas shut off interlocking installed.

Socket outlets shall generally have RCD protection except where they have been

installed specifically for data equipment. If RCD protection is to be omitted. Then the designer

shall produce a documented risk assessment to explain their decision.

Sockets for cleaners shall be installed on a separate circuit and shall not be affected by the

emergency stop system.

Machinery socket outlets shall be MK Commando type outlets to prevent students from plugging in

unauthorised power tools and the requirement shall be project specific.

7.3.14.2 Laboratories

The electrical distribution system in laboratories shall be configured such that all of the small

power outlets (except cleaner’s outlets) can be isolated through one removable key switch located

within the staff office area.

Emergency Isolation Points, inter-linked to gas supply shall be installed throughout the laboratory to

isolate power and gas supply if activated. Stop buttons shall be ‘non -latching’ type buttons and

isolate all power to machinery and open sockets.



Socket outlets shall generally have RCD protection except where they have been installed

specifically for computers, etc. If RCD protection is to be omitted. Then the designer shall produce

a documented risk assessment to explain their decision.

Red sockets for cleaners shall be installed on a separate circuit and shall not be affected by the

emergency stop system.

7.3.15 Electrical Supplies to Mechanical Plant

Installations in connection with mechanical engineering services power supplies and control circuits

shall be supplied using information from the mechanical services design.

Power supplies and control cabling shall be provided, as required, to all items of mechanical plant

and equipment.

Plant power supplies shall be wired in XLPE/SWA/ LSF cable run on suspended cable tray from

mechanical control panels located in the plant rooms.

Equipment power supplies, such as for extract fans, shall be wired in 6491B (XLSF) cable run in

trunking and conduit.

The controls wiring shall be installed in cabling and containment systems as required to match the

requirements of the Mechanical services design and the requirements of the controls/BMS supplier.

7.3.16 UPS Systems

UPS systems shall be selected to protect ‘critical loads’ from loss of mains power supply. Typical

critical loads to be considered are data storage and processing systems, telecommunications

network equipment and point of sales terminals.

Consideration must be given to:

The size of the load

The load type

The load process requirements

The configuration type i.e. 1N, 2N, N+1 etc.

The installation of a fully safety interlocked, full wrap around maintenance By-pass

Separate LV supplies, one to the rectifier and the other to the static by-pass

The space available to house the equipment

The suitability of the proposed location (size and weight)

Access to the proposed locations

Future expansion of the system

The additional requirement for mechanical cooling

Period of autonomy required for each application



Provision of wrap-around by-pass facility

Separate supply for static by-pass

Any provision of UPS shall be considered on a project by project basis, and technical

proposals discussed with UWE Estates during the design stage

Approved Equipment and Companies - Chloride or UPS Systems

7.3.17 Generator Systems

Generator systems shall be selected to provide a secondary power supply to various systems in the

event of mains power failure.

Typical loads to be considered but not limited to are fire evacuation lifts, evacuation lifts,

mechanical smoke ventilation systems and essential supplies.

Consideration must be given to:

The size of the load

The load type

The load process requirements

The configuration type i.e. 1N, 2N, N+1 etc.

The space available to house the generator

The suitability of the proposed location (size and weight)

Access to the proposed locations

The additional requirement for mechanical cooling

Period of autonomy required for each application

Fuel storage with fuel polishing facility, double-bunded tank and fully alarmed

BMS interface

Any provision of generator shall be considered on a project by project basis, and technical

proposals discussed with UWE Estates during the design stage

Approved Equipment and Companies - Broadcrownor F.G Wilson or Dale Erskine



7.3.18 Lighting

7.3.18.1 Lighting Levels and Limiting Glare Indexes.

All lighting is to be designed in line with the relevant standards, including the CIBSE Lighting Guides

and Code for Lighting.

7.3.18.2 Electrical Load and Lighting Calculations

The appropriate load calculations shall be included for all design presented to the UWE Estates

Department for comment and/or information. Designers are required to enter the appropriate

values into a spreadsheet format. Appropriate Dialux lighting design submissions will also be

acceptable.

Lighting levels in lux, uniformity, glare indexes along with energy targets and W/m2 values to be

submitted for each room/space.

The artificial lighting design shall meet the most current and appropriate requirements of Building

Regulations Part L2. Areas that fall outside these parameters shall be highlighted to UWE Estates.

7.3.18.3 General Design Requirements for Lighting

The lighting system shall be designed so that it complies with the most recent edition of Building

Regulation Approved Document Part L.

Our preferred means of lighting distribution is by the use of modular, plug-in systems (such as Flex

7). This system, however, must not be used on central battery systems where fire-rated cables are

required out to each luminaire.

Low energy light sources shall primarily be LED and any deviation from LED technology shall be

approved by UWE Estates prior to detailed design.

All luminaires shall have light output ratios (LOR’s) of >0.8 and incorporate high efficiency DALI

control gear.

Generally, the colour temperature of lamps shall be 4000K (Intermediate).

Provide adequate switching arrangements where applicable to permit ‘good housekeeping’ by staff

and students. The switching facility should provide flexible local control for changing patterns of use

and occupation and also permit considerable reductions in lighting load for out-of-hours security

patrols.



Careful consideration shall be made for future maintenance tasks in relation to the positioning of

luminaires and mounting height. Consider the use of uplighters and suspended lighting systems for

rooms with high ceilings. Attempt to eliminate from the design, the requirement for the use of

access equipment for future maintenance tasks.

Architectural and interior design requirements should be closely co-ordinated in respect of colour

rendering and display effect without compromising energy cost.

Where applicable, a minimum of 10% of each lamp type shall be provided as spares within the

specification and be supplied to the Estates project manager at Handover stage.

All indoor lighting shall comply with BS EN 12464 Part 1, in teaching rooms and lecture rooms the

consultant shall follow the recommendations of CIBSE Lighting Guide LG5.

For all offices the consultant shall follow the recommendations of CIBSE Lighting Guide LG7.

The design documentation shall be produced, and submitted for examination at the request of UWE

estates engineers. This documentation shall include detailed calculation sheets for each sub and

final circuit, showing connected load, circuit protection type and rating, load current, voltage drop

and derivation of protective conductor sizes.

A luminaire schedule shall be presented to UWE estates during the design stages. This will allow

UWE estates to review the selected luminaires and request product samples of any luminaire the

university is unfamiliar with. This exercise will need to be completed in sufficient time prior to final

order placement with the luminaire suppliers to avoid contract delays being incurred during the

installation period.

Where it is practicable to utilise suspended multitrack lighting trunking; Zumtobel Tecton shall be

used. Circuit header wiring to be selected as appropriate.

Accessibility Guidelines (If applicable)

All teaching spaces are to be naturally lit as far as possible.

Flexible lighting options shall be provided with a view to light spectrum, light intensity, and

window blinds.

Lighting levels must be sufficient and not create glare.

Bare bulbs are to be avoided. Translucent covers to diffuse lights are recommended.

Harsh strip lighting is not appropriate.

Flexible lighting to focus on the face of the presenter (so lip-reading is enhanced) and on a

sign language interpreter in a lecture theatre or seminar settings.

Approved Equipment and Companies – Zumtobel, iGuzzini, Riddi, Trilux, Reggiani or Fagerhult

(Luminaire manufacturers to be review annually).



7.3.18.4 Daylighting

In accordance with the energy section of the BREEAM assessment, and to help to achieve the

required BREEAM rating there is a requirement to incorporate good day lighting into the design.

Consideration shall be given to all spaces where enhanced daylighting can be utilised. The

positioning of daylight sensors shall ensure maximum energy savings from utilising natural daylight

can be achieved.

7.3.18.5 Task Lighting

If required, due to visual impairment or specific activities, this will be included in the client brief and

will be assessed on a case-by-case basis.

7.3.19 Lighting Control

General: The lighting controls within the building shall comply with the most recent edition of

Building Regulation Approved Document Part L and LG14: Control of Electric Lighting.

The lighting control system in open space offices shall have the following:

Absence/ presence detection (PIR’s shall have the ability to be programmed as either)

incorporating local switching to all office spaces. Absence/ presence detection shall be

provided in line with manufacturers specific guidelines so as to detect any personnel in any

area and at any workstation.

In general daylight dimming shall be utilised in areas where natural daylight makes it

appropriate to do so.

Presence detection is used in toilets and corridors. Absence detection is used in other

spaces, with a rocker switch by the room entrances to enable users to switch lights on / off

when required.

Store rooms/cupboards which require lighting shall have PIR or manual switch.

Manual switches where used shall be provided in accordance with the most recent edition of

“The Building Regulations Part L2 Section ‘Controls for general lighting in all types of

spaces’” which stipulates that ‘the distance on plan from any local switch to any luminaire it

controls should generally be not more than 6 metres or twice the height of the luminaire

above the floor if this is greater’.

Lighting Control Modules shall be used where practicable.

For smaller installation a Zumtobel Dimlite control system is preferable.

For larger installations a Zumtobel Litenet control system is preferable.

Zumtobel Tecton Track shall be utilised where practicable.



All luminaires specified shall have a Dali ballast as larger and smaller installations will need a Dali

Approved Equipment and Companies –Zumtobel or (Philips Occuswitch for very small applications)

7.3.20 Lighting Control by Area Type

7.3.20.1 Reception Areas

Lighting control shall be provided to allow for the ease of operation of individual circuits and operation of

a number of pre-set scenes via a DALI touch screen control panel with graphical display.

Lighting to be controllable as individual effects and areas for scene setting by the lighting control system

7.3.20.2 Café Areas

DALI lighting control shall be provided to allow for the ease of operation of individual circuits and

operation of a number of pre-set scenes via a touch screen control panel with graphical display.


7.3.20.3 Exhibition Space

DALI lighting control shall be provided to allow for the ease of operation of individual circuits and

operation of a number of pre-set scenes via a touch screen control panel with graphical display.


7.3.20.4 Teaching Spaces

DALI lighting controls shall be provided by absence/ presence detection and retractive switching. The

lighting will generally be provided by rows of luminaires running parallel to the teaching surface.

Local switches shall be provided to allow the occupant to switch ‘off’ lighting when not required.

Lighting shall be manually switched in rows of luminaires running parallel to the teaching surface so as

to turn off lighting adjacent to the interactive whiteboard/projector screen.

Two rows of fittings running parallel to the building perimeter façade shall be provided with daylight

linking dimming control to maximise the use of the available natural light.

In general, teaching spaces shall have a Zumtobel Circles Switch providing 3 scenes as detailed below:

Scene Function provided

1 Lights full on



2 Projection mode (turning lights off adjacent to the screen)

3 All lights dimmed (60%)

In the event that spotlights are required in larger teaching areas to illuminate the speaker’s lectern

(which can assist with lip-reading etc.), the spotlights shall be selected, positioned and angled to prevent

glare on presentation screens or otherwise diminish the visual acuity of presentations.

7.3.20.5 Workshop and Laboratory Rooms

Lighting controls shall be provided by manual switching only.

7.3.20.6 Breakout/Social Learning Areas

Lighting shall be DALI controlled by absence/presence detection and retractive switching for DALI

control.

Additional ceiling recessed detectors shall be used to ensure sufficient presence detection coverage

is provided to prevent nuisance automatic switching of the lighting.

7.3.20.7 Open Plan and Cellular Offices

Lighting shall be DALI controlled by absence/presence detection and retractive switching for DALI

control.

Two rows of fittings running parallel to the building perimeter façade shall be provided with daylight

linking dimming control to maximise the use of the available natural light.

Local switching shall also be provided in rows to allow the occupants to switch ‘off’ or dim lighting

when not required.

7.3.20.8 Meeting and Interview Rooms

Generally lighting controls shall be provided by DALI with absence/ presence detection and

retractive switching.

Where the meeting room or interview room has an external window then the lighting shall

also be daylight linked.



7.3.20.9 Corridors

Lighting controls shall be provided by presence detection. Where appropriate the lighting within

corridors shall be linked with photocells such that if there is sufficient natural light, within corridors

then the artificial lighting will switch ‘off’.

Consideration should be made to corridor illumination when the building is still in use to ensure that

people do not step in to unlit corridors.

7.3.20.10 Staircases

Lighting controls shall be provided by presence detection. Where appropriate the lighting within

staircases shall be linked into photocells such that if there is sufficient natural light within a

staircase then the artificial lighting will switch ‘off’.

In a building with a networked lighting control system, the lighting on staircases shall remain

illuminated when the building is occupied and shall not switch off, except where photocells sense

that there is sufficient natural light, until the lighting control system senses the building is empty.

7.3.20.11 Library

The lighting control shall be by manual retractive switching and presence detection.

7.3.20.12 PIR Settings (General)

Type or Area Duration (Mins)

Corridor 20

Stairwells 20

WC’s 20

Shower Rooms 20

Changing Rooms 20

Offices (controlled on presence) 20

Classrooms (controlled on presence) 20

Cleaners Cupboard/ Store 10

Kitchenette 20

Equipment Cupboards/ Stores 10

Meeting Rooms 20



7.3.20.13 PIR Settings (Student Accommodation)

Type or Area Duration (Mins)

Corridor 20

Stairwells 20

WC’s 20

Ensuite Bathroom 20

Communal Kitchen 20

Amenity Area 20

Laundry 10

Store 10

7.3.20.14 Other Areas

Areas not covered above shall be discussed with UWE Estates.

7.3.21 Emergency Lighting

System to be designed to comply with all relevant parts of the most current edition of BS5266.

Escape routes shall have a system of emergency lighting throughout the route to the final exit from

the building.

The emergency lighting system shall be a fully automatic, centralised self-testing addressable

system. Where the scope of the project includes the provision of a new addressable system, a

data point shall be installed adjacent for future connection to a central monitoring system.

The emergency light fittings shall be LED, self-contained, self-testing and addressable, 3hr duration,

appropriately selected for the specific location and fully compatible with Zumtobel SB 128

Emergency Light test modules.

All emergency luminaires shall be wired with DALI cabling to local SB 128 Modules and central

battery system. If there is no SB128, a unit shall be provided if specified within the project scope.

The escape routes shall be indicated by maintained illuminated signage.

In buildings where sufficient quantities of emergency luminaires are to be installed and

maintenance and access to the fittings may be difficult to change batteries and the like, due

consideration shall be given to the use of a Central Battery system.

In buildings where there are large amounts of emergency lighting (up to 30KW) or increased loads

as higher lux levels of emergency lighting required i.e. High risk areas, workshops, laboratories or



kitchens, due consideration shall be given to the use of a Zumtobel Onlite central power supply

emergency lighting system.

All emergency lighting shall be labelled and identified on the SB 128 or central battery system in

line with UWE Estates emergency lighting labelling requirements.

The wiring from central battery systems shall be fully fire-rated up to and including connection.

Please see the separate section on containment and wiring.

Emergency luminaires shall have identification numbers affixed to the visible part of the luminaire.

Please remember that emergency lighting must be provided inside and in the vicinity of technical

areas that need to be accessed in an emergency (to assist staff performing isolations etc.).

Approved Equipment and Companies – Zumtobel

7.3.22 External Lighting

Where colour rendering is not critical, consideration should be given to the use of more efficient

LED sources.

External lighting shall be controlled via the combination of a building mounted photocell,

astronomical time clock and 3 position on/off and auto over-ride switch. The time clock and switch

shall be accessible to authorised persons only and shall be linked to the BMS system to give an

alarm condition on operation.

Any external lighting shall avoid upward light pollution and minimise overspill onto neighbouring

buildings, as in accordance with the ILP guidance notes for the reduction of obtrusive light.

Careful consideration shall be given for future maintenance tasks in relation to the positioning of

luminaires and mounting height.

Raise and lower or hinged columns shall be specified and approved maintenance equipment shall be

free issued to estates to carry out future maintenance works on all external column mounted

luminaires.

Due consideration shall be given to the maintainability on the selection of columns or fittings that

can be folded or lowered to limit the need for work at height

Consider the use of LED bollard lights and street lights to illuminate external walkways as opposed

to floodlighting an area.



Approved Equipment and Companies – Thorlux, Simes or Philips Speedstar range or equal and

approved.

7.4 Fire Alarm System

7.4.1 General requirements for the Fire Alarm System

All new fire alarm panels shall be connected to the existing site wide Gent network. Exact

requirements of connections shall be on a project by project basis.

The UWE standard for detection is Type L3 for Non-Residential and L1 for Residential.

The fire alarm system shall be designed to comply with all relevant parts of BS5839.

The fire alarm system shall be fully addressable with clear device descriptions down to room detail.

Spare capacity shall be made available for future expansion of the system.

The category of fire alarm system to be applied will be project specific and will be advised by the

fire officer.

All devices and accessories shall be selected from the same product range as the main fire alarm

panel.

Remote indicators will be required for all concealed detection devices and interface units.

Flashing beacons shall have a red lens and be EN54-23 compliant. They shall be positioned at

various locations which will include corridors and communal areas, bars and café areas, lecture

theatres, classrooms, plantrooms, toilets etc. or other locations where deaf and hard of hearing

users may be alone, including bedrooms, ensuites, kitchens and common rooms in selected campus

residential accommodation.

Plant override test switches shall be a key operated type.

In areas where entertainment equipment will be used, fire alarm interface units shall be installed to

disconnect the power to the equipment in the event of fire alarm activation.

7.4.2 Fire Alarm System / Mechanical Systems Interface

A fire alarm system interface unit shall be installed adjacent to each mechanical plant control panel.

This shall include the ventilation system and boiler plant control panels.



In addition interfaces for but not limited to systems such as smoke dampers, gas solenoid valves,

CHP’s etc. shall be included.

7.4.3 Fire Alarm System / Access Control Systems Interface

All doors with electro-magnetic locking systems shall include a provision to allow the door to be

opened in the event of a fire alarm or other emergency situation. Normally this means that the

locks will automatically disengage upon activation of the fire alarm.

A fire alarm system interface unit shall be installed adjacent to each secure door with an additional

manual break glass override – coloured green – mounted local to the door.

Careful co-ordination is to be ensured between the lock installer and fire alarm system specialist.

7.4.3.1 High risk areas

If the UWE Security Services Department, in consultation with end-users, determines that an area

represents a high security risk they can require that electro-magnetic locks on vulnerable doors do

not release automatically upon activation of the fire alarm. The University Health and Safety team

will be notified of this decision and this decision will need to be recorded (e.g. in the fire strategy

and/or fire risk assessment).

7.4.4 Fire Alarm System / General Passenger Lifts Interface

The interface for the lifts shall bring the lift to the ground floor and park with doors open on

operation of the fire alarm system.

Careful co-ordination is to be ensured between the lift installer and fire alarm system specialist.

Approved Equipment and Companies - Gent Vigilon Analogue Addressable System, GENT S-

Quad components.



7.5 Containment and Wiring

The designer shall utilise a factor +50% when sizing containment systems to allow spare capacity

for future adaptations.

Particular attention must be given to the selection of cable containment used to ensure the integrity

of the containment if subjected to fire.

7.5.1 Individual Wiring Methodology

7.5.1.1 Small Power

Final circuit wiring shall be wired in 6491B singles. Each final circuit cable in the distribution board

shall be fitted with a propriety cable ferrule system identifying the final circuit cable reference. The

cabling shall be sized in accordance with the latest edition of the IET Wiring Regulations.

Final circuits shall be installed in galvanised steel trunking and conduit within ceiling voids and

enclosed in galvanised steel conduit in walls.

Where it has been agreed with the UWE Electrical Engineer that final circuits may be wired utilizing

6242B LSF cables they shall be contained within steel wire basket and in all instances secured with

metallic cable ties.

In the plant and switch rooms final circuits shall be wired in 6491B LSF single core cables in

exposed galvanised steel trunking and conduit.

Within teaching spaces and the like Marco Elite 3 compartment White dado trunking must

accommodate CAT 6 data cables. Contrast inserts or contrasting dado lids are to be provided

behind accessories for DDA Compliance.

All ring final circuits shall be a minimum of 4mm2 conductor CSA.

7.5.1.2 Lighting

Internal lighting circuit cables shall not be less than 1.5 mm² or more than 2.5mm2 conductor CSA.

Final circuit wiring shall be LS0H single core cable, reference 6491B, enclosed in galvanised steel

trunking and conduit. The installation shall be concealed in the fabric of the building, flush down

walls and recessed in ceiling voids.

Lighting circuits containing high wattage luminaries (above 150W) shall be individually designed.

Cable sizes, protective devices shall be carefully calculated to suit the particular installation in these

cases.



MCBs and RCBOs shall be 10A Type C with the load on each MCB limited to 5A maximum.

Luminaires are to be installed and wiring following the manufactures recommends methodology.

Above suspended ceilings, lighting control modules shall be utilised and associated flexible leads.

Emergency luminaries shall be connected varied connectors to distinguish between lighting and

emergency lighting luminaires. Lighting control modules shall be located in the ceiling void, adjacent

to the luminaire fixed to the building structure/trunking, behind an accessible ceiling tile.

Where luminaries are fixed directly to the building soffit they shall be connected direct to the final

circuit wiring with the final connections using heat resistant single core wiring from terminations in

accessible conduit boxes or adaptable boxes.

7.5.1.3 Emergency Lighting

All wiring shall comply with BS5266-1.

Central battery emergency luminaire cabling shall have a minimum conductor CSA of 2.5mm2.

Wiring shall be FP200 enhanced or an equivalent approved standard and sized in accordance with

respective circuit loading.

Central battery emergency luminaire cabling shall be installed on separate or segregated

containment exclusive for the use of emergency lighting cabling.

The use of proven metal cable fixings shall be utilised throughout. Plastic will not be acceptable.

Approved Equipment and Companies – Prysmian

7.5.1.4 Fire Alarm

All wiring to comply with BS5839-1. Cabling must meet the FP200 enhanced standard or equivalent.

Fire alarm cabling shall be installed on separate or segregated containment exclusive for the use of

fire alarm cabling.

The use of proven metal cable fixings shall be utilised throughout. Plastic will not be acceptable.

Approved Equipment and Companies – Prysmian



7.5.2 Individual Containment Methodology

7.5.2.1 General

Standard galvanised steel trunking or conduit and accessories is to be used throughout the site with

heavy gauge trunking or conduit in boiler and plantrooms.

7.5.2.2 Dado Trunking

3 compartment Marco Elite 3 white PVC dado trunking, with grey lids.

7.5.2.3 SWA Cables

Heavy duty galvanized steel cable tray and cable ladders/racks.

7.5.2.4 Data and Voice

Dedicated, medium/ heavy duty galvanized steel cable basket.

7.5.2.5 Fire Alarm

Dedicated, medium/ heavy duty galvanized steel cable tray with metallic cable ties.

7.5.2.6 Security

Dedicated, medium/ heavy duty galvanized steel cable basket.

Approved Equipment and Companies –

Dado trunking - Marco Elite 3

Accessories - Honeywell MK or Crabtree

LS0H Cables - Delta Crompton, Prysmian or Draka UK

7.6 Ancillary Services

The electrical services consultant shall ensure they interface with UWE specialists for particular

ancillary systems to ensure they have fully understood UWE requirements and have made suitable

allowances within the design to capture requirements.



7.6.1 Lightning Protection System and Surge Protection

The electrical consultant shall engage a lightning protection specialist and provide them with all

required information to carry out a complete lightning protection risk assessment to ascertain the

requirements for the particular project.

The contractor shall be responsible for employing a lightning protection specialist, the lightning

protection specialist shall identify the category of lightning protection system and be responsible for

carrying out a compliant design and full installation.

Consideration shall be given by the lightning protection specialist to hide and conceal all down

conductors wherever possible.

The electrical contractor shall ensure that the cost of the lightning protection system is identified at

tender return.

Within BS EN62305, surge protection is a fundamental part of a lightning protection system. The

purpose of lightning current surge protection is to protect against dangerous sparking to minimise

the risk of loss of life and damage to the structure.

Additional co-ordinated surge protection may be required to protect sensitive electrical and

electronic equipment within the building or structure. The purpose of co-ordinated transient over-

voltage surge protection is to protect electrical and electronic systems and equipment from the

secondary effects of indirect lightning and switching transients, generated downstream of the

lightning current surge protection.

Designed to All relevant British Standards, specifically BS EN62305 and BS 7430.

Approved Equipment and Companies – Furse

7.6.2 Assistance Call Systems

Assistance call systems shall be installed in all accessible WC’s. Alarms, both audible and visual,

shall be given local to the accessible WC and also be signed to show the need to contact the main

reception within the building (if manned and applicable) or the campus gate house. This will need

to read: “When Light Flashes and Alarm Sounds, Contact East Reception on 0117 3289999 for

assistance.”

The reset button shall be located within the accessible WC.

Approved Equipment and Companies – Wandsworth



7.6.3 Wall Clocks

Unless a central system has been requested, where wall mounted clocks are required, they will be

radio controlled (MSF), with integral batteries and securely fixed in the required locations.

Approved Equipment and Companies – None specified at present

7.6.4 Electrical hand and hair dryers

Hand dryers to be installed against tiled walls.

Hand dryers shall incorporate an overheat protection device and where appropriate installed in

accordance with DDA and part M requirements.

Approved Equipment and Companies – Dyson Airblade V or Xcelerator or Airforce or Xcel Thin

Air Electrical Hair Dryers

Hair dryers shall be installed as required within RDS where appropriate installed in accordance with

DDA and part M requirements.

7.6.5 Hearing Assistance Systems

Analogue infrared transmission equipment shall be installed within each teaching room/space. The

system shall be compatible with other units installed throughout UWE.

All equipment to be housed in a locked cabinet secured to the building fabric.

All systems are to be supplied with radio microphones.

Approved Equipment and Companies – Details to follow

7.6.6 Lifts

Lifts are to be designed to comply with the Lift Regulations 1997, Part M of the Building

Regulations and all relevant parts of BSEN 81.

UWE has a legal duty to ensure the evacuation of all building occupants. In all buildings with

multiple levels, the provision of ‘evacuation lifts’ should form part of the design considerations.

Where the provision of such a lift(s) is discounted the arrangements for the evacuation of

people with a disability that would prevent them from evacuating the building unaided must be

stated.



The lift shall be large enough to allow wheelchairs to turn around and/or have space for a carer

to share the lift.

Buttons and panels should be designed and positioned to be usable from a wheelchair and by

persons with reduced manual dexterity and impaired vision (e.g. large buttons, with a good

visual contrast between the number and the button).

Lifts must have trip counters fitted.

Signage in lifts shall be large clear and contrasting.

Auditory messages and visual indication must be provided to inform users of floor levels and

door opening and closing.

Lighting levels shall be compliant with levels stated within BSEN 81.

Remote communication shall be installed in all lifts.

A lift’s location in the building shall be clearly signed.

Consideration shall be given to the provision of more than one lift in a building to allow for

repairs, maintenance and break downs.

Lifts shall be installed as full evacuation lifts to BS 9999 and useable in the event of a fire.

Lighting and power sockets within the lift shaft must be designed and installed by the lift

specialist installer.

Approved Equipment and Companies – Kone Lifts or Otis Lifts

7.6.7 CCTV, Security Alarm, Access Control and Car Park Barrier Systems

The electrical services designer shall liaise with the UWE Security Services Department and building

designer to determine the requirement for CCTV, security alarm, access control and car park barrier

systems. The designer shall incorporate these requirements into his design to be provided by the

electrical services contractor and allow for all necessary power, fire alarm interfaces, data points

etc. The designer shall further include all containment and ducting requirements.

As explained in Chapter 2, it is essential that designers consider maintenance/replacement access to

cameras.

The designer shall collate all the necessary commissioning certificates for these services for

submission to the Estates PM. Projects must allow for installation of CCTV signage which is

required in law. Security Services will advise on wording.

Approved Equipment and Companies –

CCTV/Access Control, Equipment – Pelco CCTV & Continuum Access Control

CCTV/Access Control, Installer – Schneider

Security Alarm Equipment – Galaxy

Security Alarm Equipment/Installer – Shield Fire & Security

Car Park barriers – Bebarmatic



7.6.7.1 Lessons learned

Unfortunately, there are numerous examples of the wrong type of CCTV cameras being installed

and/or being installed in the wrong location. Some of these are shown in the image below but

illustrates the need to discuss the brief with security and for CCTV provision to be shown on co-

ordinated drawings:

In addition, it is all-too-common for the legally required CCTV signage to be omitted: This signage

must be provided by the project. The wording is to be agreed with UWE Security.

7.6.8 Disabled Refuges

Disabled refuges shall comply with BS5839-9:2011, BS9999:2009 and BS8300:2009.

The electrical services designer shall liaise with the UWE Safety Unit and building designer to

determine suitable locations for disabled safe refuges. A purpose made system shall be installed

and linked to the East reception gate house. The system shall incorporate an intercom system to

allow direct conversation between the person requiring assistance and the security personnel. The

main control panel shall indicate the location of the alarm by means of an electronic mimic board.

UWE requires refuges to be on stairwells (even though British Standards do not insist on this). If

deviations are required due to other constraints, they must be managed in the same way as any

other derogation.

Approved Equipment and Companies – Baldwin Boxall

Placing a CCTV camera on the side of a building,

rather than on the corner, creates a blind spot.

Blind

Spot

There is little point installing an expensive camera

with Pan, Tilt, Zoom capability in a situation where

only a cheaper, fixed camera is required

External Wall



7.7 Energy

7.7.1 Photovoltaics (Where Required)

Refer to the requirements of BS7671, including section 712.

7.7.2 Inverters

Consultant to ensure that a voltage optimiser system, or micro inverter system i.e. an inverter

system that offers individual module control visibility on the PV array is specified.

7.7.3 Online monitoring

As a minimum, the online system must have the capability for .csv data exports of hourly

generation data.

7.7.4 Considerations

Lightning protection, earthing and protective equipotential bonding.

Data point to be located next to inverter panels.

Access for maintenance and replacement.

Battery storage where appropriate (co-ordinate with architect to ensure that suitable battery

storage is included if required).

Ensure volt drop of a.c. connection is minimised to prevent the nuisance tripping of the inverter.

7.7.5 Demand Side Response

During the design stages the MEP consultants shall consider ways of reducing non-essential energy

without affecting business operations, comfort or product quality.

This may apply during the operational hours (occupied hours) of the building or out of hours.

Items that should be considered are:

Reduce HVAC to minimum levels.



Reduce lighting to minimum levels.

Shut down select buildings or areas of buildings.

Raise set points on chillers a few degrees

Shut down laundry washers and dryers

Transfer load to back-up generator.

7.8 Commissioning

The designer shall ensure that the systems proposed are fully commissionable.

Commissioning shall be carried out to manufacturers’ recommendations.

CIBSE commissioning codes and BSRIA guides shall be adhered to.

100% of electrical installation test results shall be checked by the electrical designer. They shall also

witness the electrical installation testing to verify their accuracy.

The electrical designer shall attend and witness fire alarm commissioning work and verify sound

level tests.

The electrical designer shall attend and witness emergency lighting commissioning work and

lighting level tests to verify their accuracy.

The contractor shall present a schedule of all commissioning and dates available for inspections for

the electrical designer and UWE estates engineers.

Chapter 2 of this design guide provides an overview of the softlanding and handover processes and

drawing standards.

7.9 Management of Isolation

All works, method and procedures shall be in accordance with separate UWE procedures and

guidance. As a general procedure, the UWE term contractor will be engaged to manage isolations.



7.10 Lessons Learned

7.10.1 Tracing / Identification

The contractor shall allow for advance tracing, identification and recording of all existing LV and ELV

circuits that are identified during refurbishment works.

Any circuits that cannot be identified by the electrical contractor shall not be connected back into a

new distribution board.

Once these circuits have been left disconnected, if it can be confirmed that they are obsolete the

electrical contractor shall remove the circuits in their entirety.


Chapter 8: IT Infrastructure


C h a p t e r 8 | I T I n f r a s t u c t u r e I s s u e 1 . 3 P a g e | 1

Table of Contents

8.1 Introduction .................................................................................................... 2

8.2 Architectural Design ......................................................................................... 2

8.3 Design co-ordination & sequencing .................................................................... 3

8.4 Sequence ........................................................................................................ 4

8.4.1 Architectural Design................................................................................... 4

8.4.2 Build ........................................................................................................ 4

8.5 UWE Comms Room Specification ....................................................................... 4

8.5.1 UWE Comms Room Spec Diagram .............................................................. 6

8.5.2 Comms Rooms Ready Condition ................................................................. 7

8.6 IT Cabling Infrastructure .................................................................................. 8

8.6.1 Standards ................................................................................................. 8

8.6.2 UTP Termination and Containment.............................................................. 8

8.6.3 Short Patching .......................................................................................... 8

8.6.4 Fibre Termination and Containment ............................................................ 9

8.6.5 UTP Outlet Labelling Convention ................................................................. 9

8.6.6 Trace and Test ......................................................................................... 11

8.6.7 Fixed IP Addresses ................................................................................... 11

8.7 Wi-Fi Infrastructure ......................................................................................... 14

8.7.1 Overview ................................................................................................. 14

8.7.2 Wi-Fi Design and Installation ..................................................................... 14

8.7.3 Steps to plan, deploy & verify a Wi-Fi installation: ....................................... 14

8.7.4 Refurbishment Works ............................................................................... 16

8.7.5 Wi-Fi Access Point Placement (in order of preference) ................................. 16

8.7.6 Building Fabric ......................................................................................... 20

8.8 Construction Sites ........................................................................................... 21

8.8.1 Training and Certification .......................................................................... 21

8.8.2 Personal Protection Equipment .................................................................. 21

8.9 Security Infrastructure ..................................................................................... 22

8.9.1 Access Control and Door Monitoring ........................................................... 22

8.9.2 CCTV ....................................................................................................... 23

8.9.3 ANPR (Automatic Number Plate Recognition) .............................................. 24

8.9.4 Intruder Detection Systems (IDS) .............................................................. 24

8.9.5 Panic Alarms ............................................................................................ 24

P a r t 8 | I T I n f r a s t u c t u r e I s s u e 1 . 3 P a g e | 2

8.1 Introduction

The purpose of this document is to specify the requirements for IT Infrastructure to be

included in the design of new buildings or refurbishment works done to existing buildings

within the University of the West of England.

IT infrastructure should be considered at the same time as other services (M&E, water, etc)

to avoid considerable delays and added cost due to the rework required.

IT requirements should start to be established as early as RIBA stage 1 (i.e. when

developing the client’s brief) and requirements discussed with UWE’s IT Services from RIBA

stage 2 (when UWE stakeholders should be consulted).

UWE has a large IT estate and a wide area network consisting of both fibre and copper (CAT

6) cabling. The infrastructure is routed through a series of ducts and in-building

containment. Consideration needs to be given to breaking out of new buildings and into

existing ducts in order to run fibre back to the Core network switches. Consideration must

also be given to the positioning of Comms Rooms and containment routes so as not to

exceed the maximum cable lengths. UWE’s incumbent data cabling contractor should be

involved during the development of detailed design.

IT Infrastructure is as important as power, lighting and water, and needs to come online

early in the build cycle in order to commission BMS services, door access controls and other

building related systems. Installing building services relies on Comms Rooms being in a

ready condition, dust free, with power, lighting, fibre connections and if required provision

for cooling. The details of what constitute a ready condition, the design of comes room, and

other requirements are outlined in the following sections.

8.2 Architectural Design

Design is key to the successful implementation of IT Services and to the smooth running of

the project.

The Architects for a new build or UWE Surveyor involved in refurbishments should consider

the following:

How will Fibre Optic cables come into the building? Most buildings will require

two cables to enter the building from diverse routes.


What duct routes are required and how will these connect to existing UWE

duct routes? Diverse duct routes will usually be required to provide resilience.

Where will the Comms Rooms be positioned? Comms Rooms need to comply

with the minimum specification outlined later in this document. Cable lengths need to

comply with the industry standards, meaning there may be a requirement for

multiple Comms Rooms.

Where will the network outlets go and what are the cable containment

routes required to get to them? The containment routes from Comms Room to

network outlets can be considerably longer than the physical distance.

What will the network outlets be used for? What an outlet is used for will

determine how the network switch port is configured.

8.3 Design co-ordination & sequencing

The sequence of the build or refurbishment works is agreed between the principal contractor

and the University but these discussions begin in the pre-construction phase while the

programme and construction phase plan are prepared. UWE IT Services need to be engaged

as early as possible in the process in order to explain the pre-requisites and dependencies

for getting the building online at the earliest opportunity.

Before foundations are laid, the duct routes should be known and accessible. Past

experience has shown that the location of the contractor compounds and placement of plant

equipment sometimes fails to take into account the building of and access to duct routes

(e.g. positioning site cabins on top of manhole covers). This can introduce delays and

additional costs when fibres need to be run into the building.

UWE IT Engineers are the only personnel permitted to install network switches and only

once Fibre cables have been installed and connected back to appropriate Core Network

switches. Comms Rooms must meet the minimum specification required before equipment is

installed.

The installation of BMS devices, sensors, cameras, access control, etc. can only be installed

once the Network switches have been installed and when any fixed IP addresses required

have been allocated.

UWE IT Services will install Wi-Fi and Audio Visual equipment following the installation of

the network switches. The installation of further equipment, PCs, Printers, etc. is usually

done following handover of the building from the principal contractor to the University.


8.4 Sequence

8.4.1 Architectural Design

1. Building duct routes specified, including break out of building and break into existing ducts.

2. Comms Room placement agreed, taking account of cable lengths and containment routes.

3. Comms Rooms specified, taking account of UWE requirements, see Section 4.

8.4.2 Build

4. Contractor compound and plant equipment placements not restricting access to existing cable and other service ducts.

5. Comms Rooms in ready state (with power, lighting, secure door, cooling if required) to enable commissioning of building management systems, etc.

6. Fibre Optic cables installed and connected to the UWE core network switches. 7. Structured Copper (Cat 6) cables installed and terminated at the patch panel (see

note below) 8. Network switches configured and installed. 9. BMS, Access Control, CCTV, etc. devices installed and commissioned 10. Wi-Fi and AV equipment installed

Note: The installation and configuration of network switches must be done at least one

week (5 working days) prior to use by end users. The cabling contractor should therefore be

working to a completion date at least two weeks prior to the end date. Failure to allow

enough time for the installation, configuration and testing of the network may result in

delays to the project.

8.5 UWE Comms Room Specification

Room

Configuration

Specific

element

Implementation to be defined by the project, but must

meet the minimum requirements as per diagram below

Electrical Distribution

Boards New Comms Rooms must have dedicated electrical circuits for

Racks

Lighting

Cooling

Each circuit should be individually protected to avoid problems

affecting other circuits.

Small Power 2x 32amp Commando Sockets located as per diagram below

Rack mounted sequencing PDU strips with the network

connection patched into the patch panel.

Lighting Lighting must ensure illumination of both the front and the rear

of the cabinets. It may be necessary to place lighting off centre.


Containment Determined on a project by project basis. Cable entry from above the cabinet is preferable. . See details regarding ceilings

below.

Fire Detection As specified by UWE building specifications

Environment Temperatures in the Comms Rooms must never exceed 26°C.

Mechanical Cooling Cooling is required and must be N+1;

Wall mounted split units should be installed on the wall facing the front of the cabinet. UWE is investigating the possibility/

technical solutions for reducing the temperature to 22°C if an

operative is working in the room.

Monitoring of the AC, room temperatures and the ability to

control the units remotely by the UWE Facilities Department

should be incorporated into the design.

Pipework Pipework containing liquid of any kind or drains should not be

above or below Comms Rooms.

Fabric Room

Placement

Direct access to the Comms Rooms is a basic requirement. It

must be possible to access the Comms Room without going

through or via another room.

The comms room should not be an access route to any other

room or space, including riser cupboards, since any doors other than the entrance would restrict usable space and cabinet

positioning.

Security Comms Rooms should be fitted with the UWE standard door

access control, but also have a bypass key override facility in

the event of power failure.

Ceiling

False Ceilings should not be fitted to Comms rooms. The fitting

of a ceiling impedes the installation of network cables, and the

use of cable trays and other containment.

Cabinet Sizes Standard 42U full size cabinets 800x1000mm should be used

Switches Access layer switches to be specified, sourced and installed by

UWE IT Services.

Cabinet

Placement

First cabinet must be placed against the wall as per diagram

(Figure 1.)

Technical

Information

Cabling Comms Rooms should be positioned so that cables between the

Comms Room and data outlets do not exceed 90m.

Cabling must comply with Cat 6 industry standards

Single Mode Fibre to cabinets must originate from two of the core network nodes. The rooms which contain core network

nodes must be confirmed by UWE IT Services.


The two fibre cables must travel along diverse routes and enter the building at different locations. This reduces the risk of a

single cut impacting services.

UPS

Requirements

Where UPS is required for Business continuity, the UPS should

be specified by IT Services.

Patching All outlets must be patched into network switches using 20cm

patch leads.

Good Practice E22 IT and Comms Room Energy Consumption -

Dedicated IT and communication rooms have a calculated DCIE (data centre infrastructure efficiency) of 70% or greater.

8.5.1 UWE Comms Room Spec Diagram

The UWE Comms Room Diagram is available as a separate document. Note the 3000mm

size is clear space. Pillars, containment for other services, ladders for roof access, and any

encroachment is not permitted.

3000

30

00

800

10

00

1000

400

Commando Sockets

Cabinet 1 Cabinet 2

Wal

l Sp

ace

for

Elec

tric

al D

istr

ibu

tio

n

Bo

ard

s an

d/o

r A

cces

s C

on

tro

l Un

its

3000

1000

View A

View A

1000

Plan View

1000

Commando Sockets

Lighting Lighting


1000mm

1000mm

1000mm

3000mm3000mm

800mm800mm

Figure 1.

8.5.2 Comms Rooms Ready Condition

Network equipment will only be installed once the Comms Room is in a ready condition. Due to the security risks associated with IT networks, only authorized UWE IT staff can install network equipment, and only when the following conditions are met:

The comms room door must be secure using a UWE standard plant room Kaba lock. (Please note that use of a Kaba lock is as an interim before the access control system is commissioned)

Power to the comms room is constant, there are no fluctuations or outages beyond what constitutes everyday tolerances. If contractors are aware that further planned power outages will be necessary in a given Comms Room after switch installation, this must be declared in advance to UWE IT Services.

The specified comms cabinet/s are installed and fibres are terminated and labelled at

both the cabinet end and the Core network ends.

Lighting is installed and provides illumination of both the front and back of the cabinet.

Cooling, if required, is installed, tested and shown to provide the specified temperatures.

The level of dust in the room is minimal and there are no further works that will generate significant levels of dust.


8.6 IT Cabling Infrastructure

8.6.1 Standards

The three standards are formally titled ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.1-2001, -B.2-2001, and -B.3-

2001.

Copper cabling in new buildings to be CAT 6 and cabling installation will be provided with a

manufacturer warranty for 25 years. New buildings shall be provided with blanket Wi-Fi

coverage. Responsibility for the Wi-Fi design and specification is with UWE IT Services.

UWE Facilities must make contractors aware of fibre duct routes and access panels across

the UWE campuses, where the contractor work may interfere with these services. Where the

contractor is not aware, they must seek instruction from UWE Facilities.

8.6.2 UTP Termination and Containment

Requirements for any UTP cabling are as follows:

Cables to be terminated in the communications room on 24 port RJ-45 patch panels. Cables to be terminated at the outlet on an RJ-45 outlet with spring loaded shutters. Outlets to be white plastic, installed in either flush mounted wall outlets or within

dado trunking. The containment to be pervasive, continuous and allow for 50% more cables than

originally installed. The containment paths must follow routes in accessible areas, such as corridors. A blue 3m patch cord is to be provided for each outlet.

8.6.3 Short Patching

A Short Patching policy has been adopted for access layer network switches in all UWE ITS

comms rooms. Short patching is a one patch panel port to one switch port arrangement that

enables quick indentification of port numbers and reduces the time to configure and make

ports available for users. A one to one arrangement means for the number of outlets

installed, there needs to be a corresponding number of network switch ports available. The

installation of fifty network outlets into a building will necessitate the installation of two 48

port switches.

Patch Panel

Network Switch

http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/American_National_Standards_Institute


8.6.4 Fibre Termination and Containment

Any fibre optic cable installation will:

Only single mode optical fibre (OS2) to be used. Quantities and end points to be confirmed as this is project specific. All to be advised by UWE IT Services.

Fibre optic cables will be terminated as follows into connectors to be specified by ITS dependent on application.

Fibre optic cables are to be installed in 24-way patch panels at the first easily accessible and visible top slot of communication cabinets.

The containment will be pervasive, continuous and allow for 50% more cables than originally installed. (Containment can be shared between the UTP and fibre installations)

All fibre optic cable installations are to be tested using OTDR and the results supplied to UWE IT Services after commissioning.

8.6.5 UTP Outlet Labelling Convention

Each network outlet must be labelled (black text on yellow label) with a unique reference, as

illustrated in Figure 3.

At the Comms Room end, the unique reference should be the name of the room containing the outlet, and the increment number. The increment number is a three-digit number with leading zeroes, assigned by the cable installer and identifying the actual outlet within the room.

At the outlet end, the unique reference should be the name of the Comms Room where the cable to the outlet is patched, and the same increment.

P a r t 8 | I T I n f r a s t u c t u r e I s s u e 1 . 3 P a g e | 1 0

Room (e.g. 2D053) Outlet

Comms Room (e.g. 2B060)

2B060/001 2B060/006

2D053/001 2D053/002 2D053/003 2D053/004 2D054/005 2D054/006

Comms Room Ref. Increment

Room Ref. Increment

Room (e.g. 2D054) Outlet

IncrementComms Room Ref.

Room Ref. Increment

Thus for the 6th network connection in Comms Room 2B060, where the outlet is positioned

in room 2D054, at the outlet end the label will read 2B060/006 and at the Comms Room end

the label will read 2D054/006.

Note: there is no difference between the labelling of data outlets and telephone outlets.

Data and telephone cables are patched to different locations within the Comms Room, but

labels should still fit in with, and remain unique to, the data outlet labelling. For example, if

an outlet in room 2D054 designated for telephone use is the 71st outlet in comms room

2D060 it will still be labelled 2D060/071 at the outlet end and 2D054/071 at the comms

room end.

It should also be noted that, for each comms room within a building, the labelling can start

with other end/001 since the uniqueness comes at the outlet end where the comms room is

specified as part of the label.


8.6.6 Trace and Test

All switch ports must be configured with description information and the VLAN appropriate

for the equipment being connected to that port, i.e. a BMS device is connected to the BMS

VLAN, a Staff PC is connected to the staff VLAN and a student PC is connected to the

student VLAN.

In order to configure the switch port, it is necessary to know which network outlet is

connected to which switch port, and in turn what will be plugged into the network outlet.

The standard Trace and Test should contain the information in the following format

Note: The Trace and Test Spreadsheet must only be sent to UWE IT Services following the

successful testing of outlet to switch port.

8.6.7 Fixed IP Addresses

The majority of equipment connected to the UWE network is allocated an IP address

automatically. However, equipment to control building systems, CCTV, access control, etc.

must be allocated a fixed IP address.

The building contractor will liaise with the building systems supplier to configure and install

their equipment, usually before the building is handed over. In order to configure the


devices prior to install, a fixed IP address will need to be allocated by UWE IT Services.

Information about the device needs to be recorded in the IP addressing tool.

The following information is required before an IP address can be allocated:

System Type (e.g. CCTV, Access Control, BMS). Room Location (e.g. 2E007, 1E023).

Device Name (e.g. FR_X_2XC200_NORTH_ENTRANCE, FR_E_1E009_ACX1). The naming convention must be agreed in advance, see para Error! Reference source not found.

Network Outlet ID (e.g. 2B087/026) – see note below

Note: It may not be possible to provide the network Outlet ID until the device is physically installed on site. It is critical to provide the Outlet ID as without it UWE IT Services will not be able to configure the outlet for the VLAN appropriate for the device, i.e. the outlet for a CCTV needs to be configured to connect to the CCTV network.

8.6.7.1 Fixed IP Allocation Spreadsheet

The following spreadsheet has been created to enable the building systems devices to be

recorded by the supplier before being sent to UWE IT Services for IP addresses to be

allocated.

8.6.7.2 Device Naming Conventions

The building system devices need to be allocated a Device Name that meets UWE’s building

device naming conventions.

References for UWE sites are as follows

Frenchay – FR

Bower Ashton – BA

Glenside – GL

8.6.7.3 Close Circuit Television - CCTV

The name is made up of three elements separated by underscores:

<Site> <Block> <Viewing Info>

Here, <Viewing Info> is a text description which must be agreed in advance for each

camera with the UWE Facilities Technical Team Manager and UWE Security.


Example 1 - FR_Block_U_Bar_Main_Entrance

Refers to CCTV in U block that focuses on the bar main entrance

Example 2 - FR_S_Block_Near_Rear_Bike_Park

Refers to CCTV in S block focusing at rear bike park

8.6.7.4 Access Control

The name is made up of four elements separated by underscores:

<Site> <Block> <Room Number> <Access Control Number>

Example 1 - FR_A_2A026_ACX1

Refers to a single access controller in room 2A026

Example 2 - FR_B_4B015_ACX1

FR_B_4B015_ACX2

FR_B_4B015_ACX3

Refers to three access controllers in 4B015

8.6.7.5 Building Management System – BMS

The contractor must confirm with the UWE Facilities BMS Manager

8.6.7.6 Monitoring & Targeting (M&T)

The contractor must confirm with the UWE Facilities Technical Team Manager

8.6.7.7 Intruder Alarm System

The contractor must confirm with the UWE Facilities Technical Team Manager


8.7 Wi-Fi Infrastructure

8.7.1 Overview

UWE provides ubiquitous Wi-Fi across the campuses. This service is expected to be fast,

reliable and provide seamless access to teaching and learning resources regardless of the

devices in use.

Wi-Fi Access Points (APs) are strategically placed in buildings to maximise coverage and

minimise interference caused by other APs and building materials. Correct placement of

these APs within a building fabric is key to providing a high quality and reliable service.

This section outlines best practice for the location of Wi-Fi APs. These requirements must be

fed into the design for both new buildings as well as refurbishment projects.

8.7.2 Wi-Fi Design and Installation

To provide the quality of Wi-Fi coverage demanded by students and staff at the University,

UWE IT Services will complete a detailed Wi-Fi design. It is important that UWE ITS are

involved at the initial building design stage to ensure that Wi-Fi design is an integral element

of new buildings and refurbishments. Wi-Fi designs that occur after the building works are

complete increase cost and time and often compromise on coverage and aesthetics.

It is important the note that any changes to the building design must be

communicated to UWE IT Services.

8.7.3 Steps to plan, deploy & verify a Wi-Fi installation:

1. The UWE Estates Surveyor / Project Manager should provide UWE IT Services with each

iteration of building drawings in .dwg format as soon as they are available. The .dwg

drawings should include occupancy numbers for each room and the room number

designations (if known).

2. UWE IT Services staff need to meet with the UWE Estates Surveyor, Architect and UWE’s

incumbent cabling contractor to further understand the design. In particular…

Planned usage of each room – Social, GPT (General Purpose Teaching), etc.

Footfall figures in each area

Materials used in building fabric – walls, floors, windows

Type of ceiling – suspended, raft, open/industrial

Any other potential interference sources, i.e. microwave ovens, PIR Sensors

Any design anomalies or aspirations

3. UWE IT Services will create a predictive Wi-Fi coverage survey (see figure below) using

Ekahau modelling software, based on the building drawings and requirements. The

predictive survey determines the type of Wi-Fi access points required and their optimum


location. UWE IT Services will always install Wi-Fi Access point that meet the latest IEEE

ratified standard.

Figure 4.

4. UWE IT Services will provide a building drawing marked with the Wi-Fi access point

locations to the UWE Estates Surveyor. It is then the responsibility of the building project

team to determine the most appropriate containment routes, cable runs, etc. to the

Access Point locations, ensuring that cable lengths are within specifications.

5. The number of locations to provide coverage will in turn determine the number of Wi-Fi

Access Points units required. Building projects fund the purchase of Wi-Fi APs, therefore

UWE ITS will require a project cost code before the APs can be procured.

6. Following a successful trace and test by the cabling contractor of the network outlets

designated for the Access Points, UWE IT Services will configure the outlets, and prepare

the Access Points. Each Access Point is labelled with a location and outlet identifier. It is

imperative that the correct Access Point is installed in its associated location.

7. The cabling contractor will install the Access Points once the building is dust free and

network outlets / Access Points are configured and labelled. Following successful

installation, the cabling contractor must inform UWE IT Services, who will bring the units

into service.

8. UWE IT Services will then carry out a post installation survey using Ekahau modelling

software. This survey verifies that the Wi-Fi installation delivers the required service and

coverage detailed in the predictive survey. To perform the survey UWE IT Services will

require access to all rooms within the new building/refurbishment project. Therefore

the post installation survey should take place after building handover from the principal

contractor but before occupation.

9. If all Wi-Fi coverage is as required, the coverage maps are published internally. If there

are areas of limited or no coverage, UWE IT Services will work with the Estate Surveyor

to retro fit additional Access Points.


8.7.4 Refurbishment Works

Where refurbishment works are planned in an area that already contains Wi-Fi Access

Points, the units must be removed by UWE’s incumbent cabling contractor and given to UWE

ITS for safe keeping before any building works start. Following completion of works, the

process steps 6 and onwards apply.

For more extensive refurbishment works, removals of walls, changes to materials (glass

partitions) it may be necessary to carry out all the steps above.

8.7.5 Wi-Fi Access Point Placement (in order of preference)

Access Points require a single network outlet. For ceiling mounted units, the outlet should be

within 300mm of Access Point to negate the use of surface mounted containment (Figure 8).

For wall mounted units, the outlet should be within 200mm of the Access Point.

8.7.5.1 Option 1 – Ceiling Mount

Access Points should be placed beneath suspended ceiling tiles (Figure 5) on the structural

beams of a building (Figure 6) or directly to the ceiling fabric (Figure 7). They must be

mounted using manufacturer designed brackets. These are the most preferred options and

should be encouraged in all design specifications as they provide opportunity for the best

Wi-Fi coverage.

Figure 5.


Figure 6.

Figure 7.

Figure 8. Ceiling Mounted 2B060/006

300mm

8.7.5.2 Option 2 – Semi-exposed Ceiling

If a semi-exposed ceiling is specified then APs should be mounted on ceiling tile “rafters” or

“Islands” (Figure 9.)


Figure 9.

8.7.5.3 Option 3 – Mount to Containment

Another option is to be mount AP’s to wire basket trunking using manufacturer designed

mounting brackets (Figure 10).

Figure 10.

8.7.5.4 Option 4 – Wall Mounting

Wall mounting should only be considered if the first three options are not possible. The

vertical surface holding the AP will absorb a high proportion of the RF Signal and reduce the

effective coverage. APs can be mounted to a vertical surface with the use of third party

brackets (Figure 11).


Figure 11.

The network outlet for wall mounted Access Points should be within 200mm, where the

outlet is also being mounted to the wall. Access Points and network outlets should be at a

miniumum height of 2.4m (2400mm) (Figure 12).

Figure 12. Wall Mounted

2400mm

200mm


8.7.6 Building Fabric

The building fabric and materials used can severely hamper the effectiveness of Wi-Fi

Access Points.

Large internal features made of metal or glass should be avoided, as they cause major RF

reflections which degrade Wi-Fi performance significantly.

Suspended ceilings provide the best options for mounting Wi-Fi Access Points, but

consideration must be given to servicing and replacing the units. Placement on very high

ceilings and atriums requiring specialist height access equipment is not permissible.

Wi-Fi is most definitely a service that users expect to have available regardless of where

they are on campus. APs need to be in ‘line of sight’ of the users device to maximise

connectivity and reliability. With this in mind aesthetics must be considered secondary to the

placement of APs in all circumstances. Access Points cannot be hidden to satisfy aesthetic

aspirations.

As of September 2017, the Access Points used to provide UWE Wi-Fi are only manufactured

in White.

Where possible the following should not be used or Wi-Fi Access Points should not be

located within 2 metres of them.

Metal sheeting of any kind

Chain Link fencing or wire sheeting

Glass partitions

Metal laced safety glass

Microwave Ovens

DECT phone transmitters

PIR Security Sensors

Radio Microphone Systems

Bluetooth enabled devices of any kind

Computer/Display monitors and projectors

Surfaces containing a large body of water, i.e. fountains etc

Plant (Air Conditioning, Electrical)

Other Wi-Fi Access Points not part of the same Enterprise

Concrete or Metal Pillars or structures containing rebar


8.8 Construction Sites

The majority of buildings constructed on the UWE campuses have a requirement for building

management systems, access control and CCTV requiring connections to the site network.

These systems are usually installed by the contractor prior to the building being handed over

to UWE. In order to commission the systems, UWE IT Services network engineers need to

install network equipment into the designated comms room whilst the site is still a

construction site managed by the contractor.

8.8.1 Training and Certification

Access to construction sites is controlled by the contractor and therefore UWE IT engineers

must adhere to the Health and Safety requirements specified by the Contractor. All UWE IT

engineers that require access to a live construction site have CSCS site visitor cards (or the

previous CSCS Computer Systems Installer cards), have attended the CITB Health and

Safety Awareness course within the last 5 years and will undertake a site induction.

If for any reason further conditions are required in order to allow access, the Contractor

must make these known to UWE IT Services at the beginning of the build. Failure to do this

may result in delays to the Project.

8.8.2 Personal Protection Equipment

UWE IT Services carry out installations of network equipment into designated construction

sites on a regular basis. It is expected that Personal Protection Equipment (PPE) is required

to be worn. In general, the following is used within UWE:

Hi Vis vest Safety shoes or boots with steel toe cap

Helmet Goggles Gloves appropriate to the task

Where the PPE requirements are above and beyond that specified above, the Contractor

must make these requirements known to UWE IT Services at the beginning of the build.

Failure to do this may result in delays to the Project.


8.9 Security Infrastructure

The overarching security strategy is set out in part 3 of the design guide. This section

explains specific elements of the strategy in more depth where it impacts on the IT

infrastructure. The design guide chapter which deals with Electrical Engineering Design

provides details about suppliers to be used and, of course, electrical system design.

8.9.1 Access Control and Door Monitoring

This system enables UWE to employ a degree of security whilst maintaining access for staff

and students – 24/7 if required.

The access control system can be set-up to enable different groups access at different times

- for example a certain group, say staff, can be granted access 6am to midnight whilst

undergraduates given 8am to 7pm and postgraduates a different time schedule again. The

occupying client is responsible for ensuring the necessary risk assessments are carried out

for access outside of core UWE working hours.

Each door can be set up individually and this is carried out in agreement with the occupying

client. On going amendments to this can be implemented by the Security Systems Team in

liaison with the occupying client, ideally via a few key client contacts.

In addition to the access control doors the access control system can be used to monitor

doors, such as fire exits, and trigger an alarm in the 24/7 control room at Frenchay if the

door security is breached. The alarms will be set-up to trigger on high risk doors (e.g.

Nuclear Suite) and on all perimeter doors outside of core hours.

Access control should come on-line on all perimeter doors at an agreed time and UWE Cards

used by staff and students to gain access after that time. This is to maintain a suitable level

of security outside of core UWE hours whilst enabling staff and students to continue to use

the space. In general when a building is relatively quiet those using the building feel safer if

they know the building is secure.

Access control to be installed on the following doors:

All perimeter entrances Where practical on all internal doors which mark the perimeter of a Faculty/Service

area, e.g. HAS internal perimeter doors Rooms that require restricted access but to a significant number of people (where a

key lock is not suitable), e.g. BPTC, Postgraduate spaces etc. Plant rooms Comms rooms Where specialist, high value or desirable equipment is installed Central postrooms Central stores accessed by large numbers of people, e.g. stationery stores


Door Monitoring to be installed on the following doors:

All external doors other than entrances to be monitored via the access control system, e.g. all fire exits

High risk areas with access control are to be identified in liaison with the occupying client

and alarms set-up in the 24/7 control room.

Access control will NOT be installed on the following as a matter of course:

Lecture theatres 24/7 PC labs (unless they contain specialist, high value or desirable equipment is

installed) Teaching rooms Meeting rooms Offices Cleaners’ cupboards

8.9.2 CCTV

Although CCTV acts as a good deterrent, increases the feeling of safety and security, and

can on occasion be useful in providing images for identification and evidential purposes it is

neither practical nor cost effective to cover all areas of a campus.

Where practically possible CCTV will be installed and deployed in the following areas:

To meet licensing requirements Bike parks and racks Site perimeter vehicular access and egress

General perimeter coverage for pedestrian access to site Main entrances to buildings 24 hour IT labs Areas with expensive/desirable equipment, e.g. iMacs Bus stops Taxi rank Main walkways and thoroughfares e.g. from campus to Village (Frenchay), FBL new

build atrium Key vehicle barriers East Reception (24 hour) Cash Office ‘Hotspots’ based on incidents/crime/use of campus Internal spaces as discussed and agreed with occupying clients and dependant on

site specific use .e.g. FBL Trading Room

Please note it is not the intention of the CCTV system to cover car parks across campuses.

There are some existing bicycle racks which cannot be covered by CCTV as there is no data

to these areas, the Travel Team have been made aware of this.

For technical details of the CCTV installation please see the Electrical Engineering chapter.


8.9.3 ANPR (Automatic Number Plate Recognition)

Not currently deployed across UWE, to be explored as a security addition.

8.9.4 Intruder Detection Systems (IDS)

Door monitoring on all external doors via the access control system will be used to monitor

any out-of-hours breach. This can be used to monitor a security breach on a fire exit whilst

the building is still in use, making it more effective than blanket intruder detection cover

which can only be deployed once the building is unoccupied and locked down.

Intruder detection systems will not be deployed in buildings that are likely to operate 24/7.

Intruder detection will only be installed in the following areas:

Buildings that are remote and stand alone and which are being locked down each night, e.g. historically this applied to Bristol Business Park

Ground floor areas and any areas on upper floors that may be vulnerable such as accessable from a canopy/flat roof.

Rooms that may be a particular target, e.g. alcohol stores, cash office, high value/desirable equipment stores etc.

8.9.5 Panic Alarms

These are to be installed and linked back to the Control Room at Frenchay in the following

areas:

Receptions Information Points Cash Office SPS Interview Rooms


Chapter 9: Landscaping, Biodiversity & Infrastructure


Chapter 9 | Landscaping, Biodiversity and Infrastructure Issue 1.3 Page | 1

Table of Contents

9.1 Scope ..................................................................................................... 2

9.1.1 General notes on landscape design and aesthetics ....................................... 3

9.2 Soft landscaping ...................................................................................... 4

9.2.1 Biodiversity ............................................................................................... 4

9.2.2 Examples of poor practice .......................................................................... 5

9.2.3 Temporary works impacting on soft landscaping .......................................... 6

9.2.4 Memorials ................................................................................................. 6

9.3 Hard Landscaping .................................................................................... 7

9.3.1 Pavements/Footways/Cycleways ................................................................. 7

9.3.2 Specifications for ‘private streets’ ................................................................ 9

9.3.3 Car Parking .............................................................................................. 10

9.3.4 Motorcycle Parking ................................................................................... 10

9.3.5 Cycle Parking ........................................................................................... 10

9.3.6 Barrier Controls ........................................................................................ 11

9.3.7 Designing for deliveries, maintenance & emergencies .................................. 11

9.3.8 Pollution prevention .................................................................................. 11

9.3.9 Underground Services ............................................................................... 11

9.3.10 Fire hydrants............................................................................................ 13

9.3.11 Fire hydrant and drain covers .................................................................... 13

9.4 Street Furniture ..................................................................................... 14

9.4.1 External seating ....................................................................................... 14

9.5 External Events...................................................................................... 14

9.6 Waste Handling & Storage Facilities ........................................................ 15



9.1 Scope

The purpose of this Chapter is to inform designers (internal and external to UWE) of UWE’s

approach to Landscaping and Biodiversity, taking into account;

The requirements of UWE’s Environment management system (ISO14001:2015);

UWE’s Sustainability plan 2020 goals (which includes a Biodiversity action plan and

Resource management plan) and;

The need for climate change adaption as a forethought.

The UWE sustainability team has responsibility for; Sustainability; Biodiversity, soft

landscaping, hard landscaping and tree planting; Waste and recycling facilities.

This team is a key stakeholder in the design and planning of any project which alters or

impacts on external spaces and should be consulted from RIBA stage 2.

The need for Climate Change adaptation is becoming a pressing issue. Effective design will

increase UWE’s resilience for coping with resource security (such as fresh water and fuel)

and the impact of changing, and more severe, weather events.

As UWE is adhering to requirements of the ISO14001:2015, project teams must adopt

sustainable procurement practices and evaluate the life cycle costs of a project (discussed

elsewhere in the design guide). Sustainability measures contribute to life cycle savings.

Early consideration should be given to the possibility of creating external teaching or event

spaces. There is an emphasis on the unification of the street furniture with the hard/soft

landscaping, harmonising the built environment and natural environment. This also

contributes to a ‘UWE Bristol’ feel and recognition of the Campus Environment.

Frenchay campus is under biodiversity pressure as a result of increased development on and

around the campus since 2012. Biodiversity is of utmost importance for social, economic

and environmental reasons, but also in terms of wellbeing, understanding the value of

nature, and providing a positive learning and working space for our staff and students.



9.1.1 General notes on landscape design and aesthetics

The designer’s approach to the public realm and the external spaces in general should be to

create sustainable as well as useful spaces which accommodate the necessary functions of

urban life and living. The external areas should provide safe linkages to existing

areas/features, safe areas for teaching and leisure activities. All spaces should be designed

to be welcoming and of high sustainable quality that encourage their use.

Pre-existing external spaces should be enhanced through the use of variations in the visual

character, orientation, scale, dimensions utilized through to the choice of materials for both

hard and soft landscaping (with a view to increase biodiversity where possible).

The design team must consider future management of the external spaces and formulate an

external spaces management plan for future maintenance within UWE’s ability and

resources. This may form part of an access and maintenance strategy.

At the early design stages historic and original environmental features should be taken in to

account such as fresh water habitats to either incorporate them in the design or relocate

them to a suitable location.

While landscape designers should be aware of CEEQUAL (http://www.ceequal.com/) UWE

does not currently require formal CEEQUAL assessments of hard/soft landscape design. By

consulting with UWE from the early stages of design (RIBA stage 2 onwards or equivalent),

we can ensure designs are sustainable and meets UWE’s own standards.

Design teams should be aware that external spaces are often forgotten about, especially

during refurbishments, or spaces may be missed in between two new buildings. It is

essential that projects carefully consider where their boundaries start and stop. Where

appropriate, these boundaries may need to be extended to include a wider, external area,

ensuring that it is accessible and aesthetically in keeping with the project.

Planting schemes must maintain good lines of visibility through the campus, in order to

maintain the safety of drivers and pedestrians.

http://www.ceequal.com/



9.2 Soft landscaping

The university requires the principal designer/contractor to adhere to the National Plant

Specification guidelines when design and implementing soft landscaping.

Tree planting should be adopted in future developments where appropriate to soften the

outline of the built form. Tree selection should be on the basis of appropriate form and

growing habit, but all to be clear stem to allow visual sightlines to be maintained.

Indigenous tree species should always be considered first if appropriate, deciduous

woodland is the type of woodland across the Bristol/South Gloucester region.

Tree selection should be done in consultation with the grounds manager to ensure that any

trees or flora planted is in keeping with the campus as well as in line with grounds team

maintenance ability and UWE’s ambition to increase and enhance biodiversity.

The grounds team will support the design team to comply with ISO14001:2015 standard

clause ‘emergency, preparedness and response’. This requires use of planting of indigenous

trees and flora to decrease soil erosion and interception of precipitation to reduce land

saturation/flooding events. Considerate landscape design will reduce the potential impact of

changing severity of weather events.

Tree planting benefits through solar shading, wind screening, water processing and

retention within the area. Designers should consider to where possible enhance or included

green spaces and trees to increase air quality through ‘carbon sinks’.

The access and maintenance strategy (see Chapter 2) needs to consider how watering and

general ground maintenance will be done efficiently and safely.

9.2.1 Biodiversity

UWE campuses are increasingly becoming urban environments and being encompassed in

surrounding residential/commercial developments. Because of this, biodiversity has to be

carefully considered to ensure that the maximum social, environmental and economic

benefits will be achieved in the design stage through to the build.

At the design stage the designers should consult the universities’ Biodiversity Action Plan for

planting schemes that are appropriate to the campus.

Flower planting schemes should seek to plant ‘nectar rich’ native species. 10% of planting

must be ‘edible’ (improving environmental interaction and wellbeing).

The precise layout and location will be determined in consultation with the grounds manager

to ensure there is no potential for inedible berries/plants to be mistaken for edible varieties.



9.2.2 Examples of poor practice

Poor care of grassed areas

used to store materials or

as a traffic route. Grass

re-seeding has not taken.

The original turf could

have been taken up and

stored for re-laying.

A trench was dug

but not properly

reinstated

causing a ‘scar’.

Tree roots were

suffocated by excavated

soil. These trees

ultimately had to be

removed at a cost to

the University.

While these examples may appear

to be predominantly the fault of

contractors, they can be traced

back to poor specifications, lack of

involvement of the sustainability

team and poor planning (in terms

of agreeing traffic management

routes or storage locations).

Trees were poorly stored

(kept in sacks in the open for

6 weeks during the summer)

and planted. Combined with

poor aftercare, this led to a

total of 5 trees being

removed & replaced.



9.2.3 Temporary works impacting on soft landscaping

The grounds manager must be consulted on:

Operations or temporary works which impact on soft landscaping must be done in

consultation with the Grounds Manager (e.g. use of heavy equipment or creation of

temporary footpaths or compound space on grassed areas).

Proposed locations for stockpiling of soil

The Grounds Manager will offer guidance to ensure the least environment impact, including

advising on Root Protection Areas (RPA) and the health and condition of existing trees. It is

important that all surrounding trees are considered within the scope of the project, not just

those that fall immediately within the boundary of specific works. The University expects

that BS 5837:2012 ‘Trees in relation to design, demolition and construction –

Recommendations’ are followed in their entirety throughout the whole project.

The grounds team will assist in developing the project specification, physically marking out

RPA’s and will ensure the planning includes actions for the protection (e.g. temporary

reinforcement of grassed areas) and remediation of the campus to the original (or better)

state. This consultation should take place prior to ground works starting. Project teams will

be encouraged to look at improvements surrounding their project boundary.

9.2.4 Memorials

UWE does not promote or encourage the use of ‘lasting memorials’ such as plaques, tree

plantings or benches in memory of individuals who have passed away.

The University Chaplain has identified that such measures can feel outdated or ‘tokenistic’,

especially to young adults. In an age of technology and mass communication, students

often use social media to perform a similar function.

There are practical challenges to maintaining and tracking lasting memorials, and

inadvertent loss or damage can be distressing and disrespectful to families and friends.

Instead, UWE encourages the use of memorial events and there are no specific design

considerations that are needed to support these.



9.3 Hard Landscaping

The proposed layout of roads, footpaths and other hard landscaping must be agreed with

the UWE transport team. They will help assess the impact on traffic movement around the

campus, the impact on crossing points etc. and the potential consequences for disabled

people.

In general, designers should comply with the Department for Transport’s Manual for Streets

(Parts 1 and 2). However, these are largely goal setting and this section offers more UWE-

specific guidelines.

9.3.1 Pavements/Footways/Cycleways

2m wide on all side (which will enable two wheelchairs to pass at the same time). Routes

should be made as inclusive as possible by:

Avoiding circuitous routes for wheelchair users.

Placing dropped kerbs with tactile paving at convenient and appropriate locations (which

will also assist porters, catering staff etc. using trolleys etc.).

Achieving gradients that comply with BS 8300.

A strong tonal difference should be achieved between pavement and roadway and

between street furniture and the surrounding paving.

Careful consideration must be given to the use of ‘stripes’ (e.g. different coloured

modules creating striped bands running across pavements, courtyards etc.) and they

should be avoided. For example, for someone with a visual impairment, a dark strip

could create the false perception of shadows and a kerb line.

Resin bonded paths are prohibited at UWE.

UWE does not currently desire shared spaces (where vehicles and pedestrians share the

same space), although this is a decision that could be revisited.

9.3.1.1 What UWE means by a ‘flush’, dropped kerb

For the avoidance of any doubt, a flush, dropped kerb means a 0mm upstand.

9.3.1.2 Pavement Specification

All the following specifications are taken from Gloucestershire County Council manual for

Gloucestershire Streets (4th edition), 01/04/16. They are purely indicative.



If paviours are to be used they should meet the relevant council standard (this is indicative):

9.3.1.3 Designing out trip hazards

The images in the centre and to the left, below, show low-level trip hazards created by lips

which could have been avoided. One example is shown in the image to the right, below.

9.3.1.4 Lighting

It should be self-evident that effective external lighting reduces the likelihood of trips and

promotes a sense of personal safety. Technical aspects of external lighting are addressed in

the electrical chapter. All vehicular and designated pedestrian routes will be lit along with

‘plazas’, pedestrian bridge tunnels, external stairs etc. Designated external escape routes or

assembly points will also have emergency lighting.



9.3.1.5 Considering ‘adjacencies’ in hard landscaping design

Our ambition is to create a harmonious blend of surfaces and designs. Project teams must

consider the hard landscaping outside their own project boundaries to create a sympathetic

solution. This involves considering and accounting for the new ‘desire lines’ that buildings

will create through the campus.

9.3.2 Specifications for ‘private streets’

All main arterial roads through campuses should be designed as a high street as set out by

the local authority. This is purely an indicative standard:



This standard would need reviewing depending on the specific demands a road is exposed

to (e.g. if the access and maintenance strategy indicated that heavy items of plant (such as

cranes) would need to be deployed on the road).

9.3.2.1 Swept Path Analysis

Depending on the nature of the project, tracking (or ‘swept path’) analysis may be needed.

A 3 axle refuse vehicle should be used for this study and the swept path should be no closer

than 500mm from any kerb, vertical structure, tree, or formal parking space.

9.3.3 Car Parking

All buildings are to have an allocation of disabled parking spaces in line with Part M of the

building regulations. When providing Blue Badge parking bays, locate these within a short,

level distance of the building. In a row of disabled parking spaces, wherever possible, one

will be sized to accommodate a large vehicle allowing for a side or rear access hoist.

9.3.3.1 Recharging Points for Electric Vehicles (EV)

UWE seeks to support and encourage the use of electric vehicles. During any projects that

will be introducing or extending car parking provision, the sustainability team will assess the

need for electric charging points based on number of spaces, proximity to other charging

points and the anticipated usage of the space (e.g. a ‘drop off’ point would not be a sensible

location for a charging point as it will encourage drivers to linger).

Generally these will be ‘fast chargers’ aiming to provide a full charge in 1hr 30minutes. This

requires a 22kW supply (approximately). The charging points are to have Ingress Protection

rated at 55. Charging points are to be individually metered (as detailed elsewhere in this

design guide).

9.3.4 Motorcycle Parking

Provide space for at least one 3 wheel tricycle in any parking designed for motorcycles.

9.3.5 Cycle Parking

UWE has used a range of options to provide comfortable, aesthetically pleasing, well lit and

reasonably secure cycle parking facilities. The requirement for or size of this provision will

be influenced by the number of building users, the proximity to existing facilities etc. as well

as constraints such as space.

Designers should consider wind loading/direction when selecting and positioning bike

shelters, especially open faced shelters.



Shelters should not be positioned in infrequently used or obscured locations, as this could

encourage theft. The transport team will advise on security requirements, but it should be

anticipated that cycle hubs will need swipe access with attendant power/data supplies.

The sustainability team should be consulted during RIBA stage 2 of any major refurbishment

or new build (£2.5m or more exc. VAT) so that they can assess existing provision and advise

on how cycle provision could be enhanced.

In any cycle parking provision, there must be at least one cycle space that is wide enough to

accommodate a recumbent trike which may be used by a disabled person. There will also

need to be space for storage of a wheelchair.

9.3.6 Barrier Controls

Barrier controls should be operated by swipe cards or key codes (the transport team will

advise) and without the need for users to leave their vehicle. Intercom is only a ‘back up’

method of operating barriers: Not all users will have hearing or speech. Barriers must be

designed to prevent harm or damage to people or property.

9.3.7 Designing for deliveries, maintenance & emergencies

The access and maintenance and fire strategies will help establish the demands that will be

placed on hard landscaping. UWE wishes to avoid the need to repair brand new footpaths

etc. damaged by the weight of vehicular traffic which was foreseeable from the outset.

Designers must ensure that there is at least one vehicular route and parking area for each

building, capable of taking the weight of a 3 axle refuse vehicle.

9.3.8 Pollution prevention

Hard infrastructure should include appropriate pollution prevention measures. The

sustainability team can provide advice on, for example, the requirement for interceptors or

the risk to existing drainage (e.g. surface water drains in proximity to a new delivery bay).

Any external spaces that the sustainability team deem to be high risk such as loading bays

or near hydrocarbon storage tanks may need storage for a UWE spill kit (depending on the

distance to an existing kit). This will need to be allowed for in the design process

9.3.9 Underground Services

A range of services and cables are routed through the ground. This makes them vulnerable

to inadvertent damage, especially during future construction projects.



Designs, specifications and installation must conform to the current version of NJUG National

Joint Utilities Group’s guidelines and BS 1710 on the positioning and colour coding of

underground utilities’ apparatus.

Where possible, all utility apparatus should be laid in ‘corridors’ throughout the site. This will

facilitate the installation of the services and any future connections as the development

proceeds. Consideration should be given to the use of trenches and ducts to facilitate this.

Due to the ever evolving nature of the estate, depths must conform to ‘carriageway’

standards and not footways or verges: Within a matter of years road surfaces could be

extended or re-routed.

If for any reason, minimum depths or separation distances cannot be achieved, the situation

must be discussed with the relevant UWE engineer.

The location of access to inspection chambers should be carefully considered in order to:

Facilitate permanent but safe access

Limit the impact on traffic/pedestrians while in use

Prevent damage to the manhole cover from vehicular traffic

9.3.9.1 Marker and identification tape

Identification tape (which must be PVC or polyethylene ribbon at least 150 mm wide) is to

be applied continuously along the whole length of underground services. The relevant

descriptive text should not be more than 700mm apart. The tape should incorporate a

corrosion resistant tracing system.

The tape should be installed directly over the crown of the pipe for its entire length. This

tape should be extended and then terminated within suitable accessible points at either end

of the pipe run (valve chambers & building entry points etc.) to facilitate future tracing via

signal generation method.

Regardless of the service being installed, the trace wire shall be designed and attached in

accordance with the Bristol Water Addendum to Code of Practice for the Self-Laying of

Mains and Services (version 4.0, November 2014). “Trace wire shall be attached to the

service pipe using plastic cable ties at not more than 1 metre intervals. The wire is to be

minimum 1.5 square millimetres blue plastic coated wire to BS 6491X standard. The wire

shall be taken into the property.”



The final termination point will need to be determined by the exact service. In the case of

water pipes, the Bristol water addendum states “they should be clamped to the service pipe

above the stop tap, and shall terminate above the main to which the service is connected.”

9.3.9.2 Entry of services to buildings

To maximise resilience to cope with damage, planned outage etc., diverse routes are requ-

ired for service distribution. Typically, risers are provided at opposite ends of the building.

9.3.10 Fire hydrants

The requirement and position of fire hydrants will be determined by the fire strategy for the

new building. UWE has a full suite of drawings showing the existing hydrant circuit and can

provide water pressure data. As usual, the design must conform to current versions of

relevant British and Industry Standards (BS 750 and BS EN 14339, in this instance).

9.3.11 Fire hydrant and drain covers

9.3.11.1 Fire Hydrants

In line with recommendations from UMAL, the UWE insurers, all fire hydrant covers must be

highlighted by yellow paint. This is in addition to the marking requirements in BS 750

(“surface box covers shall be clearly marked by having the words “FIRE HYDRANT” in letters

not less than 30 mm high, or the initials “F.H.” in letters not less than 75 mm high, cast into

the cover.”). UWE requires the use of “FIRE HYDRANT”, rather than “F.H.” unless space

constraints prevent this.

9.3.11.2 Drain covers

In line with Pollution Prevention Guidelines (PPG) 1 and 22, UWE requires that: “gullies,

grids and manhole covers are colour coded to aid identification, using blue for surface water

and red for foul and arrows to indicate the direction of flow.”

It will hopefully be self-evident that colour-coding will hugely assist in the management of

the Estates. For example, in the case of a spill, it will help a response team to rapidly

determine which grids to prioritise for protection.



9.4 Street Furniture

The DfT Manual for Streets establishes how detrimental ‘clutter’ can be to the public realm.

Chapter 3 of this design guide addresses wayfinding and the strategy for ensuring that

signage is used in a coherent manner and presents a visually consistent theme.

Any other street furniture should be robust with a design that is sympathetic to the

surrounding built and natural environment (e.g. the requirements of central Frenchay

campus will be different from Glenside).

Where possible any proposed street furniture should be integrated into designed elements,

such as paving bands.

9.4.1 External seating

There should be a mixture of external seating, offering opportunities for individuals to rest

as well as collaborating together on course work etc. Seating should include some with

backs and arm rests, providing a selection that people can pick to suit their health and

physical condition. The design and material will need to match the environment. If there is

space for only one external seat, it should be fitted with arm and back rests. An example

(found at another University) is shown below.

9.5 External Events

UWE’s desire for flexibility extends to external spaces. Any large area of soft or hard

landscaping should be considered as a potential events space (e.g. talks, performances,

street catering etc.). This should be discussed with the end user(s) and sustainability team.

If external events are desirable, provision should be made for power, lighting etc.



9.6 Waste Handling & Storage Facilities

External Waste and recycling facilities should be designed with consultation of sustainability

team to ensure the appropriate facilities are designed to meet the needs of the users and

waste contractors.

Facilities will obviously take into account the size and quantity of containers for waste.

Where possible bin stores will be enclosed or, if that is not practicable, sheltered to aid with

secure waste containment in line with legal obligations.

As an overarching principle the design team should follow the guidance for waste

handling/storage provision as given in a BREEAM assessment: The space recommended by

this assessment is in direct proportion to the square meterage of the building.

The design team should note that UWE have a priority on recycling. Hence, the wider

design should include space for bins and recycling points across all areas of the building i.e.

offices, kitchens, eating areas, study areas etc. The design team will additionally need to

consider ease of access for cleaners, both storage of materials and access whilst

undertaking the cleaning of the buildings.

Any bin stores provided should have enough space for 1100 litre recycling and general

waste bins to be moved in and out of the bin store and have good access/space/head height

for cleaners to empty smaller bins into them. The exact number of wheelie bins requiring

housing will depend on the occupancy and use of the building; exact specifications for this

should be determined in consultation with the relevant UWE personnel.

Bins stores will need to be positioned 10m or more from a building. If this is not possible,

advice should be sought from the UWE Fire Officer and Insurance Manager.

Access to the bin stores will be required by refuse and recycling contractors’ vehicles.

Any design should include the facilities to store hazardous waste. This will range from

fridges, to chemicals/contaminated cleaning containers to TV's through to chemicals storage

requirements. The design team must ensure adequate Health & Safety precautions are in

place including eye washes etc.

Hazardous waste storage and collection is not included in BREEAM calculations, the exact

requirements will depend on overall size/use of the building. In specific situations,

depending upon the faculty in question, there may be a need to provide external space to

accommodate lockable skips.


Chapter 10: Audio-Visual (AV) Infrastructure


C h a p t e r 1 0 | A V I n f r a s t u c t u r e I s s u e 1 . 3 P a g e | 1

Table of Contents

10.1 Introduction .................................................................................................... 2

10.2 Design Process ................................................................................................ 2

10.3 Cable Routes ................................................................................................... 3

10.4 Containment .................................................................................................... 3

10.4.1 Underfloor ................................................................................................ 3

10.4.2 Riser ........................................................................................................ 3

10.4.3 In ceiling .................................................................................................. 3

10.5 Room Type: .................................................................................................... 4

10.5.1 Signage Screen ......................................................................................... 4

10.5.2 Meeting Room ........................................................................................... 4

10.5.3 Standard General Practice Teaching (GPT) Room. ....................................... 5

10.5.4 Lecture Theatre ......................................................................................... 6

10.5.5 Technology Enhanced Active Learning (TEAL) Room. ................................... 8

10.5.6 PC Lab ..................................................................................................... 8

10.5.7 Open Access Learning ................................................................................ 8

10.5.8 Specialist Spaces ....................................................................................... 8

10.5.9 Other ....................................................................................................... 8

C h a p t e r 1 0 | I T I n f r a s t u c t u r e I s s u e 1 . 3 P a g e | 2

10.1 Introduction

This document is to assist the design and preparation of the specific mechanical and

electrical infrastructure to enable the IT/AV fit out to take place. We would expect that the

items discussed below will be installed by the construction contract and not as part of fit out

works procured/managed directly by UWE. It is current practice that ITS will appoint the AV

contractor.

All AV cabling is to be supplied and fitted by the AV contractor. The only exceptions are for

Network Data and Power for IT and AV installations.

The fit out works may occur concurrently with the main building works. Contract clauses

will allow for access by UWE contractors. ITS will follow their own processes for appointing

and managing their contractors. While on any Principal Contractor’s site, the AV contractor

will undergo induction and obey site rules.

If ITS staff go onto construction sites, please refer to general health and safety

requirements set out in the IT Infrastructure Chapter.

This chapter should be considered in tandem with the IT infrastructure chapter.

10.2 Design Process

Design is key to the successful implementation of IT/AV Services and to the smooth running

of the project, regardless of whether it is a new build or refibushment. In all circumstances,

ITS should be represented at all design meetings where IT or AV systems are required.

It is critical that design teams ensure that the design accounts for the cable routes and

containment detailed in this chapter and ensure that the overall design is properly co-

ordinated. For example, UWE has had to contend with designs where, after a lectern was

installed, it was no longer possible for a wheelchair to pass along the front row of seats.

It is also incumbent on the wider design team to identify the specific needs of users of the

room/space so that assistive technologies can be incorporated as required. Chapter 3 of the

design guide deals with issues of equality and diversity in more depth.

After discussing generic requirements for cable routes and containment, this chapter will

detail the requirements for different room types.


10.3 Cable Routes

Direct cable routes, taking in consideration for design and construction, will run from point

of control to point of display/s. For example, projector to teaching position (lectern),

monitor to hard wired control point. Signal cables will follow the same route as control

cables.

Cables should not be run through fire breaks.

10.4 Containment

10.4.1 Underfloor

Perforated cable tray is to run from the lectern floor box to the riser.

10.4.2 Riser

Containment should be in the presentation wall wherever practicable.

External dado will be considered, especially in rooms where cabling is being delivered via dado (i.e. not underfloor).

If use of dado has been agreed by UWE, it is preferable that the riser is not on the teaching wall but is as close to the lectern as is practicable.

Containment should not be less than 50mm x 50mm (or 50mm diameter) but may be

larger depending on room type and use.

Rigid containment will be used (such as Copex but alternative, comparable systems may

be used with ITS approval).

Where containment is hidden or inaccessible, draw cords will be required.

Exposed containment should complement the design of the room.

Containment will be Cat 6E compliant.

10.4.3 In ceiling

A cable basket of suitable capacity must run from the top of the riser to the projector/speakers/camera/microphones etc.

Where it is exposed, the basket must be in keeping with the design of the room. The basket should follow the most practicable, shortest route. AV cables can be mounted in baskets supplying other services.

Ceilings must be capable of holding a mounting plate for the projector and the weight of the

projector.


10.5 Room Type:

10.5.1 Signage Screen

1. Teaching Position – N/A

2. Cable Routes – High level power and data directly behind the display that does not

conflict with the fixing positions (see Appendix drawing for an example).

3. Containment – Only small power and data both terminated behind the display. Surface

trunking should be avoided. Where inaccessible containment is used then draw cords are

required.

4. Projection Screens/Monitors

a. Suitable wall construction and patrissing will be required for large screen

monitors.

i. Approx. weights:

ii. 42” – 16.9 Kg

iii. 55” - 26.5 Kg

iv. 80” – 61 Kg

5. Projectors – N/A

6. Speakers – N/A

7. Microphones – N/A

8. Hearing Loops – N/A

9. Lecture/Events capture – N/A

10. Small Power and data – 1 x double power, 1 x single data.

11. Exceptions will be by agreement with UWE IT Services.

10.5.2 Meeting Room

1. Teaching Position – N/A

2. Cable Routes

Behind the display will be 1 x double power, 1 x double data. In the dado there should

be a switched fused spur to the double socket behind the display, two single back boxes

(one for control one for input plate).

3. Containment

a. For cable route will run from empty back boxes in mid level dado to single brush

plate back box behind the display (with draw cords)

b. For the construction stage rigid containment will be used although Copex or

comparable will be considered with our agreement.

c. Containment should be in the presentation wall or under floor wherever

practicable and not less than 50mm x 50mm (or 50mm diameter) but may be


d. Where containment is hidden or inaccessible draw cords will be required.

e. Containment should complement the design of the room.

f. Containment – Only small power and data both terminated behind the display.

Surface trunking should be avoided.

4. Projection Screens/Monitors

a. Suitable wall construction and patrissing will be required for large screen

monitors. The approximate weights are:


i. 42” – 16.9 Kg

ii. 55” - 26.5 Kg

iii. 80” – 61 Kg

5. Projectors – N/A

6. Speakers – N/A

7. Microphones – N/A

8. Hearing Loops – N/A

9. Lecture/Events capture – N/A

12. Small Power and data – 1 x double power, 1 x single data.


10.5.3 Standard General Practice Teaching (GPT) Room.

1. Teaching Position

All standard teaching rooms and lecture theatres will follow the pattern noted below.

a. Non standard or specialist spaces will need to be agreed with ITS at the earliest

possible design stage.

b. Teaching spaces and theatres are primarily equipped with a lectern, one or two

ceiling mounted projector, two program sound speakers, a large projection

screen and event capture solutions. Spaces seating over 50 will also have voice

reinforcement speakers and a hearing loop system.

c. ITS will advise if the space is to be single or dual projection.

i. For single projection the teaching position will be:

1. off to one side furthest from the door with sufficient space

between the teaching wall and the lectern for wheelchair access.

ii. For Dual projection the teaching position will be:

1. Centred between the projection screens with sufficient space


d. Services should not foul projection screens.

e. The presentation wall will typically have projection screen/s and two passive

speakers for program sound.

2. Cable Routes

a. Cable Routes – From control to ceiling mounted projector/s via floor box and

riser.

b. Floor box will contain 1 x double power, 3 x single data, empty double back box

(for AV cables)

c. Floor box must be a minimum 125mm deep with total void (box plus below) to

be not less than 225mm (to allow for cabling turn radius).

d. Floor box will be positioned under the teaching position.

e. Speakers will require direct cable routes from each speaker to point of control.

3. Containment

a. for cable route will run from empty back boxes in mid level dado to single brush

plate back box behind the display (with draw cords)

b. For the construction stage rigid containment will be used although Copex or



c. Containment should be in the presentation wall or under floor wherever



d. Where containment is hidden or inaccessible draw cords will be required.

e. Containment should complement the design of the room.

f. Containment – Only small power and data both terminated behind the display.

g. Surface trunking should be avoided.

4. Projection Screens

a. Suitable wall construction and patrissing will be required for projection screens.

Screen monitors.

i. Approx. weight:2.4m x 1.8m – 30kg

b. Projection screen will be TK Team wet wipe board or equivalent.

5. Projectors

a. To be 1.8-2.2m from the presentation wall.

b. To be central to the screen/s

c. Securely mounted to the ceiling

d. Ceiling should be capable of holding approx. 18kgs held vertically

e. Services will not foul projection sight lines or mounting.

6. Speakers

a. Program sound at either side of the presentation wall only.

b. Speakers will be wall mounted usually under 10 kg

c. Where voice reinforcement is required these will be ceiling mounted unless

agreed as an exception.

7. Microphones

a. Should consist of a teaching position goose neck mic, a lapel mic and a hand held

for voice reinforcement where room capacity of 50 or more.

8. Hearing Loops/Assistive Technology

To be agreed on a project-by-project basis.

9. Lecture/Events capture

a. Current standard specs can be supplied when required but consists of a camera

and single microphone – note cable route to point of control will be required.

10. Small Power and data

a. 1 x double power, 3 x single data at the lectern position.

b. 1 x double power and 1 x single data at mounting position of the projector.


10.5.4 Lecture Theatre

1. Teaching Position

All standard teaching rooms and lecture theatres will follow the pattern noted below.

a. Non standard or specialist spaces will need to be agreed with ITS at the earliest

possible design stage.

b. Teaching spaces and theatres are primarily equipped with a lectern, one or two

ceiling mounted projector, two program sound speakers, a large projection

screen and event capture solutions. Spaces seating over 50 will also have voice

reinforcement speakers and a hearing loop system.


c. ITS will advise if the space is to be single or dual projection.

i. For single projection the teaching position will be:

1. off to one side furthest from the door with sufficient space


ii. For Dual projection the teaching position will be:

1. Centred between the projection screens with sufficient space


d. Services should not foul projection screens.

e. The presentation wall will typically have projection screen/s and two passive

speakers for program sound.

2. Cable Routes

a. Cable Routes – From control to ceiling mounted projector/s via floor box and

riser.

b. Floor box will contain 1 x double power, 3 x single data, empty double back box

(for AV cables)

c. Floor box must be a minimum 125mm deep with total void (box plus below) to

be not less than 225mm (to allow for cabling turn radius).

d. Floor box will be positioned under the teaching position.

e. Speakers will require direct cable routes from each speaker to point of control.

3. Containment

a. For the construction stage rigid containment will be used although Copex or


b. Containment should be in the presentation wall or under floor wherever



c. Where containment is hidden or inaccessible draw cords will be required.

d. Containment should complement the design of the room.

e. Surface trunking should be avoided.

4. Projection Screens

a. Suitable wall construction and patrissing will be required for projection screens.

i. Approx. weight: 3.5m wide – 30kg

b. Projection screen will be fixed frame stretched skin or equivalent.

5. Projectors

a. To be confirmed distance from the presentation wall, depending on model.

b. To be central to the screen/s

c. Securely mounted to the ceiling

d. Ceiling should be capable of holding approx. 35kgs held vertically

e. Services will not foul projection sight lines or mounting.

6. Speakers

a. Program sound at either side of the presentation wall only.

b. Speakers will be wall mounted usually under 10 kg

c. Where voice reinforcement is required these will be ceiling mounted unless

agreed as an exception.

7. Microphones

a. Should consist of a teaching position goose neck mic, a lapel mic and a hand held

for voice reinforcement where room capacity of 50 or more.

8. Hearing Loops/Assistive Technology

To be agreed on a project-by-project basis.


9. Lecture/Events capture

a. Current standard specs can be supplied when required but consists of a camera

and single microphone – note cable route to point of control will be required.

10. Small Power and data

a. 1 x double power, 3 x single data at the lectern position.

b. 1 x double power and 1 x single data at mounting position of the projector.

c. 1 x single power at camera location


10.5.5 Technology Enhanced Active Learning (TEAL) Room.

Two Standard Types - A and B.

TEAL A is a wireless solution, and containment is restricted to small power and data for each

workstation.

TEAL B is a wired solution and containment is required to run a series of cables between

each workstation and point of control.

These spaces are considered an exception to the standard teaching model, and

requirements must be confirmed with ITS before commencing work.

10.5.6 PC Lab

PC labs will normally consist of a standard teaching installation in addition to a number of

workstations set out on desking.

Containment is restricted to small power and data for each workstation, and the Estates

Design Guide should be consulted for load and distribution throughout the room.

Consideration of how cable management, layout and integration with furniture will be

managed will need to be agreed with ITS.

10.5.7 Open Access Learning

Would not normally consist of AV teaching installations, but will require small power and

data for each workstation. Requirement to be agreed with ITS.

10.5.8 Specialist Spaces

Requirement to be agreed with ITS.

10.5.9 Other

Requirement to be agreed with ITS.

Chapter 2 | Design and Handover of Water Systems Issue 1 Page | 1

Procedural Document For the management and control of Legionella including

“safe” hot water, cold water and drinking water

Chapter 2: Design and Handover of Water Systems

Revision 4, Issued June 2018

Prepared by Nick Bell, UWE


Contents

1 System/plant design, installation and maintenance .......................................................... 3

General design and installation considerations .......................................................... 3

Cold water storage tanks ........................................................................................ 3

Hot water calorifiers .............................................................................................. 4

Hot water and cold water distribution systems .......................................................... 7

Showers baths and thermostatic mixing valves/taps (TMV/TMT)................................. 8

Expansion/pressurisation vessels ............................................................................. 8

Usage evaluation ................................................................................................... 9

Prohibited features ................................................................................................ 9

Greywater systems ................................................................................................ 9

Temporary water supplies ...................................................................................... 9

Irrigation systems .................................................................................................. 9

Ice making machines ............................................................................................. 9

Outdoor ornamental fountains and water features .................................................. 10

Humidified food cabinets ...................................................................................... 10

Ion exchange water softeners ............................................................................... 10

Portable humidifiers ............................................................................................. 10

2 Training at handover .................................................................................................. 10

3 Handover documentation ............................................................................................ 11

Domestic water services ...................................................................................... 11

Process water systems ......................................................................................... 13

Closed heating and cooling circuits ....................................................................... 14

REVISIONS

Title Notes Initial Date

Draft v2 June 2010

Final Issue Rev A Oct 2014

Final Issue v2 Apr 2017

Final Issue v3 Clarified author is UWE. Removed references to

maintenance activities/frequencies

NB June 2018


1 System/plant design, installation and maintenance

General design and installation considerations

Designers must refer to the UWE Design Guides before commencing any design work.

Systems which utilise or contain water and can affect the water supply, the atmosphere and

the user shall be monitored regularly and be subjected to the following regime:

All designs must be carried out and presented in accordance with all relevant and current

Guidelines, European and British Standards and “best-practices”.

The systems shall be carefully designed to eliminate or minimise aerosol production and

excessive water retention. They must also be designed to be readily drained and cleaned.

No materials used in construction shall include those that are known to harbour or provide

nutrient for bacteria.

Any materials that come into contact with the water in a hot or cold water installation shall

comply with the requirements of the Water Supply (Water Fittings) Regulations 1999. The

list of products/materials that have been assessed for compliance with the Water Supply

(Water Fittings) Regulations 1999 requirements are listed in the current edition of Water

Fittings and Materials Directory that is updated every six months. Further information on

the selection of materials can be found in BS8558 and BS6920.

Some flexible hoses are unsuitable for use with domestic potable water, because they

support extensive microbial growth, give the water a very strong, unpleasant, taste and

odour or release toxic substances into it. Hose materials may also encourage the growth of

Legionella bacteria. It is, therefore, UWE’s policy that in new buildings or refurbishments

commissioned by or on behalf of UWE, flexible hoses shall be avoided where possible. Any

flexible hoses fitted shall be WRAS approved. Enquiries regarding specific types of flexible

hose shall be directed to the manufacturer/supplier.

All systems must be easily and safely accessible for maintenance.

All systems/outlets shall be designed, wherever possible, to be frequently used to avoid

stagnant water which will increase the potential of bacterial growth and proliferation.

All plant and distribution pipe-work (where accessible) shall be clearly labelled.

Cold water storage tanks

Cold water storage tanks shall be constructed from non-deleterious materials which

must be WRAS approved.

Cold water storage tanks shall be designed and installed in accordance with the current

Water Supply (Water Fittings) Regulations 1999) and installed in appropriate and

suitable locations to allow easy and safe access to facilitate inspection and maintenance.

Sectional Cold Water Storage tanks shall be designed with external assembly flanges


and self-draining profiles, to facilitate easy cleaning of internal surfaces.

Externally located cold water storage tanks shall be suitably protected from

environmental conditions for all new buildings and, where practicable, for existing

installations if elevated temperature is found to be due to high ambient temperatures.

Cold water storage tanks shall be protected from the ingress of light, insects and birds.

Cold water storage tanks shall be sized and arranged to minimise retention time of stored

water (24hrs maximum), and therefore to increase the rate of stored water exchange.

Projects should question the presence of any existing tank and consider its removal if

the services it supplies can be, equally well, supplied by converting the systems to

domestic Mains fed only.

When water temperatures are found to be persistently outside recommended parameters,

each unit shall be subjected to a “drop-test” designed to ascertain the capacity and

demand requirements of each system, in order to ensure that excessive volumes of

water are not unnecessarily stored. Eliminating storage within a system would also allow

the negation of the necessary PPM Programme tasks and their replacement with much

less onerous, more infrequent and less costly tasks to be carried out.

All associated pipework and valves shall be adequately insulated and clearly labelled

to identify their purpose.

Delayed-action ball valves shall be fitted (where practicable) in order to help avoid

stagnation of water.

In new buildings where cold water storage tanks are linked “in parallel”, the feed to each

tank shall be fitted with a water meter in order to allow for confirmation of equal and

uniform usage from all tanks in the configuration.

Various arrangements of pumping systems are indicated in BS8558. Where booster pumps

are to be installed, a break cistern will be required between the mains supply pipe

and the pumps. This is required in order to comply with the Water Supply (Water

Fittings) Regulations 1999 with regard to prevention of backflow. Control of the pump(s)

should be fully automatic in operation and controlled by pressure sensors. Where two

or more pumps are installed, the design flow should be achieved with one pump

stationary (or out of service). Automatic control should be provided to cyclically and

sequentially control all pumps to ensure that each is regularly brought into service. If this

is not possible, documented procedures shall be in place to ensure equal usage is achieved.

Designs should maintain stored water at a temperature of <20oC (or no more than 2oC

greater than the inlet supply temperature to the building).

Where indicated and when it is deemed necessary and practicable, Cold Water Storage

Tanks shall be upgraded, refurbished, modified or replaced so that they may comply with

current Water Supply (Water Fittings) Regulations 1999. Following these works, each tank

shall be cleaned and disinfected in accordance with BS 8558:2011and L8 prior to it being

allowed back into service.

Hot water calorifiers

Calorifiers shall be installed in appropriate and suitable locations to allow easy and safe

http://www.awin1.com/cread.php?awinmid=3911&awinaffid=134018&clickref=bs8580&p=http%3A%2F%2Fshop.bsigroup.com%2FAffiliateRedirect.aspx%3Furl%3Dhttp%3A%2F%2Fshop.bsigroup.com%2Fen%2FProductDetail%2F%3Fpid%3D000000000030228296


access to facilitate inspection and maintenance.

Where more than one Calorifier or heating device is used, they shall be connected in

parallel, taking care to ensure that the flow can be balanced so that the water temperature

from all the Calorifiers exceeds 60°C at all times.

In all new installations, the combined storage capacity and heater output must be sufficient

to ensure that the outflow temperature, at continuous design flow (at least 20 minutes)

from calorifiers or other heaters, shall not be less than 60°C. This applies to both circulating

and non-circulating hot water systems.

The positioning of the control and high limit thermostats, cold feed and return water

connections must ensure that these temperatures are achieved.

Warm water must be prevented from entering the cold-feed. A check valve shall be

provided in the cold feed, as close to the calorifier as practicable, to prevent this. However,

the installation of such a check valve shall not be carried out in systems that use the cold

feed for expansion. In these cases, U-bend or S-bend shall be installed in the cold-feed,

sufficient distance from the connection to the calorifier, so that water which is warm is not

displaced (on heating up) beyond the bend and the vertical pipe rise.

Where practicable, all pressurisation/expansion vessels shall be of the flow- through type.

Where pressurisation vessels are of the single entry type they must be fitted with

appropriate flow-through valves or drain valves to facilitate flushing of the unit.

The practice of terminating the air vent over the Water Storage Tank shall be outlawed.

The vent shall be arranged to discharge over a separate tun-dish arrangement, with visible

Type A air gap, sited at a level that takes account of the hydrostatic head of the system.

The calorifier or water heater shall be provided with a suitable safety valve of appropriate

size and vacuum release arrangement.

Where water quality indicates the need, cathodic protection from galvanic action by means

of sacrificial anodes shall be provided.

Calorifiers shall be fitted with a de-stratification pump, where deemed necessary by

monitoring and/or risk assessment, in order to avoid temperature stratification of the

stored water. Some semi-storage/high-efficiency Calorifiers are supplied with an integral

pump that circulates water in the Calorifier. De-stratification pumps shall not be fitted to

this type of unit.

A single circulating pump shall normally be installed in the return. If, for reasons of

reliability, two pumps are installed in parallel they shall be arranged to have individual non-

return and service valves and be controlled such that each one is brought into operation

twice a day.

When Calorifiers are isolated from the system (for whatever reason), the associated

distribution system shall be subjected to DAILY flushing. However, this is only necessary

when the Calorifier isolated is the sole supply of Hot Water Services (HWS) to that

distribution system. Where more than one Calorifier supplies the distribution services, the

isolated calorifier shall be drained down and remain drained whilst off line.

A suitably sized drain shall be connected to the base of each calorifier (where practicable).

Calorifiers shall be maintained at the following temperature profiles at all times:

o “Stored” and “Flow” at ≥60.0oC


o “Return” at ≥50oC - “Return” temperatures must be measured from each

“Return” leg

o “Distribution” at ≥50oC

o “Drain” at ≥50oC

In order to ensure that the temperatures required to achieve thermal disinfection (>60ºC

for the “Flow” and >50ºC for “Distribution”) are maintained, it is important to ensure that

the Calorifiers should be allowed to operate continuously ensuring that the heat source is

available constantly. Where the Primary Heating Source is not set by a timer, the heating

source shall be left ‘on’ at all times.

Where Calorifiers are to be operated on a timed basis, the cylinder and recirculating

system (where fitted) shall be held at >60ºC for one hour per day. Shunt pumps may

require fitting to ensure the cylinder can comply with this temperature. The reduction

in overnight temperature shall also be considered in the risk assessment and any

recommendations for increased monitoring shall be instituted. Proof of system compliance

will be required to be provided which shall include monitoring for Legionella 6 monthly

on each system and an annual verification of the pasteurisation regime. If Legionella levels

cannot be controlled to within expected levels by this regime, an additional control regime

(such as chlorine dioxide) will be required to enable timer use.

Calorifiers shall be subjected to regular manual check for “Flow” and “Return”

temperature to each vessel and return temperature from each return leg. BMS may only

be used as the monitoring device where all points required to be taken are fitted with BMS

sensors and the sensor has been calibrated within the last 12 months, otherwise manual

monitoring will be required.

Where practicable Calorifiers shall have water softening devices fitted where water is

stored over 60oC to prevent scaling and degradation of the calorifiers. Softening systems

shall only be allowed to be fitted with the approval of the Compliance Manager.

Cleaning, flushing and pasteurisation shall be carried out in the event of major

modifications or after a period out of service, before a Calorifier is returned to service.

Where temperatures in the calorifier and/or recirculating system are reduced to below

48ºC due to temporary shutdowns (including holiday shutdowns) or system failure for a

duration of more than 30 days, the calorifier shall be drained and refilled, then system shall

be pasteurised for one hour before being allowed back “on-line”. All outlets, drains and

dead legs shall be flushed during the pasteurisation period for at least 5 minutes achieving

a temperature of >60ºC.

Where temperatures in the recirculating system are reduced to below 48ºC due to

temporary shutdowns (including holiday shutdowns) or system failure for a duration of

less than 30 days, the system shall be pasteurised for one hour before being allowed

back “on-line”. All outlets, drains and dead legs shall be flushed during the pasteurisation

period for at least 5 minutes achieving a temperature of >60ºC.

Return and shunt pumps shall be overhauled on an annual basis (where this is a stated

requirement) or shall be serviced and maintained to manufacturers specifications.

Cistern-type water heaters shall be maintained such that the cold tank part of the heater is

kept clean and at the correct temperature, and the hot tank part maintained at a


temperature of >60.0oC allowing for distribution temperatures of >50.0oC. A screened

vent and an insect/rodent overflow screen shall be fitted to the tank part of the units.

Instant water heaters (<5litres), including combination boilers, usually store small water

volumes, and because of this they do not usually need to be operated within the

temperature profile and limits prescribed for larger systems (≥60oC for the ‘flow’ and

(≥50oC for the ‘return’ and ‘outlet’) which are necessary for thermal disinfection. It is UWE

policy to operate these units to achieve an outlet temperature of ≥50oC. They should

however be switched on at all times to ensure and encourage adequate use.

Hot water and cold water distribution systems

The design and installation of the hot and cold water distribution system shall comply

with the Water Supply (Water Fittings) Regulations 1999 and BS 8558:2011.

The design of the pipework shall ensure that there is no possibility of a cross- connection

between installations conveying potable water and an installation containing non-

potable water or water supplied from a private source (untreated). There shall be no

possibility of backflow towards the source of supply from any tank, cistern or

appliance, whether by back siphonage or otherwise.

All cold distribution pipework, mains and tank down feeds shall be located, as far as is

practicable, to minimise heat gains from their environment. Pipework shall not be routed

through hot ducts or run adjacent to heat sources, such as radiators.

All pipework shall be insulated, except for any exposed final connections to facilities,

and shall be arranged to eliminate or minimise dead-legs.

As far as possible, the objective shall be to design the cold water systems to ensure

that the inlet, outlet and surface water temperatures of cold water storage tanks are

not greater than 2°C above that measured at the main water meter. Also, at cold water

draw-off points, a temperature of not greater than 2°C above the temperature measured

in the source Cold water storage tanks shall be reached within one minute.

Stagnation shall be avoided. Hot and cold water services shall be sized to provide

sufficient flow at draw-off points. The aim is to promote turnover of water by means of;

the design of the distribution circuitry, adequate usage and avoidance of “disused” areas.

Where practicable; separate drinking water systems shall be provided directly from the

incoming water supply to each building without storage, with stored cold water (down

service) being used solely for supplies to WCs, wash hand basins, etc. The supply shall

not be chemically softened. Additionally, it shall be established that the usage is sufficient

to avoid deterioration in water quality, for example, that the outlet water temperature does

not exceed 20OC and that the outlet remains in use. Where drinking water is stored, the

tanks shall conform to WRAS and BS8558 guidance for drinking water storage systems.

Wherever drinking water is stored, a “post-flush” TVCC sample will be required to be

taken from a designated drinking water outlet from each system on a 6 monthly basis.

The water supply to vending and ice making equipment shall be taken from a potable

supply up stream of a regularly used outlet with the minimum of intervening pipe run

i.e. less than 3 metres. The supply shall not be Chemically softened. Additionally, it shall




be established that the usage is sufficient to avoid deterioration in water quality, for

example, that the inlet water temperature does not exceed 20OC and that the outlet does

not remain unused.

The equipment shall be positioned so that the warm air exhaust does not impinge

directly on taps or hoses supplying cold water.

The domestic hot water system shall not be used for heating purposes. This includes

all radiators, towel rails, heated bedpan racks etc, whatever the pipework configuration.

Central “common blending” systems shall not be installed, since the length of distribution

pipework containing water in the temperature range that supports bacterial growth and

proliferation would far exceed the maximum permissible lengths mentioned above. Where

already fitted with a run of more than 2 metres between the mixer and outlet, they shall

be subjected to a weekly flush of all outlets.

Designated drinking water systems and outlets shall be designed to be maintained

within 2oC of incoming mains water temperature.

Projects shall allow for isolating the unused sections from the system and possibly removing

pipe-work and fixtures completely to avoid "dead-legs”

It is UWE’s policy not to fit hose-reels and to decommission existing reels at the earliest

opportunity.

Showers baths and thermostatic mixing valves/taps (TMV/TMT)

At outlets fitted with TMVs/TMTs, the temperature shall be designed to achieve:

o 41oC for showers

o 41oC for basins

o 38oC for bidets

o 44oC for baths

The pipe-work length from TMV to the outlet shall be restricted to a maximum of 2m.

All TMVs/TMTs shall be fitted with strainers, isolation valves and non-return valves.

All TMVs shall be accessible.

Central “common blending” shower-block systems shall not be installed and all pipe-work

length from the TMV to the shower-head shall be restricted to a maximum of 2m.

Where “common blending” shower-block systems are already in place, each system

shall be fitted with a solenoid valve (at the furthest point from the mixer valve),

programmed to automatically purge water for a three minute period each day. Additional

monitoring of these systems may be required as deemed necessary by risk assessment.

Expansion/pressurisation vessels

All new and replacement expansion/pressurisation vessels fitted shall be of the “flow-

through” type.

Expansion vessels shall be located on the cold feed rather than on the hot water side of

the system. The length of pipework between the expansion vessel and cold feed shall be


as short as practicable, e.g. less than 1 metre.

All existing expansion vessels of the single entry type must be fitted with appropriate

flow-through valves or drain valves to facilitate flushing of the unit. If fitted with a drain,

this drain must be flushed on a weekly basis.

Usage evaluation

Designers shall undertake 'usage evaluation' of the following and shall specify weekly flushing

(or manual or automatic flushing of the supply pipes using bleed valves) if the usage is found

to be infrequent:

De-ionisers

Dishwashers/washing machines.

Injection moulding machines (total water loss).

Indoor, ornamental water features

Prohibited features

Lathes or CNC machines using organic cutting oils

Portable “wet” evaporative cooling point-of-use units

Greywater systems

Greywater systems shall comply with BS 8525-1:2010 - Greywater systems – Part 1: Code of

practice and BS 8525-2:2011 - Greywater systems –Part 2: Domestic greywater treatment

equipment – Requirements and test methods.

Temporary water supplies

UWE, or others on its behalf, when providing and managing temporary water supplies,

shall comply with their duties under the Health and Safety at Work etc. Act and BS

8551:2011 - Provision and management of temporary water supplies (not including

provisions for statutory emergencies).

Irrigation systems

Irrigation systems shall only use treated water (or treated grey water) and water shall

not be dispersed using sprays.

Ice making machines

Ice is defined as food under the Food Safety Act 1990 and must be made, stored and

handled so that it is not contaminated, a requirement of the Food Safety (General Food

Hygiene) Regulations 1995.


In order to control the potential of microbiological and other contamination, the following

actions shall be considered and implemented:

o Connect the machine directly to the drinking water supply, ensuring that the supply

pipework is as short as possible and insulated from passive heat gain, particularly in

locations where the supply pipework is directly next to the cooling fan.

o Site the machine in a clean room, away from sources of contamination such as human

waste (in sluice rooms) and cleaning chemicals.

Outdoor ornamental fountains and water features

For ornamental features in public settings, designs should prevent public bathing.

Humidified food cabinets

Designs to comply with established best practice.

Ion exchange water softeners

Designs to comply with established best practice.

Portable humidifiers

Portable humidifiers shall not be used without the written permission of the Compliance

Manager who would need to ascertain suitability of use following an adequate risk assessment.

2 Training at handover

Where necessary, training shall be provided at handover. This should be extended beyond

Estates to facilities colleagues and will include staff involved in using ice making machines,

humidified food cabinets etc.


3 Handover documentation

Domestic water services

Process No. 2.1

Task Building handover protocol from build contractor to UWE for new buildings

and major refurbishments

System Domestic water services

Requirements Prior to Handover (action by main contractor)

Cleaning and Disinfection:

BS 8558.

The system once totally complete is to be cleaned and disinfected. This process is to include:

Mains cold water services

Stored cold water services

Hot water services

Only spray devices – showers, spray taps etc

Devices that may trap debris – TMV/TMT, Filters etc

All individual outlets - taps

Microbiological

Sampling:

BS 7592. BS 8558.

Following the cleaning and disinfection microbiological samples are to be

taken across the system to give a representation of the potable water quality within the building. Samples are to be submitted to a UKAS laboratory for

analysis. Samples are to be taken from the following points:

Mains cold water services (entry point and furthest extremity) - TVCC

Stored cold water services (closest to storage and furthest point from

storage) - TVCC

Hot water services (each hot water generator and furthest point from

generator) – TVCC and Legionella TVCC:

Total viable count at 22oC


Coliforms

E.Coli

Temperature

Profile :

L8. HSG274 Part

2.

Water temperatures a r e to be recorded 3 times equally spaced over 24

hours following the commissioning of the system. Temperatures to be achieved:

Stored cold water - <20 oC after 2 minutes of running

Cold water distribution (furthest point) - <20 oC after 2 minutes of

running

Hot water generator – min 60 oC

Return to hot water generator - > 50 oC

Hot water distribution (nearest and furthest points from hot water generator) - > 50 oC after 1 minute of running)

Flushing:

L8.

HSG274 Part 2.

Where a time period of longer than 1 week occurs between the cleaning and

disinfection process and handover to UWE a programme of weekly flushing is to be undertaken.

A sequential process of flushing each outlet is to be carried out. Flush the outlets until the temperature at the outlet stabilises and is comparable

to supply water and purge to drain.

Requirements Post Handover – within 2 weeks (action by UWE legionella consultant)

Legionella risk

assessment:

L8

A legionella risk assessment is to be carried out to assess the risk from the

legionella organism.

The assessment is to be carried out once building occupancy levels have reached “normal” operating conditions.


Handover documentation record

Building Name

Handover date

Documents Yes No N/A

Schematics

Cleaning and disinfection certificate

UKAS microbiological certificates

Temperature profile

Flushing records

WRAS certification


Process water systems

Process Number 2.2

Task Building handover protocol from build contractor to UWE for new buildings and major refurbishments

System Process water systems


Cleaning and

Disinfection:

Design guide for specific system

HSG274 Part 3

The system once totally complete is to be cleaned and disinfected. This

process is to include:

Storage device within system

Cold water distribution

Hot water distribution

Spray devices

Devices that may trap debris – Filters etc

All individual outlets

Microbiological Sampling:

BS 7592.

BS 8558.

Following the cleaning and disinfection microbiological samples are to be taken across the system to give a representation of the water quality.

Samples are to be submitted to a UKAS laboratory for analysis. Samples are to be taken from the following points:

Mains cold water services feeding the system - TVCC

Stored cold water services (closest to storage and furthest

point from storage) - TVCC

Hot water services (each hot water generator and furthest

point from generator) – TVCC and Legionella

Spray outlet - Legionella TVCC:



Coliforms

E.Coli

Flushing:

L8.

HSG274 Part 3.

Where a time period of longer than 1 week occurs between the cleaning and disinfection process and handover to UWE a programme of weekly

flushing is to be undertaken.

A sequential process of flushing each outlet is to be carried out. Flush the outlets until the temperature at the outlet stabilises and is

comparable to supply water and purge to drain.

Post Handover – within 2 weeks (action by UWE legionella consultant)

Legionella risk

assessment

L8

A legionella risk assessment is to be carried out to assess the risk from

the legionella organism. The assessment is to be carried out once building occupancy levels have

reached “normal” operating conditions.


Building

Handover date


Schematics

Cleaning and disinfection certificate

UKAS microbiological certificates

Flushing records

WRAS certification


Closed heating and cooling circuits

Process Number 2.3

Task Building handover protocol from build contractor to UWE for new buildings and major

refurbishments

System Heating and cooling closed circuit systems


Pre-Commission cleaning:

BSRIA Pre-Commission Cleaning of Pipework Systems BG29

BG50 Water Treatment for Closed Heating

and Cooling Systems

The system once totally complete is to be pre-

commission cleaned in accordance with BSRIA standards.

Microbiological and chemical sampling:

BSRIA Pre-Commission Cleaning of

Pipework Systems BG29

BG50 Water Treatment for Closed Heating and Cooling Systems

On completion of the pre-commission cleaned

the system is to be sampled in accordance with

BSRIA standards. The samples are to be submitted to a UKAS accredited laboratory.


Name of Building

Handover date


Schematics

Pre-commission cleaning certificate

UKAS microbiological and chemical certificates

BACK | HOME | FORWARD 1

UWE signage design guidelines

Version 1.0

September 2017 CONTENTS


Contents Introduction 3

Basic elements 4UWE Logo 5

Colour 6

Typeface 7

Pictograms 8

Campus map 9

Sign reference protocol 10

Materials and finishes 11

External signage 12Overview 13-14

Primary entrance signs (Type 1) 15

Direction signs (Type 2) 16-18

Fingerpost signs (Type 3) 19

Map signs (Type 4) 20

Building signs (Type 5) 21-22

Car park and info signs (Type 6) 23

Internal signage 24Overview 25-26

Sign construction principle 27

Block identification signs (Type 1) 28

Destination signs (Type 2) 29

Direction signs (Type 3) 30


Directory signs (Type 5) 32

Toilet/lift/shower signs (Type 6) 33

Room information signs (Type 7) 34

Gallery 35External signs 36

Internal signs 37-38

Contact and resources 39


Introduction In the Spring of 2016 a new brand was created and implemented for The Univervisity of the West of England (UWE).

With the emergence of the new UWE brand, there was a need and opportunity to unify and clarify an integrated signage system that incorporates and is inline with the new brand ethos.

The following pages give an overview for the design and specification of the new UWE signage scheme.

This document gives details for interior and exterior signage in their respective sections, with a gallery of already produced signage examples at the back of this guideline.

When creating new signage, always check (see contact reference page) to see if there is an existing template available. This will help to achieve consistency of delivery across all of our signage.

New signage (interior or exterior) should not be commissioned without the approval from the UWE facilities department (see contact page for details).


UWE Logo 5

Colour 6

Typeface 7

Pictograms 8

Campus map 9

Sign reference protocol 10

Materials and finishes 11

Basic elements


Basic elements

UWE LogoIn almost all instances of signage (external and internal) the UWE logo appears at the top, either centred or ranged right and set onto a grey background.

To ensure that you use the correct version of the UWE logo, refer to the UWE brand guidelines.

For specific sizes and placement, please see the relevant pages that follow for further information. Frenchay

Campus

North Entrance

All visitors must report to reception

Car parks 1-11 P

Glenside Campus


Basic elements

ColourThe 2 key colours for all UWE signage is Grey and White. This has been implemented to help avoid a confusion of colour, improve legibility and imply a sense of consistency across all signage.

Colour finishes

Statutory palette

Material finish

UWE Red (satin)

to match PMS 185c

C:0 M:100 Y:100 K:0

Parking Blue (satin)

to match PMS 185c

C:100 M:20 Y:100 K:0

Metallic silver (satin)

Stainless Steel / aluminium


Powder coating or spray finish

Signage Grey (satin)

to match PMS 431c

C:10 M:0 Y:0 K:65 or

RAL 7005

Traffic White (satin)

RAL 9016

Display panel colour

CautionPMS Process Yellow

PMS Process Black

FirePMS 340 Green

High white

ProhibitionPMS 485

High white

InformationPMS Process Blue

High white

Signage panel construction finish (excluding display panel faces)

UWE brand mark when used on signage panels

Parking symbol and blue elements on car park signs

Lettering, arrows, pictograms and graphic information. Also background colour for destination panels


Basic elements

TypefaceSignage at UWE is to be set exclusively in Parisine Pro (Regular/Bold)

As a general rule, information/direction text should be set in Parisine Pro Regular and Building names/titles/headings etc ... in Parisine Pro Bold.

Parisine Pro Bold

ABCDEFGHijkLmnoPqRstuVwxyzabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz1234567890

Parisine Pro Regular

ABCDEFGHIjKLMNOPqRSTUvWxYzabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz1234567890


Cashpoint Wifi

Basic elements

PictogramsHere is a selection of pictograms that are appropriate for use on UWE signage. As further pictograms are required, always consult with the originators of the pictogram family (see contact page for details).

Male toilet Baby feeding facilities

First aid

Bus Motorcycles

Female toilet Accessible toiletGender neutral toilet

Shop

Showers

Parking

Cloakroom

Information

No vaping/smoking

Café

Cycle rack

Stairs

Braille

No photography

Car

Lift

No eating/drinking

Cycles

Accessible liftMulti Faith room

No mobile phones

Baby change

Pedestrians

Data points


Basic elements

Campus mapSubheading textBody text

Campus map project to be agreed / advised by UWE team


Basic elements

Sign reference protocol and id stickers (asset tags)Every sign throughout each campus will have it’s own unique reference and asset tag.Shown here is the protocol that was used for generating signage references.

This should also be used when adding new signage for any part of a campus.

Asset tags are self adhesive stickers 50mm x 20mm and applied to a discreet edge or reverse of sign, whichever is more appropriate.

Asset tags will enable easy cross referencing when any changes/amends are required.

Layout details

1 Parisine Regular 25pt. Centred

Example sign referencesUWE Campuses:

Frenchay (including Bristol Business Park)

Glenside

Internal signs

External signs

UWE City Campuses:

Arnolfini

Bower Ashton

Spike Island

Watershed

UWE Floor levels:

*1 – Lower Ground Floor

2 – Ground Floor

3 – First Floor

4 – Second Floor

5 – Third Floor

6 – Fourth Floor

7 – Fifth Floor

* Buildings without a Lower Ground Floor will start at 1 – Ground Floor

Campus reference (this instance refers to ‘Frenchay’)

Floor reference (this instance refers to Floor 2)

Sign number (an allowance of up to 999 signs per floor)

Building reference (this instance refers to building ‘N’)

FN2 001

Campus reference (this instance refers to ‘Glenside’)

This refers to ‘External’)

Sign number (an allowance of up to 999 signs)

GE- 001FN2001

1

50mm

20mm


Basic elements

Materials and finishesShown here are a selection of typical materials and finishes that have already been adopted for new UWE signage.See ‘Gallery’ section for more examples of new signage.

Resin display panels Perspex/acrylic panels with white opaque backing

Aluminium for large graphic and information display panels

Stainless steel/aluminium for sign background panels

Detail of toilet sign edgeToilet signs with chamfered edge

Stainless steel floor numbers applied to walls

White acrylic floor number signs Brushed stainless steel posts


External signageOverview 13-14

Primary entrance signs (Type 1) 15

Direction signs (Type 2) 16-18

Fingerpost signs (Type 3) 19


Building signs (Type 5) 21-22

Car park and info signs (Type 6) 23

= 100 mm square


Glenside Campus

Main reception

Library

Student Union

Blackberry Centre

The Riverside Unit

Medical Records

Education Centre

A B

D E


Car parks 1-11 P

Glenside Campus

Cycle path

Pedestrians

Information point

Car Parks 1–3P

P

P q

A-n

Centre for Performing Arts

Mallard House

visitor Car Park 19 iFrenchay Campus

North Entrance

Type 1Primary entrance signs

Type 2Direction signs

Type 3Fingerpost signs

External signage

Overview 1 of 2This page shows a general layout and size proportions for the following sign types:

Type 1 Primary entrance signs

Type 2 Direction signs

Type 3 Fingerpost signs

Type 4-6 signs (see next page)

See relevant sign pages for details of each sign type.

Building signs (occupancy)

Type 4Campus map signs

Type 5Building signs (letter identification)

Type 6Car park and information signs


Private land

uwE Bristol sande volupta tiasin et aut es eaquatem. Ris dusam in

Restricted Access (Parking charges apply)See notes in car park for detail. vehicles parked entirely at owners risk

For authorised users only

ACar Park


3

k

A B C D E F G H i j k

Glenside CampusMap

KeyAccum volorerovid

Ugat venet parum

ventiae nient

Ut occuptur

quo eos comnis

Archict

Accum volorerovid

Ugat venet parum

ventiae nient

Ut occuptur

quo eos comnis

Archictv

Accum volorerovid

Ugat venet parum

ventiae nient

Ut occuptur

quo eos comnis

you are here

Occupation information





Frenchay Campus D

Title of this Building

Glenside Campus

Catherine Hawkins Building

Glenside Campus k

Glenside Library

External signage

Overview 2 of 2This page shows a general layout and size proportions for:

Type 4 Campus map signs

Type 5 Building (identification and occupancy) signs

Type 6 Car park and information signs

See relevant sign pages for details of each sign type.

= 100 mm square

= 100 mm square


External signage

Primary entrance signs (Type 1)

Materials and features• Monolithfreestandingconstruction

• Internalilluminationoption

• Powdercoatedorsprayedsatinsilveraluminium side returns/border

• Acyclic,white/greyfrontfacepanels

• Steel,boxconstructionplinthsetintoconcrete foundation

• 50mmcornerradius

Layout details

1 Centred 750mm wide UWE logo

2 Parisine Bold 600/720pt. 200mm left margin

3 Parisine Regular 450pt. 200mm left margin

Frenchay Campus

North Entrance

Type 1aFull height version

Side profile

Type 1bLow level version

1

1

2

2

3

3 North Entrance

Frenchay Campus

Edge detail


RAL 7005


RAL 7005

UWE Red (satin) to match

Pms 185c

White acrylic panel


sprayed or powdercoat



= 100 mm square BACK | HOME | FORWARD 16

External signage

Large direction signs (Type 2a)

Materials and features• 2000mmwide,aluminiumdisplaypanels

• 90mm,satinstainlesssteelposts

• UWEbrandingongreysurface

• Wayfindinginformationonwhitesurface

• Upper/lowercornersonpanelsareradiused(interior corners of slats are square)

• Multipleslat,singlepanelanddual panel options

• Thisversionshows9slats200mmhighandset 30mm apart

• 50mmcornerradius(whereapplicable)

Layout details

1 500mm wide UWE logo set 210mm from right edge


3 Parisine Regular 450/550pt. 110mm left margin

4 160mm high arrow set 110mm from right edge

5 130mm high arrow set 110mm from left/right edge

6 100mm ‘block’ letters set 350mm from left edge and spaced 20mm apart


Bower Ashton Campus

Department of Creative Industries

Main Entrance

Glenside Campus

Main reception

Library

Student Union

Blackberry Centre

The Riverside Unit

Medical Records

Education Centre

A B C

D GE HF j k

Multiple slat version (1200 x 2750 approx)

Single panel example (1200 x 2000)

1

2

5

6

7

3 4

5


RAL 7005


Pms 185c


RAL 9016


stainless steel

200mm slats set 30mm apart

Panel fixing detail

Lower panel/post detail

Post cap fixing detail


RAL 7005

= 100 mm square


External signage

Medium direction signs (Type 2b)

Materials and features• 1200mmwidedisplaypanels

• Satinstainlesssteel90mmposts





• 35mmcornerradiustopanels

Layout details



3 80mm symbol set 100mm from left edge




7 100mm high arrow set 100mm from left edge

Glenside Campus

Museum


Car Park 6 Cycle Park

Retail Deliveries

Car Parks 16, 17

Loading Bayn

UWE Exhibition and Conference Centre

Campus destination example (1200 x 1000)

Direction only example (1200 x 800)

Single message example (1200 x 700)

4 7

2 53

6

1


RAL 7005


RAL 7005


Pms 185c


RAL 9016


stainless steel

Panel fixing detailPost cap fixing detail


= 100 mm square


External signage

Small direction signs (Type 2c)

Materials and features• 1000mmwidedisplaypanels

• Satinstainlesssteel75mmposts

• UWEwelcomemessageongreysurface




• Individualslatsare185mmhighandset 20mm apart)


Layout details

1 Parisine Bold 200pt. 60mm left margin

2 60mm symbol set 60mm from left edge



5 100mm wide (as shown) arrow set 60mm from right edge


GlensideTRADERSdeliveries

welcome to uwE Bristol

4 slat example (1000 x 800)

3 slat example (1000 x 600)

Single panel example (1000 x 600)

Single slat example (1000 x 185)

Double slat example (1000 x 380)

1 2 3 4 5 6

Car Parks 16, 17

n

Car Parks 16, 17

Car Parks 16, 17

Retail DeliveriesReception

Loading bay

Cycle path

Cycle path

Pedestrians


RAL 7005


RAL 7005


RAL 9016


stainless steel

Panel fixing detailPost cap fixing detail



= 100 mm square= 100 mm square


External signage

Fingerpost signs (Type 3)

Materials and features• Satinstainlesssteel90mmposts

• Wayfindinginformationonwhite acrylic slats (800mm x 90mm)

• Upper/lowercornersonslatsareradiused(interior corners are square)

• Slatsarealignedverticallywithhiddenlocating pins

• Maximum6slatsperelevation.Ifmorearerequired, group information on 1 slat to save space


Layout details

1 Parisine Regular 120pt. Ranged left 40mm left edge. 1 character space away from symbol (where applicable)

2 53mm symbol. 40mm left/right margin. Multiples set 10mm apart.

3 Parisine Regular 120pt. Ranged right 40mm from right edge. 1 character space away from symbol (where applicable)

Information point

Car Parks 1–3P

P

P q

A-n


Mallard House

visitor Car Park 19 i


visitor Car Park 19

Car Parks 1–3P

P

1

Information point

P q

A-n

i

3 2

2


RAL 7005

White acrylic panel


stainless steel

Slat profile detail

= 100 mm square


External signage

Map signs (Type 4)


(Type 4a)

• Powdercoatedorsprayedsatinsilversidereturns/border



• Mappaneltoberemovableforupdates

• 50mmcornerradius

Layout details


2 Parisine Bold/Regular 170/200pt. 90mm left margin

3 Map design TBC

4 Key layout/design TBC



Ugat venet parum

ventiae nient

Ut occuptur

quo eos comnis

Archict

Accum volorerovid

Ugat venet parum

ventiae nient

Ut occuptur

quo eos comnis

Archictv

Accum volorerovid

Ugat venet parum

ventiae nient

Ut occuptur

quo eos comnis

you are here

you are here



Ugat venet parum

ventiae nient

Ut occuptur

quo eos comnis

Archict

Accum volorerovid

Ugat venet parum

ventiae nient

Ut occuptur

quo eos comnis

Archictv

Accum volorerovid

Ugat venet parum

ventiae nient

Ut occuptur

quo eos comnis

you are here

Type 4aMonolith version

Type 4bWall mounted version

Glenside CampusMap

Glenside CampusMap

1

2

3

4

Edge detail


RAL 7005


RAL 7005


Pms 185c

White acrylic panel



= 100 mm square


External signage

Building occupancy signs (Type 5a/b/c)Materials and features• Powdercoatedorsprayedsatinsilverside

returns/border

• UWEGreytitlepanels

• Whiteacrylicinformationpanels

• Letteringexternalgradevinyl

• Occupancyinformationonwhitesurface

• Wallorpostmounted


Layout details





5 1.5mm grey separator line. 50mm left margin





1 7

Type 5aSmall/medium version (building name only)

600/900mm x 400mm

Type 5aSmall version (building name and single occupation information)

600mm x 400mm

Type 5bSmall version (building name and multiple occupation information)

600mm x 900mm

Type 5cLarge version (building name and multiple or single occupation information)

900mm x 600/1200mm

Glenside Campus k

Glenside Library

Frenchay Campus


D

title of this Building






Frenchay Campus D







Frenchay Campus D


Pervasive Media Studio

Cultural Studio

Café and Bar

Conference Centre

uwE Bristol

Frenchay Campus D

Frenchay Campus A

Coursework Hub

Glenside Campus

Catherine Hawkins Building

Glenside Campus

Catherine Hawkins Building 2

3

4

58

9

6Edge detail


RAL 7005


RAL 7005


Pms 185c

White acrylic panel



= 100 mm square


External signage

Building letter identity signs (Type 5d/e)Materials and features• Highvisibilitybuildinglettersigns

• Mountedatprominentlocationsonbuilding exteriors for clear orientation

• TrafficWhite(RAL9016)letteronUWEgrey aluminium, box constructed panels

Layout details

1 600mm high Parisine Bold letterform. Centred

2 50mm corner radius



Type 5dLarge version (for identifying buildings at a further distance)

1000mm x 1000mm x100mm

Type 5eSmall version (for closer distance identification)

600mm x 600mm x 70mm

kA1 2 43


RAL 7005


RAL 9016

= 100 mm square


External signage

Car park and info signs (Type 6a/b/c)Materials and features• Satinstainlesssteel90/75mmposts

• 3-sidedoptionforType5asigns

• Aluminium(dibond)displaypanels

• Panelstohaveradiusedcorners

Panel sizes

1 Medium information, orientation signs 600mm x 900mm (90mm posts) 35mm radius corners

2 Dual message symbol signs 300mm x 600mm (75mm posts) 25mm radius corners

3 Single message symbol signs 300mm x 300mm (75mm posts) 25mm corners

Pay here


Car Park


3Private land


Restricted Access (Parking charges apply)See notes in car park for detail. vehicles parked entirely at owners risk

For authorised users only

Sid

e p

rofi

le

Type 6a

3-sided high-level orientation signs

Type 6b

Dual message low-level sign

Type 6b

Single message low-level sign (variable height)

Type 6c

Medium size car park information panel sign

1

3

3

12


RAL 7005


c100 m20 y0 k0


c100 m20 y0 k0


c100 m20 y0 k0


RAL 9016


stainless steel


RAL 7005


Internal signageOverview 25-26

Sign construction principle 27

Block identification signs (Type 1) 28

Destination signs (Type 2) 29

Direction signs (Type 3) 30


Directory signs (Type 5) 32

Toilet/lift/shower signs (Type 6) 33

Room information signs (Type 7) 34

= 100 mm square


F L2

G H k jE m

1N1-31

1N41-95

Toilets

Lift

n 1L2

information

Coursework HubE

n

Information Point

Students’ Union

Library

Octagon

E L2 The Hub

Student village

Centre for Sport

Exhibition & Conference centre

P q R

Type 2 Destination signs (suspended, wall mounted and vinyl)


Student Services

Waiting Area

Type 1 Block ID signs

F

school of Life sciencesDepartment of Applied SciencesDepartment of Psychology

Internal signage


Type 1 Block ID signs

Type 2 Destination signs


(see next page for Type 4-6 signs)

= 100 mm square


Internal signage



Type 5 Directory / floor plan signs

Type 6 Toilet/lift/shower signs

Type 7 Room information signs

Note: all signs shown are for example only and not actual signs

you are here


Glenside CampusMap


Ugat venet parum

ventiae nient

Ut occuptur

quo eos comnis

Archict

Accum volorerovid

Ugat venet parum

ventiae nient

Ut occuptur

quo eos comnis

Archictv

Accum volorerovid

Ugat venet parum

ventiae nient

Ut occuptur

quo eos comnis

you are here

n 62

Not every disability is visible

name of staff member Position held

1k4 Room Title




1A07 Room Title


Type 5 Directory / floor plan signs

Type 6 Toilet/lift/shower signs

Type 7 Room information signs

Future Students

Strategic Communications and Engagement

Toilets

2

-1

Human Resources

Commercial Services

Research, Business and Innovation

Toilets

Showers

0

Estates and Facilities

Finance

Toilets

1

n 62



Ugat venet parum

ventiae nient

Ut occuptur

quo eos comnis

Archict

Accum volorerovid

Ugat venet parum

ventiae nient

Ut occuptur

quo eos comnis

Archictv

Accum volorerovid

Ugat venet parum

ventiae nient

Ut occuptur

quo eos comnis

you are here

Glenside CampusMap


Sign construction principleShown opposite is a suggested principle of construction that minimises use of materials, keeping weight of signs to a minimum. Details of fixing/bonding etc ... to be specified by manufacturer.

Graphic information is applied as a single vinyl element and can be removed/updated as required.

All signs to have an identification number (sign reference) sticker applied to the top or bottom edge, depending on the hanging height of sign and applied to the most discreet edge.

This method of construction would apply to the following types of sign:

• Type 2 Destination signs

• Type 3 Direction signs

• Type 4 Campus map signs

• Type 5 Directory / floor plan signs

Frame material

Machined and finished, aluminium or sprayed silver resin frame sections.

35mm radiused upper and lower corners.

Butted construction as advised by manufacturer.

Addition of brace/support bar to support display panels on larger signs

Display panel

White opalescent acrylic panel (material to be confirmed) with opaque white backing and vinyl sign graphics affixed to front face.

Option for making display panel removable/replaceable with clip fixing to rear of panel.

vinyl graphic

Single sheet vinyl graphic applied over display panel. Can be removed/updated when required.

Display method

Signs to be fixed to walls/doors/glazing (where appropriate). Also option of suspending double/single sided versions from ceiling.

Constructed sign

20mm frame sections

6mm frame edge to front elevation

Frame dimensions

Standard width of frame is 600mm. This can vary dependant on sign requirements

Height of frame dependant on sign requirements

50mm

3mm display panels

50mm

Edge detail Sign id sticker



= 100 mm square


Internal signage

Block identification signs (Type 1)

Materials and features• Clearandconsistentblockwayfinding

• 35mmradiusedcorners

• 400mmx400mmx60mm

• Optionsforsuspending,wallmounting and projecting signs

• 20mmdeep,silver/aluminiummounting block for projecting version

Layout details



Suspended version

Wall mounted version

Side profile

Side profile

Projecting version

nn

1 2


RAL 7005

n

= 100 mm square


Internal signage

Destination signs (Type 2a/b/c)

Materials and features• Suspended(type2a)orwallmounted(type2b)


• Currentlocation/destinationinformationongrey surface

• Forspecificationandfinishsee‘signconstruction principle’ page

• 35mmcornerradiustosigns

Layout details

1 Parisine Regular 400pt. Centred vertically and horizontally

2 Parisine Bold 270pt. Heading centred, margin dependant on message

3 Parisine Regular 170/230pt. Ranged left with heading, margin dependant on message

4 Parisine Regular 300pt. Centred vertically and horizontally

5 110mm symbol

6 Size of message dependant on space available


Coursework Hub

information

Type 2a (1.6m)

Large suspended version

(1600mm x 400mm)

Type 2a (1.2m)

Large suspended version

(1200mm x 400mm)

Type 2b

Smaller, suspended or wall mounted version

(1000mm x 300mm)

Type 2 c (vinyl)

vinyl decal versions for glazed and facia areas. White lettering applied to tinted background for enhanced legibility. Can also have solid grey background on unglazed areas where appropriate.

Edge detail

school of Life sciencesDepartment of Applied SciencesDepartment of Psychology

1

5

2

3

4

6


RAL 7005





Internal signage

Direction signs (Type 3)

Materials and features• Suspended(type3a)orwallmounted(type3b)


• Currentlocation/destinationinformationongrey surface


• Forspecificationandfinishsee‘signconstruction principle’ page


Layout details

1 70mm ‘box’ graphic, Parisine Bold 170pt characters. 50mm from left edge and spaced 30mm apart






Current block location

Current floor level

Current stairwell (if applicable)

Wayfinding information (on white area)

Chamfered or radiused edges to display panel

F G

1N1-31

1N41-95

L 15F 2

G H k jE m

1N1-31

1N41-95

Toilets

Lift

n 12

j H

G m

G H j k

Room 1k4

Rooms 1k5-11

Way out

Toilets

k 1

Information Point

Students’ Union

Library

Octagon

E 2 The Hub

Student village

Centre for Sport

Exhibition & Conference centre

P q R

Type 3a

Large double aspect, suspended version. variable height options to suit requirements

Type 3b

Medium and small signs. variable height options to suit requirements. Wall mounted or suspended as required.

F G

1N1-31

1N41-95

L 15

Edge detail

1

2 3 54


RAL 7005


RAL 7005



= 100 mm square


Internal signage

Map signs (Type 4)


(Type 4a)




• Mappaneltoberemovableforupdates


Layout details


2 Parisine Bold/Regular 170/200pt. 90mm left margin

3 Map design TBC

4 Key layout/design TBC

Note: all signs shown are for example only and not actual signs A B C D E F G H i j k


Ugat venet parum

ventiae nient

Ut occuptur

quo eos comnis

Archict

Accum volorerovid

Ugat venet parum

ventiae nient

Ut occuptur

quo eos comnis

Archictv

Accum volorerovid

Ugat venet parum

ventiae nient

Ut occuptur

quo eos comnis

you are here

you are here



Ugat venet parum

ventiae nient

Ut occuptur

quo eos comnis

Archict

Accum volorerovid

Ugat venet parum

ventiae nient

Ut occuptur

quo eos comnis

Archictv

Accum volorerovid

Ugat venet parum

ventiae nient

Ut occuptur

quo eos comnis

you are here

Type 4aMonolith version

Type 4bWall mounted version

Glenside CampusMap

Glenside CampusMap

1

2

3

4

Edge detail


RAL 7005


Pms 185c


stainless steel



Internal signage

Directory signs (Type 5)

Materials and features For specification and finish see ‘sign construction principle’ page


• Wallmountedwithconcealedfixings

• Currentfloorlevelhighlightedingrey


Layout details



3 30mm high toilet symbols (male/female). Set 2 character spaces from text

4 Parisine Regular 90/105pt with 12mm paragraph spacing. 120mm left margin


6 Floor plan illustrations to be created as required and in the set style already in place.


Current block location

Current floor level

Current stairwell (if applicable)

Chamfered or radiused edges to display panel

Future Students


Toilets

2

1

n 62

Human Resources

Commercial Services

n 62

Future Students


Toilets

2

-1

Human Resources

Commercial Services

Research, Business and Innovation

Toilets

Showers

0


Finance

Toilets

1

n 62

Wall mounted directory and floor plan signs. Consistent in size and positioned at key stairwell/entrance areas.

Detail of floor plan example (not an actual sign)

1

2 3 4 5


Finance

Toilets

0 Signage Grey (satin)

RAL 7005


RAL 7005



6

6



Internal signage

Toilet/lift/shower signs (Type 6a/b)

Materials and features• Type6a–projectingsigns200mmhigh

• Type6b–door/wallmountedsigns150mmhigh

• Opalacrylicdisplaypanelswithopaquewhite backing and surface applied grey (PMS 431) vinyl graphics

• Projectingversionconstructedfromx2 5mm panels

• 60mmdeepx90mmwide/highmachined,aluminium mounting block for projecting signs

• Concealingfixingsforallsigns


• ‘Lift’messagecanhavedesignatednumberif appropriate

Layout details

1 Symbols to be set centrally between outer edge and edge of mounting bracket

2 100mm symbol box centred between outer edge and edge of mounting bracket

3 Parisine Bold 80pt. Centred

4 110mm high symbol, centred on panel


Lift

Side elevation

(x2 5mm panels)

Side elevation

(5mm panel)

Type 6a – Projecting signs250mm x 200mm for multi symbol signs

200mm x 200mm for single symbol signs

Type 6b – Door/wall signs


Double-sided projecting version

Door mounted version

1 2 3

4


RAL 7005

White acrylic panel


stainless steel

Type 6a signs



Internal signage

Room information signs (Type 7)

Materials and features• Papyrusoff-the-shelfdoorplatesystem

• Singleormulti-occupancyoptions

• Removableinformationpaperpanelfor easy updating.

• WordtemplatesareavailablefromUWEestates (see contact page) for generating new signs

• Signsshouldbescrewedtodoorwherepossible. For fully glazed doors, self adhesive system is available. Grey vinyl is applied to opposite side of glazing to obscure fixing tape on back of signs.

Layout details

1 Small room sign (297mm x 105mm). Use available word template for generating new signs (see contact page for UWE estates details)

2 Large room sign (297mm x 210mm). Use available word template for generating new signs (see contact page for UWE estates details)

3 UWE asset tag reference vinyl sticker for doors and reverse of signs (see page 10 for further detail on asset tags)

4 Parisine Regular 25pt. Centred

Type 7a Size 1

Single occupancy door sign

Signs to be aligned with top of glazed panel for consistency

unique door identification sticker (asset tag)

Type 7b Size 2

Multiple occupancy door sign (suggest x5 as the recommended maximum)


1k4 Room Title




1A07 Room Title


1A07 Room Title


1k4 Room Title



1

2

3FN2001

4


GalleryExternal signs 36

Internal signs 37

Type 2a – large direction sign

Type 2c – small direction sign

Type 3 – fingerpost sign

Type 2c – small direction sign

Architectural lettering

Facia sign


External signs


Internal signs

Type 5 – directory / floor plan signs

Type 6a – projecting lift sign

Type 4 – Campus map sign structure with directory content

Type 6a – projecting toilet sign

Type 3a – suspended direction signs

Door asset tag sticker


Internal signs

Type 7 – papyrus door sign (small)

Reception desk – illuminated sign

Type 7 – papyrus door sign (large) Large floor id number sign

Type 3a – suspended direction sign detail


UWE Facilities

Pete Sutherland

Head of Space Management and Design

T: 0117 32 86 284E: [email protected]

Signage design consultants

Howard Miles – Managing DirectorABG Design

T: 01872 248 355E: [email protected]

Contacts and resourcesFor advice on new signage or templates for papyrus door signs, please contact UWE facilities in the first instance.

Note for sign contractors:To be compliant with risk assesment protocol, prior agreement to be on any UWE campus site must be obtained from UWE facilities department before any work or audit is undertaken.

UWE Facilities

Design Guide

Appendix: Acoustic Standards


A p p e n d i x | A c o u s t i c S t a n d a r d s I s s u e 1 . 3 P a g e | 1

Contents

1. Introduction ........................................................................................................ 2

2. Sound Insulation between Rooms - Airborne Sound between Rooms ....................... 2

3. Airborne Sound Insulation between Rooms and Circulation Spaces .......................... 3

4. Impact and Air Borne Sound Insulation of Floors .................................................... 4

5. Noise from Outside .............................................................................................. 4

6. Room Acoustics ................................................................................................... 5

7. Noise from Building Services ................................................................................ 6

8. Acoustic Design of Residential Accommodation ...................................................... 7



1. Introduction

This section deals with acoustic standards within new and re-furbished UWE buildings. The

overarching objective is to provide acoustic conditions within each room which are

compatible with its intended purpose.

The acoustic requirements are dealt with under the following headings; • Sound insulation between rooms • Noise entering the building from outside • Room acoustics • Noise from building services • Acoustic Design of Residential Accommodation

Many of the standards are derived from those contained in the DfES publication BB93

Acoustic Design of Schools. The standards described in that publication are, under the

Building Regulations, mandatory for new and refurbished school buildings. For universities

they are not mandatory. While they form a useful starting point, some spaces within a

university fall outside the requirements of most schools, and in some cases higher acoustic

standards may be justified even when rooms are being put to similar uses.

2. Sound Insulation between Rooms - Airborne Sound between Rooms

The table below lists various types of room according to their function, along with the

required level of airborne sound insulation.

Where a wall separates two rooms with different functions, the standard of sound insulation

to be applied will be the higher of the two.

The quantity used to specify sound insulation here is DnT(Tmfmax),w as defined in BB93.

This is the standardized level difference between the two rooms, measured according to the

requirements of ISO 140 part 4 and standardised to the highest recommended mid

frequency reverberation time in either of the two rooms. It is then frequency weighted as

described in ISO 717 part 2. It is not the same as the weighted sound reduction index,

abbreviated to Rw and commonly used by suppliers of building materials to characterise

their products.



Type(s) of Room Min Value of

DnT(Tmfmax),w

Academic staff and admin offices, meeting rooms 45dB

Cafeterias, coffee bars etc. 45dB

Class rooms, lecture rooms, seminar rooms and tutorial rooms.

Audio Visual and video conference rooms and language laboratories

45dB

Drama studios, music practice rooms. 55dB

Halls and rooms for music drama and other live performances 55dB

Large lecture theatres and flagship conference rooms 50dB

Lecture theatres up to 100 seats 45dB

Library circulation and media storage areas 40dB

Library study areas 45dB

Recording studios 60dB*

Rooms intended for clinical examination and treatment,

Confidential interviews, psychotherapy, speech therapy etc.

50dB*

Science laboratories, art and design studios, graphics workshops 40dB

Sports halls and gymnasia 50dB

Swimming pools 45dB

Workshops 45dB*

* Denotes that requirements can vary considerably and specialist design input may be required.

3. Airborne Sound Insulation between Rooms and Circulation Spaces

It is difficult to measure sound insulation values between a room and an odd shaped space

such as a corridor. As a result it is normal to specify minimum values of the weighted sound

reduction index Rw required of partition systems and doors separating a room from a

circulation space. Two levels of sound insulation are specified here for these situations.

Structure Minimum

value of Rw

Partition separating a teaching space or office from a circulation area 40dB

Door within the above partition, rated as a complete door set 30dB

Partition separating a teaching space for specialised purposes (such as

music or drama) from a circulation area

45dB

Door within the above partition, rated as a complete door set 35dB

Specialist acoustic design input will be required if a teaching room or other noise sensitive

room opens into a busy atrium or through corridor, or in the case of large lecture theatres

and conference rooms with a waiting/ social area immediately outside their doors.



4. Impact and Air Borne Sound Insulation of Floors

Impact sound insulation deals with the transmission of noise to the rooms below from noise

sources in contact with the floor. Typical noise sources include footsteps, moving furniture

and machinery. Because the internal layout of a building may be changed many times

during its lifetime, a single set of standards is applied here for the airborne and impact

sound insulation of floors. In the case of airborne sound insulation, the quantity specified is,

as before, DnT(Tmfmax),w. For impact sound insulation the quantity specified is L'nT,w, as

defined in ISO 140 part 7 and ISO 717 part 2.

Minimum value of DnT(Tmfmax),w 55 dB

Maximum value of L'nT,w 55 dB

5. Noise from Outside

The maximum sound pressure levels due to external noise intrusion are listed in the table

below. These values include noise contributions from transport – including road and rail

traffic and civil aviation – from the weather, and from industrial and human activity both on

and off University’s premises. Building and civil engineering work are not included since they

are temporary in nature.

The values listed should be considered in conjunction with the specification for building

services noise which appears later. Control of external noise involves consideration of the

ambient noise levels at the specific site involved, the sound insulation properties of the

building shell (including the roof structure in the case of aircraft noise) and the impact on

sound insulation of any ventilation requirements such as the need for opening windows.

Type(s) of room Maximum value

of LAeq,30 minutes

Academic staff and admin offices 40dB

Cafeterias, coffee bars etc. 45dB

Class rooms, lecture rooms, seminar rooms and tutorial Rooms

Audio visual and video conference rooms Language laboratories

35dB

Drama studios, music practice rooms 30dB

Entrance halls, corridors, stairwells, atria and circulation spaces 45dB

Halls and rooms for music drama & other live performances 30dB

Large lecture theatres and flagship conference rooms 30dB

Lecture theatres up to 100 seats 35dB

Library circulation and media storage areas 40dB

Library study areas 35dB



Type(s) of room Maximum value

of LAeq,30 minutes

Recording studios 25dB


confidential interviews, psychotherapy, speech therapy etc.

35dB

Science laboratories, art & design studios, graphics workshops 35dB

Sports halls and gymnasia 40dB

Swimming pools 50dB

Workshops 40dB

Rain falling on lightweight roofs can cause disturbing noise inside the building, for example

in a sports hall used for examinations. This subject is still developing and there is as yet no

standard for measuring noise from rain within buildings. The variability of the weather is an

added difficulty when setting standards for this since very exceptional rainfalls will occur

occasionally. Building designers are expected to supply information about expected rain

noise levels in the light of up to date knowledge and experience on other similar projects.

6. Room Acoustics

Control of reverberation within buildings is important in creating good learning and working

conditions within the building. The quantity listed in the table below is the mid frequency

reverberation time, Tmf, as defined in BB93 (and based on measurements made according

to ISO 3382:2000. This is obtained by calculating the arithmetic average of the

reverberation times in the octave bands centred on 500 Hz, 1,000 Hz and 2,000 Hz. As well

as being important in its own right, the reverberation time enters into the calculation of

standardised sound insulation parameters.

Type(s) of room Max. value of Tmf

Academic staff and admin offices 1.0 s

Cafeterias, coffee bars etc. 1.0 s



0.8 s

Drama studios, music practice rooms 1.2 s

Entrance halls, corridors, stairwells, atria and circulation spaces 1.0 s

Halls and rooms for music drama and other live performances 1.2 s

Large lecture theatres and flagship conference rooms 1.0 s

Lecture theatres up to 100 seats 0.8 s

Library circulation and media storage areas 1.0 s

Library study areas 0.8 s

Recording studios 0.6 s

Rooms intended for clinical examination and treatment, confidential

interviews, psychotherapy and speech therapy

0.6 s



Type(s) of room Max. value of Tmf

Science laboratories, art and design studios, graphics workshops 0.8 s

Sports halls and gymnasia 1.5 s

Swimming pools 2.0 s

Workshops 1.0 s

The reverberation time at lower frequencies tends to be greater than at the midrange

frequencies dealt with in the above table. Reverberation times at 250 Hz and 125 Hz should

not exceed the above figures by more than 30%.

Reverberation times in awkward shaped spaces such as corridors and stair wells are difficult

to predict and measure. In these spaces, complying with the guidance in Approved

Document E should result in satisfactory reverberation conditions.

7. Noise from Building Services

Noise from building services should not exceed the noise rating (NR) values listed below.

This includes noise from the normal operation of heating, ventilation and air conditioning

plant. Higher levels may be permissible during purge ventilation. When planning ventilation

duct runs, they should as far as possible avoid crossing partition walls, and where this is

inevitable a crosstalk silencer must be incorporated so that the sound insulation

requirements listed earlier are met.

Type (s) of room Maximum

value of Tmf

Academic staff and admin offices NR 35

Cafeterias, coffee bars etc. NR 40



NR 30

Drama studios, music practice rooms NR 30

Entrance halls, corridors, stairwells, atria and circulation spaces NR 40

Halls and rooms for music drama and other live performances NR 30

Large lecture theatres and flagship conference rooms NR 30

Lecture theatres up to 100 seats NR 30

Library circulation and media storage areas NR 35

Library study areas and Recording studios NR 30


confidential interviews, psychotherapy, speech therapy etc.

NR 35

Science laboratories, art and design studios, graphics workshops NR 30

Sports halls and gymnasia NR 35

Swimming pools NR 50

Workshops NR 35



8. Acoustic Design of Residential Accommodation

The Building Regulations Approved Document E – Resistance to the passage of sound,

provides guidance and sets the requirements for the acoustic design of residential

accommodation